- Computers & electronics
- Audio & home theatre
- AV receivers
- Denon
- Stereo Receiver AVR-4810CI
- Owner's manual
advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of
145
Graphical User Interface Use this manual in combination with the operating guide displayed on the GUI screen. GUI Menu Operation (vpage 30) GUI Menu Map (vpage 29) Language (vpage 57) Remote Control Unit Operations (vpage 108) AV SURROUND RECEIVER AVR-4810CI Owner’s Manual n SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. I IMPOTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/ apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. CAUTION: •The ventilation should not be impeded by covering the ventilation openings with items, such as newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, etc. •No naked flame sources, such as lighted candles, should be placed on the unit. • Observe and follow local regulations regarding battery disposal. • Do not expose the unit to dripping or splashing fluids. •Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on the unit. ATTENTION: •La ventilation ne doit pas être gênée en recouvrant les ouvertures de la ventilation avec des objets tels que journaux, rideaux, tissus, etc. •Aucune flamme nue, par exemple une bougie, ne doit être placée sur l’appareil. •Veillez à respecter les lois en vigueur lorsque vous jetez les piles usagées. •L’appareil ne doit pas être exposé à l’eau ou à l’humidité. •Ne pas poser d’objet contenant du liquide, par exemple un vase, sur l’appareil. CAUTION: To completely disconnect this product from the mains, disconnect the plug from the wall socket outlet. The mains plug is used to completely interrupt the power supply to the unit and must be within easy access by the user. PRECAUTION: Pour déconnecter complètement ce produit du courant secteur, débranchez la prise de la prise murale. La prise secteur est utilisée pour couper complètement l’alimentation de l’appareil et l’utilisateur doit pouvoir y accéder facilement. FCC Information (For US customers) n NOTE ON USE / OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L’UTILISATION 1. COMPLIANCE INFORMATION Product Name: AV Surround Receiver Model Number: AVR-4810CI This product contains FCC ID: PPQ-NM100BB. This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this product may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this product must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Denon Electronics (USA), LLC 100 Corporate Drive, Mahwah, NJ 07430-2041 Tel. 201-762-6500 (Main) 2. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modification not expressly approved by DENON may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 3. CAUTION • To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirement, separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this product and all persons. • This product and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 4. NOTE This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This product generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the product OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. • Keep the unit free from moisture, water, and dust. • Protéger l’appareil contre l’humidité, l’eau et la poussière. • Do not let foreign objects into the unit. • Ne pas laisser des objets étrangers dans l’appareil. • Avoid high temperatures. Allow for sufficient heat dispersion when installed in a rack. • Eviter des températures élevées. Tenir compte d’une dispersion de chaleur suffisante lors de l’installation sur une étagère. • Do not let insecticides, benzene, and thinner come in contact with the unit. • Unplug the power cord when not using the • Ne pas mettre en contact des insecticides, du benzène et un diluant avec l’appareil. unit for long periods of time. • Débrancher le cordon d’alimentation lorsque l’appareil n’est pas utilisé pendant de longues périodes. IC Information (For Canadian customers) 1. PRODUCT This product contains 4491A-NM100BB. This product complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this product may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this product must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. APPAREIL Cet appareil contiens 4491A-NM100BB. Cet appareil est conforme à la norme CNR-210 du Canada. L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. • Handle the power cord carefully. Hold the plug when unplugging the cord. • Manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec précaution. Tenir la prise lors du débranchement du cordon. * (For apparatuses with ventilation holes) • Do not obstruct the ventilation holes. • Ne pas obstruer les trous d’aération. • Never disassemble or modify the unit in any way. • Ne jamais démonter ou modifier l’appareil d’une manière ou d’une autre. 2. CAUTION To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that permitted for successful communication. ATTENTION Afin de réduire le risque d’interférence aux autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d’antenne et son gain de façon à ce que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne soit pas supérieure au niveau requis pour l’obtention d’une communication satisfaisante. II n Contents Getting Started·······································································2 Playback····················································································66 Flow of Operations Through Playback·········································2 Cautions on Handling····································································2 Cautions on Installation································································2 Preparations···················································································3 Accessories···················································································3 About the Remote Control Unit·····················································3 Part Names and Functions····························································4 Front Panel·····················································································4 Display···························································································5 Rear Panel······················································································6 Remote Control Unit······································································7 Important Information·································································66 Playing Components····································································66 Playing a Blu-ray Disc Player/DVD Player·····································66 Playing an iPod® Using a Control Dock for iPod··························66 Playing an iPod® Connected Directly to the AVR-4810CI’s USB Port······················································································68 Tuning in Radio Stations·····························································69 Listening to FM/AM Broadcasts··················································70 Listening to XM Satellite Radio····················································71 Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio··············································73 Listening to HD Radio Technology···············································75 Playing Network Audio, USB Memory Devices························76 Listening to Internet Radio··························································78 Playing Files Stored on a Computer·············································80 Playing Files Stored on USB Memory Devices····························81 Listening to Napster····································································82 Listening to Rhapsody·································································83 Operations During Playback·······················································85 Adjusting the Master Volume·······················································85 Turning Off the Sound Temporarily (Muting)································85 Listening with Headphones·························································85 To Stop·························································································85 Stopping Playback Temporarily·····················································85 Fast-forwarding or Fast-reversing················································85 To Cue to the Beginning of a Track···············································85 Playing Repeatedly······································································86 Selecting Tracks············································································86 Shuffling Playback········································································86 Playing in Random Order·····························································86 Searching Pages··········································································86 Searching by First Letter······························································86 Selecting the Surround Mode (Surround Mode)······················87 Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality (Audio/Video Adjust)···································································90 Adjusting the Sound (Audio Adjust)·············································90 Adjusting the Picture Quality (Picture Adjust)······························95 Connections··············································································9 Important Information···································································9 Cables Used for Connections························································9 Converting Input Video Signals for Output (Video Conversion Function)························································ 10 Installing the Speakers································································11 Speaker Connections···································································14 Connecting Devices·····································································17 Connecting the Power Cord························································28 Once Connections are Completed··············································28 Turning the Power On··································································28 Turning the Power Off··································································28 Settings·····················································································29 GUI Menu Map·············································································29 GUI Menu Operation····································································30 Example of the Display of the GUI Mark at a Title·······················30 Examples of GUI Menu Screen Displays·····································30 Selecting the Input Source··························································31 Make the Optimal Speaker Settings, and Correct the Room Acoustics (Audyssey™ Auto Setup)··········································32 Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup)································39 Making the Input Settings (Source Select)·······························57 Checking the Status (Information)······························96 Other Operations and Convenient Functions········97 Other Operations·········································································97 Playing a Blu-ray Disc Player Compatible with DENON LINK 4th·········································································97 Playing Super Audio CD·······························································98 Recording on an External Device (REC OUT mode)····················98 Convenient Functions··································································99 HDMI Control Function································································99 Setting the Power to Standby After a Certain Amount of Time (Sleep Timer Function)······························································· 100 Adjust the Volume of the Speakers············································ 100 Saving Frequently Used Settings (Quick Select Function)········· 101 Playing the Same Network Audio on Different Devices Connected in a Network (Party Mode Function)························ 101 Operating a Wireless LAN-Compatible Mobile Terminal to Play Music and Still Pictures······················································ 102 Operating the AVR-4810CI with a Browser (Web Control Function)······························································ 103 Various Memory Functions························································ 104 Playing in ZONE2/ZONE3/ZONE4 (Multi-zone Function)· ···············································································105 Audio Output··············································································105 Video Output··············································································105 Playback······················································································106 Menu Operation·········································································107 Quick Select Function································································107 Sleep Timer Function·································································107 Getting Started Operating the Connected Devices by Remote Control Unit··········································································108 Connections Settings Playback Multi-zone Remote Control Information Operating the Main Remote Control Unit·······························108 Operating AV Equipment··························································· 108 Presetting··················································································· 109 Operating Preset Components·················································· 109 Setting the Remote ID······························································· 112 Learning Function······································································ 113 MACRO Function······································································· 114 Punch Through Function····························································· 114 Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit···································· 115 Adjusting the Backlight’s Brightness·········································· 115 Specifying the Zone Used with the Main Remote Control Unit · ································································································· 115 Resetting the Main Remote Control Unit·································· 116 Operating the Sub Remote Control Unit·································117 Switching Zones········································································ 119 Switching the Multi-zone Input Source to the Same Input Source as Used in the MAIN ZONE································· 119 Setting the Zone for Which the Sub Remote Control Unit is Used (ZONE SELECT LOCK Mode)··········································· 119 Setting the Remote ID······························································· 119 Resetting the Settings······························································· 119 Other Information······························································120 Troubleshooting·································································130 Restoring All the Settings to as They were at the Time of Purchase (Resetting the Microprocessor)································134 Troubleshooting Specifications·······································································135 Getting Started Flow of Operations Through Playback Perform the operations leading to playback on the AVR-4810CI in the order shown below. Connections Installing/Setting the Speakers (vpage 11) Speaker Connections (vpage 14) Connecting Devices (vpage 17) Turning the Power On (vpage 28) Settings Audyssey™ Auto Setup (vpage 32) Manual Setup (vpage 39) Cautions on Handling • Before turning the power switch on Check once again that all connections are correct and that there are no problems with the connection cables. • Power is supplied to some of the circuitry even when the unit is set to the standby mode. When traveling or leaving home for long periods of time, be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet. • About condensation If there is a major difference in temperature between the inside of the unit and the surroundings, condensation (dew) may form on the operating parts inside the unit, causing the unit not to operate properly. If this happens, let the unit sit for an hour or two with the power turned off and wait until there is little difference in temperature before using the unit. • Cautions on using mobile phones Using a mobile phone near this unit may result in noise. If so, move the mobile phone away from this unit when it is in use. • Moving the unit Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Next, disconnect the connection cables to other system units before moving the unit. • Note that the illustrations in these instructions may differ from the actual unit for explanation purposes. b Perform “Manual Setup” as necessary. Source Select (vpage 57) List of preset codes···································End of this manual Cautions on Installation Note: For proper heat dispersal, do not install this unit in a confined space, such as a bookcase or similar enclosure. Specifications Playback b Playing Components (vpage 66) Selecting the Surround Mode (vpage 87) Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality (vpage 90) b b Note b Wall Accessories Check that the following parts are supplied with the product. (RC-1121) Operating Range of the Remote Control Unit Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it. w Load the two batteries properly as indicated by the marks in the battery compartment. (RC-1126) (RC-1121) R03/AAA LR6/AA 30° Q1 Q2 or Approx. 23 feet / 7 m e Put the rear cover back on. (RC-1126) NOTE Q4 Q5 Specifications Q3 The set may function improperly or the remote control unit may not operate if the remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight, strong artificial light from an inverter type fluorescent lamp or infrared light. Troubleshooting Q0 (RC-1121) 30° Remote Control Information i (RC-1126) Multi-zone y q Lift the clasp and remove the rear lid. Playback (DM-A409, Cord length: Approx. 25 ft / 7.6 m)........................ 1 Inserting the Batteries Settings q Owner’s manual....................................................................... 1 w Getting started......................................................................... 1 e Warranty (for North America model only)................................. 1 r Service station list.................................................................... 1 t Power cord (Cord length: Approx. 6.2 ft / 1.9 m)..................... 1 y Main remote control unit (RC-1126).......................................... 1 u LR6/AA batteries (for RC-1126)................................................. 2 i Sub remote control unit (RC-1121)........................................... 1 o R03/AAA batteries (for RC-1121).............................................. 2 Q0 FM indoor antenna................................................................... 1 Q1 AM loop antenna (small, for AM broadcasts)........................... 1 Q2 AM loop antenna (large, for HD Radio broadcasts).................. 1 Q3 Dipole antenna (for HD Radio broadcasts)............................... 1 Q4 Rod antenna for wireless LAN connection............................... 1 Q5 Setup microphone In addition to the AVR-4810CI, the included main remote control unit (RC-1126) can also be used to operate the equipment listed below. q DENON system components w Non-DENON system components • To operate component products other than DENON, you must set the preset code (vpage 109 “Presetting”). • If you are using a non-DENON AV device, or if you cannot operate the device even after registering the preset code, memorize the other device’s remote control signal in the AVR-4810CI remote control unit (vpage 113 “Learning Function”). • Insert the specified batteries in the remote control unit. • Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate even when the remote control unit is operated close to the unit. (The supplied batteries are only for verifying operation.) • When inserting the batteries, be sure to do so in the proper direction, following the “q” and “w” marks in the battery compartment. • To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid: • Do not use a new battery together with an old one. • Do not use two different types of batteries. • Do not attempt to charge dry batteries. • Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or dispose of batteries in flames. • If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery compartment and insert new batteries. • Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long periods. • Used batteries should be disposed of in accordance with the local regulations regarding battery disposal. Connections Thank you for purchasing this DENON product. To ensure proper operation, please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the product. After reading them, be sure to keep them for future reference. t NOTE About the Remote Control Unit Getting Started Preparations Getting Started GWith the door openH Part Names and Functions E4 E5 E3 E2 E1 E0 W9 W8 W7 W6 Front Panel For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ). Connections Q2 Q1 o i Q0 u y Settings Q7 Playback Multi-zone Q3 Q4 Q5 Remote Control Information q Q6 w e q Power operation button (ON/STANDBY)············································ (28) Troubleshooting w Power indicator (hON jOFF)·················· (28) e Power switch··············································· (28) r Door Specifications When you are using buttons and/or terminals behind the door, press the bottom of the door to open it. When not using buttons and/or terminals behind the door, close it. Be careful not to catch your fingers when closing the door. r t t QUICK SELECT buttons·····························(101) y MASTER VOLUME control knob················ (85) u AUDYSSEY DYNAMIC VOLUME™ indicator················· (92) i AUDYSSEY DSX™ indicator······················ (93) oMaster volume indicator Q0 Display Q1 Remote control sensor································· (3) Q2 SOURCE SELECT knob······························· (31) Q3 SOURCE button··········································· (31) Q4 TUNING PRESET button················· (70, 72, 75) Q5 ZONE 2/3/4 / REC SELECT button····· (98, 106) Q6 VIDEO SELECT button································ (60) Q8 Q9 W0 W1 W2 Q7 Headphones jack (PHONES)······················· (85) Q8 ZONE2 ON/OFF button····························· (106) Q9 ZONE3 ON/OFF button····························· (106) W0 ZONE4 ON/OFF button····························· (106) W1 MENU button··············································· (30) W2 Cursor buttons (uio p)··························· (30) W3 ENTER button·············································· (30) W4 RETURN button··········································· (30) W5 V.AUX INPUT connectors··························· (24) W6 SETUP MIC jack··········································· (33) W3 W4 W5 W7 HDMI IN connector······································ (17) W8 USB (iPod DIRECT) port······························ (24) W9 STATUS button··········································· (96) E0 DSX button·················································· (93) E1 RESTORER button······································· (94) E2 DIRECT/STEREO button······················· (88, 89) E3 PURE DIRECT button·································· (89) E4 DSP SIMULATION button··························· (88) E5 STANDARD button······································ (87) Display W1 Q9 Q8Q7 Q6 Q5 Q4 W0 Q3 Q2 Q1 u y r t Connections Q0 o i Getting Started Part Names and Functions Settings w e Information display The input source name, surround mode, setting values and other information are displayed here. These indicators light during party mode (vpage 101 “Playing the Same Network Audio on Different Devices Connected in a Network (Party Mode Function)”). • ORGANIZER This lights to indicate that party mode has started as Organizer. • ATTENDEE This lights to indicate that party mode has started as Attendee. Q1 AUDYSSEY MULTEQ XT indicators Lighting is as follows, depending on the setting of “Dynamic EQ” (vpage 92) and “Dynamic Volume” (vpage 93). r Output signal channel indicators t Monitor output indicators y QUICK SELECT indicators u Master volume indicator i MUTE indicator o RESTORER indicator This lights when the RESTORER mode is selected (vpage 94). : When “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” are “ON”. • : When the “Dynamic EQ” setting is “ON” and the “Dynamic Volume” setting is “OFF”. • : When “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” are “OFF”. Q2 SLEEP indicator This lights when the sleep mode is selected (vpage 100). Q3 Multi zone indicators These light when the power for the respective zone is turned on. Q5 Input mode indicators Q6 D.LINK indicator This lights when playing using DENON LINK connections (vpage 98 “Playing Super Audio CD”). Q7 HDMI indicator This lights when playing using HDMI connections. Q8 Tuner reception mode indicators These light according to the reception conditions when the input source is set to “TUNER” or “HD Radio”. • STEREO In the FM mode, these light when receiving analog stereo broadcasts. • TUNED Lights when the broadcast is properly tuned in. • AUTO These light when in the auto tuning mode. Q9 Recording output source indicator Specifications This lights when the mute mode is selected (vpage 85). • This lights when Advanced AL24 Processing (vpage 122) or AL 24 Processing Plus (vpage 122) is activated. Troubleshooting These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting (vpage 43 “Monitor Out”). When set to “Auto (Dual)”, the indicators light according to the connection status. Q4 Advanced AL24 indicator Remote Control Information These light when digital signals are input. When playing HD Audio sources, the“ ” indicator lights when an extension channel (a channel other than the front, center, surround, surround back or LFE channel) is input. If there are two or more extension channels, the “ ” and “ ” indicators light. Q0 PARTY indicators Multi-zone q Input signal indicators w Input signal channel indicators e Playback q This lights when the REC OUT mode is selected (vpage 98). W0 Decoder indicators These light when the respective decoders are operating. W1 HD indicator This lights during HD Radio reception. Getting Started Part Names and Functions Rear Panel W0 e Q9 Q8 Q7 Q5 Q6 Q5 Q4 Q3 Q2 u Q1 Q0 Connections Settings Playback Multi-zone W2 W3 W2 W1 Remote Control Information Troubleshooting q w e rt y Specifications q RS-232C connector······································ (26) w REMOTE CONTROL jacks··························· (26) e Analog audio connectors····················(18 ~ 21) r TRIGGER OUT jacks···································· (26) t DOCK CONTROL jack·································· (19) y SIGNAL GND terminal································ (19) u Speaker terminals······························· (14 ~ 16) i AC inlet························································· (28) u o AC OUTLETS················································ (28) Q0 HD Radio antenna terminals······················ (23) Q1 WLAN ANTENNA terminal························· (27) Q2 ETHERNET connector································· (26) Q3 USB (iPod DIRECT) port······························ (24) Q4 XM connector·············································· (21) Q5 Digital audio connectors·····················(18 ~ 24) Q6 DENON LINK connector······························ (23) i Q7 COMPONENT VIDEO connectors········· (18, 20) Q8 HDMI connectors········································· (17) Q9 VIDEO / S-VIDEO connectors·············(18 ~ 21) W0 SIRIUS connector········································ (22) W1 FM/AM antenna terminals························· (22) W2 PRE OUT connectors··························· (25, 105) W3 EXT. IN connectors······································ (25) o n Operations Possible by Main Remote Control Unit Remote Control Unit Operations on the AVR-4810CI Operations on devices other that the AVR-4810CI Main Remote Control Unit (RC-1126) q • Preset the remote control codes of the devices to be operated (vpage 109). • The function button indicator changes depending on the Device select button you have selected. Selected Device select button Function button indicator w Q1 Q2 o TV INPUT button········································(110) Q0 Remote control signal transmitter·············· (3) Q1 QUICK SELECT button······················· (101, 107) W6 W7 W2 W3 W8 W9 E3 See “Operations Possible by Main Remote Control Unit” (vpage 7, 8) for more information. Q4 Q4 Cursor buttons (uio p)·························· (30) Q5 ENTER button·············································· (30) Q6 Return button (RTN)··································· (30) Q7 SOURCE SELECT button···························· (31) Q8 Master volume control buttons (VOL)······ (85) Q9 Muting button (MUTE)······························· (85) W0 RC SETUP button······································ (109) (POWER ON / OFF)······························ (28, 106) t y u Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 o • Muiti-zone power on button (ON) • Muiti-zone power off button (OFF) E1 Device power buttons···························· (109, 110) • Device power on button (ON) E0 • Device power off button (OFF) E2 System buttons·······························(85, 109 ~ 111) • Repeat button (RPT) E4 • Random button (RND) • Disc skip up button (Skip+) • Skip button (8, 9) • Play button (1) • Search button (6, 7) • Still / Pause button (3) E2 • Stop button (2) E3 QUICK SELECT button···························· (101, 107) E0 E4 MACRO button················································(114) E1 E0 W0 Specifications The time for which the backlight stays on can be changed (vpage 115 “Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit”). i W3 Troubleshooting Q3 Power operation buttons Remote Control Information Q2 Function buttons Q3 • STANDARD button (STD) • PURE DIRECT button (PURE) • DIRECT / STEREO button (D/ST) • DSP SIMULATION button (SIMU) W7 PARTY button··················································(101) W8 Monitor select button (M.SEL)······················· (43) W9 Video select button (V.SEL)···························· (60) E0 Multi-zone power buttons····························· (106) MACRO button···········································(114) r W1 MULTEQ® XT button (MULTEQ)···················· (92) W2 DSX button (SPKR)·········································· (93) W3 Sleep timer button (SLEEP)···················(100, 107) W4 DYNAMIC EQ™ button (DYN EQ)··················· (92) W5 DYNAMIC VOLUME™ button (DYN VOL)······ (93) W6 Surround mode buttons···························· (88, 89) Multi-zone Number buttons····························(70 ~ 75, 79) W1 E3 W4 W5 Playback e t RESTORER button (RSTR)·························· (94) y CHANNEL LEVEL button·························· (100) u Channel buttons (CH)··························(70 ~ 75) i Input source select buttons························ (31) Button name Settings SEARCH button··········································· (86) Connections Q0 q Signal transmission indicator·················· (108) w Device select buttons································ (108) e Zone indicators / MACRO indicator········· (108) r MENU button··············································· (30) Getting Started Part Names and Functions Getting Started Part Names and Functions Selected Device select button Function button indicator Button name Sub Remote Control Unit (RC-1121) Q1 Connections E5 Preset Channel buttons·····················(70 ~ 75, 79) E6 Tuner system buttons·····························(70 ~ 75) E5 E6 Settings • Tuning down / Channel down button (TU f) • Tuning up / Channel up button (TU d) • FM/AM band switching button (BAND)z • Tuning mode (Auto / Manual) button (MODE)z • Preset memory button (MEMO) z : TUNER and HD Radio only q Q2 Q3 Q4 w Playback n Multi-zone (ZONE2 / ZONE3 / ZONE4) operations (vpage 105) n Punch through setting (vpage 116) e Multi-zone Q5 Remote Control Information r t Q6 Q7 y Q8 Q9 u Troubleshooting i (DIRECT PLAY) button·······························(117) W0 W1 o Specifications Q0 W2 W3 q ZONE indicators·········································(119) w QUICK SELECT buttons····················· (101, 107) e Input source select buttons·······················(117) r SHIFT button································ (70 ~ 75, 117) t CHANNEL button·······································(117) y MENU button·······································(107, 117) u Cursor buttons (uio p)·························(117) i SEARCH button····································(86, 118) o REPEAT button·····································(86, 118) Q0 RANDOM button···································(86, 118 Q1 Remote control signal transmitter·············· (3) Q2 ZONE SELECT button································(119) Q3 Zone power on/off buttons······················ (106) Q4 Advanced setup button·····························(119) Q5 MAIN ZONE call button·····························(119) Q6 Master volume control buttons··············· (106) Q7 Muting button (MUTE)····························· (106) Q8 MEMORY button········································(117) Q9 ENTER button·············································(117) W0 RETURN button··········································(117) W1 System buttons··········································(117) W2 ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES W3 USB (DIRECT PLAY) button·················(81, 118) Important Information Cables Used for Connections Select the cables (sold separately) according to the equipment being connected. Video cables Audio and video cables HDMI connections Audio cables (Red) Component video cable (Orange) S-Video connections Coaxial digital cable Optical cable L L R R S-Video cable (Yellow) Video cable Other cables Audio cable DENON LINK connections Audio cable Network connections (wired LAN) Remote Control Information Analog (White) connections (Red) (stereo, surround) Video connections Multi-zone Optical digital connections Analog connections (monaural, for subwoofer) (Blue) Playback Coaxial digital connections (Green) Settings Component video connections HDMI cable NOTE • Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed. • When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components. • Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly (left with left, right with right). • Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in humming or noise. Connections Connections for all compatible audio and video signal formats are described in this owner’s manual. Please select the types of connections suited for the equipment you are connecting. After connections are completed, certain settings must be made on the receiver. Make the settings indicated “ Set as Necessary ” for the individual items. Getting Started Connections DENON LINK cable Ethernet cable Speaker connections Speaker cables Troubleshooting Specifications GFlow of video signals for ZONE2H Converting Input Video Signals for Output (Video Conversion Function) AVR-4810CI Connections The AVR-4810CI has 4 different types of video input/output terminal (HDMI, Component video, S-Video, Video). Use the terminals according to the devices to be connected. This function automatically converts various formats of video signals input to the AVR-4810CI into the format used to output the video signals from the AVR-4810CI to a monitor. (vpage 129 “Relationship Between Video Signals and Monitor Output”). Settings Getting Started Important Information GFlow of video signals for MAIN ZONEH AVR-4810CI Monitor Playback Video device Multi-zone Remote Control Information Output Input (IN) HDMI connector HDMI connector Output (MONITOR OUT) HDMI connector HDMI connector Component video connectors Component video connectors S-Video connector S-Video connector S-Video connector S-Video connector Video connector Video connector Video connector Video connector Troubleshooting Surround back speaker Specifications 10 Component video connectors Input Component video connectors : When 480i/576i signals are input Monitor Video device Output Input (IN) Component video connectors Component video connectors S-Video connector S-Video connector Video connector Video connector Output (MONITOR OUT) Component video connectors Video connector Input Component video connectors Video connector Set as Necessary • Set when not using the video conversion function. “Video Convert” (vpage 60) • Set when changing the resolution of the video signal. “Resolution” (vpage 61) Resolutions of HDMI-compatible TVs can be checked at “HDMI Information” – “Monitor1” or “Monitor2” (vpage 96). NOTE • HDMI signals cannot be converted into analog signals. • When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion function might not operate. • 480p/576p/1080i/720p/1080p component video input signals cannot be converted into S-Video or Video format. • When using the component video output connectors for connection to the ZONE2 monitor, the ZONE2’s on-screen display is not displayed. n Installing the speakers The illustration below shows the recommended speaker layout. Front speakers Center speaker Subwoofer z1 z 2 z 5 Surround speakers z4 z z1: 22 ~ 30Ëš z2: 90Ëš ~ 110Ëš Surround Surround back speaker speaker Front speaker 2 to 3 feet / 60 to 90 cm Point slightly downwards GAs seen from aboveH n When no surround back speaker is being used Surround back speakers Use the layout shown in the illustration below for the surround speaker. GAs seen from aboveH Front height Point slightly downwards speaker GAs seen from the sideH Front speakers Center speaker Monitor Surround speaker Point slightly downwards z1: 22 ~ 30Ëš z2: 120Ëš Subwoofer 6 Surround back speaker Front speaker Center speaker GAs seen from the sideH b1 : Recommendation for Dolby Pro Logic gz b2 : Recommendation for Audussey DSX Surround back speakers Surround speaker 2 to 3 feet / 60 to 90 cm Surround speakers GAs seen from aboveH GAs seen from the sideH Specifications Surround speaker Front speaker Troubleshooting Subwoofer Front wide speakers Front wide 2 to 3 feet / speaker 60 to 90 cm z Front wide speakers At least 1 m z1 z2 z1 Front speakers Remote Control Information Below we introduce examples of speaker layouts. Refer to these to arrange your speakers according to their type and how you want to use them. Multi-zone Surround back speaker Playback Monitor 3 Subwoofer z 2 z 1 Center speaker Monitor Settings z1: 22 ~ 30Ëš z2: 22 ~ 45Ëš z3: 55 ~ 60Ëš z4: 90 ~ 110Ëš z5: 135 ~ 150Ëš z6: 45Ëš (b2) Front speakers Surround speakers Front height speakers Use the layout shown in the illustration below for the surround back speaker. Front wide speakers Front height speakers a Speaker Layout Installing All the Speakers n When only one surround back speaker is being used Connections The AVR-4810CI supports up to 11.1-channel surround sound playback by adding front height and front wide channels to the 7.1-channel (Front/Center/Surround/ Surround Back/Subwoofer). Installing front height and front wide speakers offers an even wider and deeper sensation compared with traditional surround spacing thanks to the advanced simulation surround technology Audyssey DSX and Dolby Pro Logic gz decoder. To use Audyssey DSX, install front wide or front height speakers. (Refer to page 121 for more information on Audyssey DSX) To use Dolby Pro Logic gz, install front height speakers. (Refer to page 120 for more information on Dolby Pro Logic gz) Getting Started Installing the Speakers Surround speaker 11 Getting Started Installing the Speakers s Example Installation of Speakers Connections The AVR-4810CI supports a wide variation of surround playback such as in the example speaker installations shown below (11.1/9.1/7.1/6.1/5.1ch). It is also possible to have speaker output in rooms other than the room (MAIN ZONE) where the surround is playing (multi-zone playback), or to enjoy the high quality sound of the MAIN ZONE front speakers (using bi-wiring/bi-amping). Set “Amp Assign” as appropriate for the speaker system being used. See page 14 for more information on speaker connections. Example of Speaker Installation in MAIN ZONE Speaker system •Set “Configuration” to “7.1ch”. •Set “Extra Channel” to “SB”. MAIN ZONE 6.1ch • 5.1ch+SB (1 speaker) Settings b Connect the surround back speaker to Lch on the S.BACK terminal. b In the GUI menu, set “Speaker Configuration” – “Surround Back” to “1spkr” (vpage 41). (SB : Surrond Back / FH : Front Height / FW : Front wide) Speaker system Playback 11.1ch Example of speaker installation MAIN ZONE Multi-zone Remote Control Information MAIN ZONE • 5.1ch+SB+FH or • 5.1ch+SB+FW or • 5.1ch+FH+FW Troubleshooting 7.1ch •Set “Configuration” to “9.1ch”. •Set “Extra Channel (SB/FH/FW)” to be used. When using speaker terminals for multi-zone (ZONE2/ZONE3) Multi-zone speaker system (Example of 5.1ch+SB+FH installation) MAIN ZONE •Set “Assign Mode” to “+Z2”. ZONE2 bConnect speakers to the ZONE2 speaker terminals. MAIN ZONE •Set “Configuration” to “7.1ch”. •Set “Extra Channel (SB/FH/FW)” to be used. + ZONE2 Specifications MAIN ZONE + (Example of 5.1ch+SB installation) “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 39 ~ 41) Example of speaker installation MAIN ZONE • 5.1ch+SB or • 5.1ch+FH or • 5.1ch+FW ZONE2 + ZONE3 (Default) 12 •Set “Configuration” to “5.1ch”. MAIN ZONE 5.1ch b Use the PRE OUT terminal for the front wide channel output. • 5.1ch+SB+FH+FW 9.1ch “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 39 ~ 41) •Set “Configuration” to “11.1ch”. “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 39 ~ 41) Example of speaker installation MAIN ZONE ZONE2 ZONE3 •Set “Assign Mode” to “+Z2+Z3”. bConnect speakers to the ZONE2 and ZONE3 speaker terminals. When using front speakers with bi-wiring or bi-amping Example of speaker installation “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 39 ~ 41) Connections •When bi-wiring : Set “Front” to “Bi-WIRING”. MAIN ZONE •When bi-amp : Set “Front” to “Bi-AMP. Settings Playback bBi-wire or bi-amp the front speakers to the front speaker terminals and Bi-Wir./BiAmp speaker terminals. See page 15 on how to connect. MAIN ZONE “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 39 ~ 41) •When bi-wiring : Set “Front” to “2CH BW”. Remote Control Information MAIN ZONE Multi-zone When using different front speakers for dedicated 2-channel DIRECT/STEREO mode playback Example of speaker installation •When bi-amp : Set “Front” to “2CH BA”. bBi-wire or bi-amp the speakers used for dedicated 2-channel playback to the ZONE2 and ZONE3 speaker terminals. Switching Multi channel surround Getting Started Installing the speakers DIRECT/STEREO Troubleshooting Specifications 13 Getting Started Speaker Connections The AVR-4810CI can be connected to a maximum of three subwoofers. The same signal is output from each subwoofer terminal. Connections Front speakers Center speaker Surround speakers Subwoofer (1st unit) Settings Playback w (L) (R) q w q w q w Subwoofer with built-in amplifier (R) qw q Use when connecting surround back speakers, front height speakers or front wide spekars. n Speaker connections (2nd unit) (3rd unit) (L) A : S.BACK/F.HEIGHT/F.WIDE and F.HEIGHT/ F.WIDE speaker terminals */ */ Surround back speakers, Front height speakers or Front wide speakers Front height speakers or Front wide speakers */ (L) Multi-zone w (R) qw (L) q w (R) qw q Remote Control Information n Relationship between “Amp Assign” settings and channels output by each speaker terminal “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 39 ~ 41) Config. Troubleshooting 11.1ch (b) 9.1ch C A B Specifications For the A B C speaker terminals, the output channels are different depending on the “Amp Assign” setting. Set “Amp Assign” to suit the speaker system being used and connect the speakers referring to the following chart. 14 7.1ch 5.1ch Channels output by each speaker terminal Extra Channel S.BACK/ F.HEIGHT/ F.WIDE F.HEIGHT/ F.WIDE SB/FH/FW S.BACK F.HEIGHT SB/FW SB/FH FH/FW SB FH FW – S.BACK S.BACK F.HEIGHT S.BACK F.HEIGHT F.WIDE – F.WIDE F.HEIGHT F.WIDE – – – – b:U se the PRE OUT terminal for the front wide channel output. w When front speakers for dedicated 2-channel DIRECT/STEREO B : ZONE2 and ZONE3 speaker terminals Use when installing multi-zone speakers or dedicated 2-channel speakers. n Speaker connections w (R) q w (L) q w Front speaker (For Bi-Amp) q w q HIGH w (R) q LOW LOW q w Channels output by each speaker terminal q LOW w q q Channels output by each speaker terminal ZONE2 FRONT (2ch BW) FRONT (2ch BA) LOW w ZONE3 FRONT (2ch BW) FRONT (2ch BA) b Can be selected when “Assign Mode” is “NORMAL”. n Relationship between “Amp Assign” settings and channels output by each speaker terminal “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 39 ~ 41) “Front” Bi-Wiring Bi-Amp b1 b2 Channels output by each speaker terminal Bi-Wir. or Bi-Amp FRONT (BW) FRONT (BA) FRONT FRONT (BW) FRONT (BA) b1 Can be selected when “Assign Mode” is “NORMAL”, “+Z2” or “+Z2+Z3”. b2 Can be selected when “Assign Mode” is “NORMAL”. When making a bi-amp connection, the same signal is output from the front speaker terminal and the “Bi-Wir. or Bi-Amp“ terminal. NOTE • Use speakers compatible with bi-amp connections. • When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the shortcircuiting plate or wire between the speaker’s woofer and tweeter terminals. 15 Specifications About Bi-amp Connections These connections make for higher quality playback sound with no interference between the signals of the bass and treble units. Troubleshooting ZONE3 – ZONE3 “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 39 ~ 41) “Front” 2CH BW b 2CH BA b HIGH w (R) q Remote Control Information n Relationship between “Amp Assign” settings and channels output by each speaker terminal HIGH w (L) q Multi-zone HIGH w (L) q n Relationship between “Amp Assign” settings and channels output by each speaker terminal ZONE2 ZONE2 ZONE2 • You can make Bi-amp or Bi-wire connections to one speaker system which supports Bi-amp or Bi-wire connection as shown below. • Bi-amp or Bi-wire can only be used with speakers that support Biamp or Bi-wire. Refer to your speaker manual. (R) w “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 39 ~ 41) Assign Mode +Z2 +Z2+Z3 n Speaker connections Playback (L) Front speaker (For Bi-Amp) for 2CH DIRECT/STEREO ZONE3 speakers Use when front speakers are bi-wired or bi-amped. Settings ZONE2 speakers n Speaker connections • You can make Bi-amp or Bi-wire connections to one speaker system which supports Bi-amp or Bi-wire connection as shown below. • Bi-amp or Bi-wire can only be used with speakers that support Biamp or Bi-wire. Refer to your speaker manual. C : Bi-Wir. or Bi-Amp speaker terminals Connections q Connecting speakers for multi-zone (ZONE2/ZONE3) mode playback are bi-wired or bi-amped Getting Started Speaker Connections Getting Started Speaker Connections n When using a banana plug When the “Assign Mode” is set to “ALL Z2” or “ALL Z3”, only multi-zone audio is output from the AVR-4810CI speaker terminals. For output in the MAIN ZONE, connect the output from the AVR-4810CI pre-out terminal to the power amp in the other room. Connections Use speakers where one speaker has an impedance of 6 ~ 16 Ω/ ohms. When using a speaker with impedance of 6 Ω/ohms to 8 Ω/ ohms, make sure to set the “Speaker Impedance” in the GUI menu to “6 Ω/ohms”. ."*/;0/& Settings '- '3 NOTE $ • Connect so that the speaker cable core wires do not protrude from the speaker terminal. The protection circuit may be activated if the core wires touch the rear panel or if the + and – sides touch each other (v“Protection Circuit”). • Never touch the speaker terminals while the power supply is connected. Doing so could result in electric shock. AVR-4810CI Playback Multi-zone 4- Power amplifier Protection Circuit 43 Remote Control Information ;0/&;0/& - 3 - 3 Troubleshooting Connecting the Speaker Cables Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and + (red) and – (black) polarities on the speakers being connected to the AVR-4810CI, and be sure to interconnect the channels and polarities correctly. Specifications off about 0.03 ft/10 mm of sheathing 1 Peel from the tip of the speaker cable, then either twist the core wire tightly or terminate it. the speaker 2 Turn counterclockwise to loosen it. terminal the speaker cable’s core wire to 3 Insert the hilt into the speaker terminal. 16 Tighten the speaker terminal firmly before inserting the banana plug. the speaker terminal clockwise to 4 Turn tighten it. If the core wires touch the rear panel and the screws etc., or the ± sides touch each other, the protection circuit will be activated and the power indicator will flash red at intervals of 0.5 secs. If the protection circuit is activated, the speaker output is isolated, and the power supply goes to the standby state. If the power supply is turned off, after the power supply cord is withdrawn, please confirm that speaker cable and input cable are connected. Also, if replaying large sound levels by using a speaker having an impedance less than that specified (eg, 4 Ω/ohms), the temperature will rise, and the protection circuit might be activated. The power supply will go into the standby state, and the power indicator will flash red at 2 second intervals. In this case, please switch off the power supply, and wait until the AVR-4810CI has cooled down, and the surrounding ventilation is good. Even if there are no problems with the surrounding ventilation and connections, in the event of the protection circuit becoming activated, due to thinking that the AVR-4810CI has failed, please contact DENON Service center after switching off. Connecting Devices • Digital Video Recorder (vpage 20) • Video Cassette Recorder (vpage 20) n Connections to Other Devices n Connecting to a Home network (LAN) (vpage 26) Digital video recorder )%.* 065 )%.* 065 )%.* 065 )%.* 065 “HDMI”, “HDMI logo” and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. n Functions Usable with HDMI Connections Deep Color Eliminates on-screen color banding, for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. Enables increased contrast ratio. x.v.Color Lets HDTVs display colors more accurately. Enables displays with natural, vivid colors. “x.v.Color” is a Sony registered trademark. [Rear Panel] Auto Lip Sync (vpage 43) NOTE If you connect the receiver to a TV that supports the Auto Lip Sync function, it can automatically correct delay between the audio and video. HDMI Control Function (vpage 99) This function allows you to operate external devices from the receiver and operate the receiver from external devices. NOTE )%.* */ Monitor 1 Monitor 2 Game console )%.* 065 n Copyright Protection System (HDCP) To play DVD-Video and DVD-Audio digital video and audio via the HDMI/DVI connection, the connected Blu-ray disc player, DVD player and monitor each need to support a copyright protection system called HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). HDCP is copyright protection technology comprised of data encryption and authentication of the connected AV device. The AVR4810CI supports HDCP. Please consult the operating instructions of your Blu-ray disc player, DVD player or monitor. [Front Panel] NOTE When a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video signals are not properly output. 17 Specifications • These functions will not work if the device connected to the HDMI terminal does not support Deep Color or x.v.Color signal transfer or the Auto Lip Sync function. • The HDMI control function may not work depending on the device it is connected to and its settings. • You cannot operate a TV or Blu-ray Disc player / DVD player that is not compatible with the HDMI control function. )%.* */ Depending on the monitor you have connected, the display may not be correct when you set to “Auto (Dual)”. In such a case, set to either “Monitor 1” or “Monitor 2” (vpage 43). Troubleshooting • Components Equipped with a DENON LINK connector (vpage 23) • Video Camera / Game Console (vpage 24) • USB Port (vpage 24) • Component with Multi-channel Output connectors (vpage 25) • External Power Amplifier (vpage 25) • External Controller (vpage 26) Video cassette recorder Remote Control Information • TV (vpage 21) • Satellite Receiver / Cable Tuner (vpage 21) • XM (vpage 21) • SIRIUS (vpage 22) • FM/AM (vpage 22) • HD Radio Receiver (vpage 23) )%.* 065 HD player Satellite receiver Multi-zone n Connect the Tuner “HDMI” is the abbreviation of “High Definition Multimedia Interface”. This interface allows transfer of digital video signals and digital audio signals over a single HDMI cable. DVD player Playback n Connecting the Recording Components n About HDMI The AVR-4810CI allows connection of inputs from up to 6 HDMI devices and output to 2 monitors. Settings • Blu-ray Disc Player / DVD Player (vpage 18) • Control dock for iPod (vpage 19) • CD Player (vpage 19) • Record Player (vpage 19) Important Information Connections Connections n Connecting Devices Equipped with HDMI Terminals (vpage 17) n Connecting the Monitor (vpage 18) n Connecting the Playback Components Connecting Devices Equipped with HDMI Terminals Getting Started Connecting Devices Getting Started Connecting Devices n HDMI Setup (vpage 43) Connections Settings • Use a cable on which the HDMI logo is indicated (a certified HDMI product) for connection to the HDMI connector. Normal playback may not be possible when using a cable other than one on which the HDMI logo is indicated (a non-HDMI-certified product). • When the AVR-4810CI is connected to other devices with HDMI cables, also connect the AVR-4810CI and TV using an HDMI cable. • When connecting a device that supports Deep Color transmission, please use a cable that is compatible with Deep Color. • Video signals are not output if the input video signals do not match the monitor’s resolution. In this case, switch the Blu-ray Disc/ DVD player’s resolution to a resolution with which the monitor is compatible. Playback NOTE Multi-zone Remote Control Information • If the GUI menu “HDMI Audio Out” setting (vpage 43) is set to “Amp”, the sound may be interrupted when the monitor’s power is turned off. • The audio signal from the HDMI output terminal (sampling frequency, number of channels, etc.) may be limited by the HDMI audio specifications of the connected device regarding permissible inputs. n Connecting to a Device Equipped with a DVI-D Terminal Make settings for HDMI video/audio output. • HDMI Audio Out • RGB Range • Monitor Out • Vertical Stretch • HDMI Control • Auto Lip Sync NOTE The audio signals output from the HDMI connectors are only the HDMI input signals. Connecting the Playback Components Blu-ray Disc Player / DVD Player Select the terminal to use and connect the device. For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting Devices Equipped with HDMI Terminals” on page 17. Blu-ray Disc player / DVD player Connecting the Monitor • Select the terminal to use and connect the device. • For video connections, see “Converting Input Video Signals for Output (Video Conversion Function)” (vpage 10). 7*%&0 7*%&0 065 47*%&0 065 "6%*0 $0.10/&/57*%&0 065 : 1# 13 For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting Devices Equipped with HDMI Terminals” on page 17. Monitor "6%*0 065 3 L R L R $0"9*"065 7*%&0 47*%&0 */ 7*%&0 */ $0.10/&/57*%&0 */ : 1# 13 When an HDMI/DVI conversion cable (sold separately) is used, the HDMI video signals are converted to DVI signals, allowing connection to a device equipped with a DVI-D terminal. NOTE Troubleshooting • No sound is output when connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D terminal. Also make the audio connections. • Signals cannot be output to DVI-D devices that do not support HDCP. • Depending on the combination of devices, the video signals may not be output. Set as Necessary Specifications Set this to change the input signal to which the input source is assigned. “Input Assign” (vpage 58) Settings Related to HDMI Connections Set as necessary. For details, see the respective reference pages. n Input Assign (vpage 58) NOTE Set this to change the HDMI input terminal to which the input source is assigned. In the case of HD audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD and Dolby Digital Plus and DTS Express) audio playback, connect with HDMI (vpage 17, “Connecting Devices Equipped with HDMI Terminals”). To listen to TV audio through this device, use the optical digital or analog connection. 18 Control Dock for iPod CD Player Use a DENON control dock for iPod (ASD-1R or ASD-11R, sold separately) to connect the iPod to the AVR-4810CI. For instructions on the control dock for iPod settings, refer to the control dock for iPod’s operating instructions. Select the terminal to use and connect the device. Turntable (MM cartridge) CD player Connections Control dock for iPod Record Player "6%*0 "6%*0 065 3 $0"9*"065 R "4%3 "6%*0 065 (/% L R L R R Multi-zone R Playback L L Settings L Getting Started Connecting Devices Remote Control Information • With the default settings, the iPod can be used connected to the VCR (iPod) connector. • You can also connect the iPod you are using directly to the USB port of the AVR-4810CI (vpage 24 “USB Port”). NOTE The SIGNAL GND terminal of the AVR-4810CI is not a safety ground connection. Connect it to reduce noise when noise is excessive. Note that depending on the record player, connecting the ground line may have the reverse effect of increasing noise. In this case, it is not necessary to connect the ground line. 19 Specifications Set as Necessary Set other than when iPod is assigned to the VCR (iPod) terminal. “Input Assign” – “iPod dock“ (vpage 60) • The AVR-4810CI is compatible with record players with an MM cartridge. When you connect to a record player with an MC cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amp or a step-up transformer. • When you increase the volume without connecting the record player, there may be “booming” noise from the speakers. Troubleshooting Set as Necessary Set this to change the input signal to which the input source is assigned. “Input Assign” (vpage 58) Getting Started Connecting Devices Video Cassette Recorder Connecting the Recording Components Connections • Select the terminal to use and connect the device. • When recording analog audio, use the analog connection. • See page 98 “Recording on an External Device (REC OUT mode)” for operating instructions. Digital Video Recorder • Select the terminal to use and connect the device. • When recording analog audio, use the analog connection. • See page 80 “Recording on an External Device (REC OUT mode)” for operating instructions. For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting Devices Equipped with HDMI Terminals” on page 17. For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting Devices Equipped with HDMI Terminals” on page 17. Settings Video cassette recorder Digital video recorder "6%*0 Playback 015*$"065 "6%*0 7*%&0 "6%*0 065 3 7*%&0 065 47*%&0 065 7*%&0 $0.10/&/57*%&0 065 : 1# 13 7*%&0 */ 47*%&0 */ "6%*0 "6%*0 */ 3 015*$"*/ "6%*0 065 3 7*%&0 7*%&0 065 47*%&0 065 7*%&0 7*%&0 */ 47*%&0 */ "6%*0 "6%*0 */ 3 - Multi-zone Remote Control Information L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R Troubleshooting Specifications Set as Necessary Set as Necessary Set this to change the input signal to which the input source is assigned. “Input Assign” (vpage 58) 20 NOTE To record video signals through the AVR-4810CI, use the same type of video cable for connection between the AVR-4810CI and the player as the cable used for connection between the AVR-4810CI and the recorder. Set this to change the input signal to which the input source is assigned. “Input Assign” (vpage 58) NOTE To record video signals through the AVR-4810CI, use the same type of video cable for connection between the AVR-4810CI and the player as the cable used for connection between the AVR-4810CI and the recorder. Connect the Tuner TV For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting Devices Equipped with HDMI Terminals” on page 17. • The AVR-4810CI is an XM Ready® receiver. You can receive XM® Satellite Radio by connecting to the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock (includes home antenna, each sold separately) and subscribing to the XM service. • Plug the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock into the XM connector on the rear panel. • Position the Home Dock antenna near a south-facing window to receive the best signal. For details, see “Listening to XM Satellite Radio” (vpage 71). When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock. For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting Devices Equipped with HDMI Terminals” on page 17. Satellite Receiver / Cable Tuner 47*%&0 065 "6%*0 065 3 $0"9*"065 "6%*0 7*%&0 "6%*0 065 3 L L R L R XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock R Multi-zone L 015*$"065 Playback 47*%&0 065 "6%*0 7*%&0 Settings Select the terminal to use and connect the device. 7*%&0 065 TV 7*%&0 065 XM Connector Connections Select the terminal to use and connect the device. Satellite Receiver / Cable Tuner (Set Top Box) Getting Started Connecting Devices XM R Remote Control Information Set as Necessary Set this to change the input signal to which the input source is assigned. “Input Assign” (vpage 58) SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii. Set this to change the input signal to which the input source is assigned. “Input Assign” (vpage 58) 21 Specifications Set as Necessary Troubleshooting NOTE Keep the power cord unplugged until the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock connection have been completed. Getting Started Connecting Devices SIRIUS Connector FM/AM NOTE Connections Settings • The AVR-4810CI is a SIRIUS Satellite Radio Ready® receiver. You can receive SIRIUS® Satellite Radio by connecting to the SiriusConnect Home Tuner and subscribing to the SIRIUS service. • Plug the SIRIUS connector on the SIRIUS service. • Position the Home Tuner antenna near a south-facing window to receive the best signal. For details, see “Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (vpage 73). When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the SiriusConnect Home Tuner. SiriusConnect Home Tuner Keep the power cord unplugged until the SiriusConnect Home Tuner connection have been completed. SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii. An F-type FM antenna cable plug can be connected directly. Direction of broadcasting station FM antenna n Positioning the Antenna For a consistent satellite signal, the antenna must be positioned correctly. Use the following map to determine which area you are in and position the antenna accordingly. AM loop antenna (small, supplied) Playback 75 Ω/ohms Coaxial cable SKY FM indoor antenna (supplied) Multi-zone NORTH Remote Control Information WEST q t w b When connecting digital audio r EAST e SOUTH HORIZON Area 1 : Point the antenna toward the sky in the east, northeast, or southeast, either through a window or outside. Troubleshooting Area 2 : Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or northeast, either through a window or outside. Area 3 : Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or northwest, either through a window or outside. Area 4 : Point the antenna toward the sky in the west, northwest, or southwest, either through a window or outside. Specifications Area 5 : Put the antenna outside and point it straight up. The antenna cannot be used indoors. Set as Necessary When connecting digital of the SiriusConnect Home Tuner, perform the setting “Digital”. “Input Assign” (vpage 59) 22 Ground AM outdoor antenna HD Radio Receiver n AM loop antenna assembly Bend in the reverse direction. a. With the antenna on top of any stable surface. Mount Components Equipped with a DENON LINK Connector Multichannel playback is possible, including DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD (vpage 98 “Playing Super Audio CD”). In addition, refer to page 97 “Playing a Blu-ray Disc Player Compatible with DENON LINK 4th” for information on connecting a player that supports DENON LINK 4th edition. Blu-ray Disc player / DVD player Playback b. With the antenna attached to a wall. Connections to Other Devices "6%*0 %&/0/-*/, Multi-zone Installation hole Mount on wall, etc. 75 Ω/ohms Coaxial cable Connection of AM antennas White 2. Insert the conductor. 3. Return the lever. Remote Control Information Black 1. Push the lever. FM indoor antenna (dipole, for HD Radio broadcasting, supplied) NOTE Troubleshooting • Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously. • Even if an external AM antenna is used, do not disconnect the AM loop antenna. • Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the panel. AM outdoor antenna Specifications Ground Settings FM antenna Remove the vinyl tie and take out the connection line. Connections HD Radio broadcasting currentry is available in the United States and select other countries. AM loop antenna (for HD Radio broadcasting, supplied) • To prevent interference, install at least 3.3 feet/ 1 m away from the antenna connected Direction of broadcasting station to the AVR-4810CI’s other AM tuner terminal. Getting Started Connecting Devices Set as Necessary When connecting by use of DENON LINK, set “Digital” to “D.LINK”. “Input Assign” (vpage 59) 23 Getting Started Connecting Devices Video Camera / Game Console USB Port Select the terminal to use and connect the device. When you connect an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port, you can enjoy music, etc., stored on the iPod or USB memory device. Connections For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting Devices Equipped with HDMI Terminals” on page 17. Video camera / Game console 7*%&0 Settings 47*%&0 065 "6%*0 7*%&0 065 "6%*0 065 3 Playback Multi-zone L R L R 015*$"065 n Front panel n Rear panel iPod iPod USB memory device USB memory device or or Remote Control Information Troubleshooting Set as Necessary Set when you change the USB port for use. “USB Select” (vpage 62) Specifications Set as Necessary Set this to change the input signal to which the input source is assigned. “Input Assign” (vpage 58) NOTE When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion function might not operate. 24 • In the initial status, USB memory devices can be used by connecting them to the USB port on the front panel. • To connect an iPod to the AVR-4810CI, use the USB cable supplied with the iPod. • When you want to playback a movie file stored on the iPod, use the DENON control dock for iPod (ASD-11R or ASD-1R, sold separately) (vpage 19 “Control Dock for iPod”). • For iPods, playback is possible on iPod touch, classic and nano sold from generation 5 on. For details, check the DENON web site or page 66. NOTE • You cannot use the USB port on the front panel and rear panel simultaneously. Select and connect the USB port you are to use. • Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory device. This may cause radio interference with other devices. Component with Multi-channel Output connectors External Power Amplifier The video signal can be connected in the same way as a Blu-ray Disc player / DVD player (vpage 18 “Blu-ray Disc Player / DVD Player”). • Select the terminal to use and connect the device. • Connect when using an external power amp or an amp you already have. Power amplifier "6%*0 "6%*0 46# 800'&3 '30/5 3 463306/% - 3 463306/% #"$, - 46# 800'&3 46# 800'&3 46# 800'&3 '30/5 - 3 $&/5&3 463306/% - 3 463306/% #"$, - 3 '30/5 )&*()5 - 3 '30/5 8*%& - 3 3 L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R Multi-zone R Playback L Settings - $&/5&3 Connections Blu-ray Disc player / DVD player / External decoder Getting Started Connecting Devices Remote Control Information • When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (L). • Use the volume control on the subwoofer to control subwoofer volume. • If the subwoofer volume sounds low, use the volume control provided on the subwoofer to adjust the volume. When speakers have been connected to PRE OUT terminals, do not connect the speakers to the speaker terminals. 25 Specifications When a device is connected to the SBL/SBR terminal of the external input terminals (EXT. IN), set “Amp Assign” – “Extra Channel” (vpage 41) to “SB”. Troubleshooting NOTE Set as Necessary To play analog signals input from the external input (EXT. IN) terminal, set “Input Mode” (vpage 61) to “EXT. IN”. Getting Started Connecting Devices External Controller n RS-232C connector Connections When you connect an external control device, you can control the AVR-4810CI with the external control device. Perform the operation below beforehand. Connecting to a Home Network (LAN) n REMOTE CONTROL jacks Infrared retransmitter Infrared sensor Settings q Turn on the AVR-4810CI’s power. wTurn off the AVR-4810CI’s power from the external controller. e Check that the AVR-4810CI is in the standby mode. "69 065 Input Output Extension jack for future use. (Connect devices corresponding with room to room function to this jack.) When you connect the AVR-4810CI to a home network, you can enjoy listening to music files stored on your PC, internet radio audio and other sources. You can also control the AVR-4810CI from your PC via the Web browser. [Wired LAN] Internet Modem Computer Playback Multi-zone To WAN side To LAN port Remote Control Information To LAN port LAN port/ Ethernet connector Router Troubleshooting Set as Necessary Set this to use the RS-232C connector for the DENON RF remote controller. “232C Port” (vpage 56) Specifications When using the AVR-4810CI in combination with the DENON RF remote controller (RC-7000CI, sold separately) or RF remote receiver (RC-7001RCI, sold separately), two-way communication is enabled. The AVR-4810CI’s status information as well as iPod and Internet audio music files can be browsed watching the RF Remote Controller’s display. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the respective devices. NOTE On the GUI menu, when setting “232C Port” to “2Way Remote”, you cannot use the RS-232C connector as an external controller (vpage 56). 26 n TRIGGER OUT jacks The TRIGGER OUT output terminal outputs a maximum 12 V/150 mA electrical signal. When a device with TRIGGER IN terminal is connected via a monaural mini-plug, the connected device’s power on/standby can be controlled through linked operation to the AVR-4810CI. Set as Necessary Set to change the conditions for linked operation via the TRIGGER OUT 1 or TRIGGER OUT 2 terminal. “Trigger Out1” or “Trigger Out2” (vpage 55) When connecting a 2nd device, connect to the TRIGGER OUT 2 terminal in the same way as the TRIGGER OUT 1 terminal. For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service Provider) or a computer shop. [Wireless LAN] Required system Internet Modem Computer n Broadband Internet connection n Modem To WAN side Turn clockwise. Use for wired LAN. Some flat type Ethernet cables are easily affected by noise. We recommend using a normal type cable. Remote Control Information n Computer Multi-zone Router with access point n Ethernet cable (CAT-5 or greater recommended) Playback Rod antenna (supplied) Settings • When using the AVR-4810CI, we recommend you use a router equipped with the following functions: • Built-in DHCP server This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN. • Built-in 100BASE-TX switch When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater. • When using with a wireless LAN, prepare a broadband router with built-in access point. Connections n Router • If you have an Internet provider contract for a line on which network settings are made manually, make the settings at “Network Connecting” (vpage 46). • With the AVR-4810CI, it is possible to use the DHCP and Auto IP functions to make the network settings automatically. • When using the AVR-4810CI with the broadband router’s DHCP function enabled, the AVR-4810CI automatically performs the IP address setting and other settings. When using the AVR-4810CI connected to a network with no DHCP function, make the settings for the IP address, etc., at “Network Connecting” (vpage 46). • The AVR-4810CI is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE-compatible router is required if you have a contract for a line of the type with which the PPPoE is set. • Depending on the ISP with which you have your contract, it may be necessary to make proxy server settings to use the Internet radio function. If you made proxy server settings on the computer to connect to the Internet, make the proxy server settings on the AVR4810CI in the same way. Getting Started Connecting Devices Troubleshooting GRecommended systemH • OS : Windows® XP Service Pack2 or later, Windows Vista • Software (Prepare one of the following.) • Windows Media Player ver.11 • DLNA-compatible server software • Internet browser : Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or later • LAN port • 300 MB or more free disk space b Operation is possible with DLNA servers other than the above, but such DLNA servers are not supported. For details, check the Web. NOTE Specifications • A contract with an ISP is required to connect to the Internet. No additional contract is needed if you already have a broadband connection to the Internet. • The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact an ISP or a computer shop for details. • Depending on the server, video files may be displayed, but they cannot be played on the AVR-4810CI. 27 Getting Started Connecting the Power Cord Wait until all connections have been completed before connecting the power cord. Connections Connection to the AC outlet Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit Button only on the main unit Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON <BUTTON> [BUTTON] Once Connections are Completed Turning the Power On 1 Press <POWER>. Settings • These outlets supply power to external audio equipment. • Audio equipment with a total power consumption of 120 W (1 A) can be connected. • The power supply turns on and off together with <ON/STANDBY>. When set to “ON”, power is supplied from the outlet. When set to “STANDBY”, no power is supplied. The power indicator lights red and the power is set to the standby mode. [MAIN] to switch the main remote control unit 2 Press to “MAIN” mode (vpage 108 “Operating the Main Remote Control Unit”). Playback 3 Press <ON/STANDBY> or [POWER ON]. The power indicator flashes green and the power turns on. Multi-zone <ON/STANDBY> <POWER> Remote Control Information Power cord (included) To household power outlet (AC 120 V, 60 Hz) NOTE Troubleshooting • Insert the AC plugs securely. Incomplete connections could cause noise. • Only use the AC outlets to plug in audio equipment. Do not use them as power supplies for hairdryers or anything other than audio equipment. [ MAIN] QUICK SELECT [POWER ON] [POWER OFF] QUICK SELECT b Also press [INPUT SOURCE SELECT] or QUICK SELECT when in standby mode, the power turns on. When [INPUT SOURCE SELECT] has been pressed, the input source set with the [INPUT SOURCE SELECT] is set. If a QUICK SELECT has been pressed, the input source stored in the memory for the quick select function is set (vpage 101 “Saving Frequently Used Settings (Quick Select Function)”). Turning the Power Off [MAIN] to switch the main remote control unit 1 Press to “MAIN” mode (vpage 108 “Operating the Main Remote Control Unit”). 2 Press <ON/STANDBY> or [POWER OFF]. 3 Press <POWER>. The power is set to the standby mode. Specifications [INPUT SOURCE SELECT] 28 The power indicator turns off, and so does the power. NOTE ower continues to be supplied to some of the circuitry even when the P power is in the standby mode. When leaving home for long periods of time or when traveling, either press <POWER> to turn off the power, or unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Getting Started Settings GUI Menu Map Pressing MENU displays the GUI menu. From this menu, you can move to various setting screens. Select input source and make playback settings. n n n n n n n Play Playback Mode Input Assign Video Input Mode Rename Source Level n n n n n n Still Picture Auto Preset Preset Skip Preset Name Parental Lock Antenna Aiming Remote Control Information n n n n WIDE SCREEN SUPER STADIUM ROCK ARENA JAZZ CLUB CLASSIC CONCERT MONO MOVIE VIDEO GAME MATRIX VIRTUAL Multi-zone n n n n n Playback b The displayed menu differs according to the selected input source. Select the surround mode. STEREO DIRECT STANDARD DOLBY PLgz DOLBY PLgx, DOLBY PLg or DOLBY PL n DTS NEO:6 n neural n MULTI CH STEREO Settings SAT/CBL, VCR, DVR, V.AUX, NET/USB, Favorites, Internet Radio, Media Server, USB/iPod, Napster, Rhapsody, XM, SIRIUS, HD Radio, TUNER, PHONO, CD, DVD, HDP, TV Surround Mode (vpage 87) n n n n n Connections Source Select (vpage 57) Audio/Video Adjust (vpage 90) Adjust various audio and video parameters. n Audio Adjust n Picture Adjust Auto Setup (vpage 32) Optimize speaker settings and correct room acoustics problem. n Auto Surround n Status Mode n Audio Input Signal n HDMI Information n Quick Select n Preset Channel n n n n n n Speaker Setup HDMI Setup Audio Setup Network Setup Zone Setup Option Setup • Volume Control • Source Delete • GUI • Remote Preset Codes • Quick Select Name • Zone Rename • Trigger Out 1 • Trigger Out 2 n Option Setup (Continued) • Remote (SIRIUS/XM) • Remote ID • 232C Port • Dimmer • Setup Lock • Maintenance Mode • Firmware Update • Add New Feature Specifications Information (vpage 96) Show information about receiver settings, input signals, etc. Make detailed settings for various parameters. Troubleshooting n Audyssey™ Auto Setup n Parameter Check Manual Setup (vpage 39) n Language 29 Getting Started GUI Menu Operation Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Connections Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit Button only on the main unit Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON <BUTTON> [BUTTON] • When a TV is connected to the AVR-4810CI, the GUI menu, sound field parameters, etc., can be displayed on the TV. This allows you to operate the AVR-4810CI and make settings on it while looking at the GUI menu displayed on the TV. • Operate with the main remote control unit switched to the “MAIN” mode (vpage 108 “Operating the Main Remote Control Unit”). Settings 1 Press MENU. uip to select the menu to be set or 2 Press operated. The GUI menu is displayed on the TV screen. <SOURCE SELECT> ENTER Examples of GUI Menu Screen Displays Typical examples are described below. GExample 1H Menu selection screen (Top menu) z1 z2 Playback b To return to the previous item, press o or RETURN. Multi-zone 3 Press ENTER to enter the setting. SOURCE SELECT SAT/CBL VCR/iPod DVR V.AUX NET/USB Favorites Press MENU while the GUI menu is displayed. The GUI menu display disappears. z5 Remote Control Information z1 : List GUI menu setup icons z2 : Currently selected setup icon z3 : Currently selected setup item z4 : List of currently selected setup items z5 : G uide text for the currently selected setup item RETURN Example of the Display of the GUI Mark at a Title Items for which this mark is indicated at the title can be operated from the GUI. We recommend performing such operations from the GUI. Troubleshooting Specifications MENU uio p ENTER RETURN [INPUT SOURCE SELECT] Press i to select “ and then press p. (Or press ENTER.) Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) [SOURCE SELECT] VCR/DVR CD/PHONO ” SURROUND MODE z6 This is the GUI icon for this setting item or for the menu series to which this item belongs. z4 Select input source and make playback setteings n Exiting the GUI Menu uio p MENU z3 STEREO DIRECT DOLBY PL II DTS NEO:6 neural MULTI CH STEREO z7 Enter Stereo playback mode with tone controls z6 : Selected setup icon z7 : Options of the selected setup item 30 GExample 2H Audyssey Auto Setup screen (with illustration) z9 AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP STEP1 Preparation 1 2 3 4 5 6 z10 z11 Amp Assign Channel Skip Enter RETURN Cancel z13 Source w Recent The currently selected input source is highlighted. Network : Enter Player Selected item b Switch the selected item using ui. (Favorites), (CD), (PHONO) (Internet Radio), (USB/iPod), (Napster), Tuner : (XM), (SIRIUS), (HD Radio), (TUNER) uio p to select the input source icon, then 2 Use press ENTER. The input source is set and the source selection menu is turned off. • Use the device selection buttons on the main remote control unit to set the device to be operated beforehand. • When using with an iPod connected directly to the AVR-4810CI’s USB pot, select “USB/iPod” for the input source. • Input sources that are not going to be used can be set ahead of time. Make this setting at “Source Delete” (vpage 53). • To turn off the source selection menu without selecting an input source, press [SOURCE SELECT] again. Press [INPUT SOURCE SELECT]. Tuner The desired input source can be selected directly. ” is displayed when using a Control dock for iPod. q Input Source : The name of the highlighted input source is displayed. w Recently used sources : The recently used input sources (up to 5) are displayed. b To operate the AVR-4810CI using the main remote control unit, set the remote control unit to the “MAIN” mode (vpage 108 “Operating the Connected Devices by Remote Control Unit”). b Pressing the VCR/DVR button and the CD/PHONO button on the main remote control unit will switch between the following. VCR DVR VCR/DVR : CD/PHONO : CD PHONO e Operating on the Main Unit Turn <SOURCE SELECT>. b If “ZONE2/3/4 Rec Select”, “Video Select” or “Tuning Preset” mode is selected for the input source, press <SOURCE> before turning the <SOURCE SELECT>. 31 Specifications Switch to the next item (DVD), w Operating on the Main Remote Control Unit Network “ (Use p or ENTER to switch.) (HDP), Troubleshooting (Use i to switch.) Move DVD Video e n List Input Assign Video Input Mode Rename Source Level : Remote Control Information q (Use p or ENTER to switch.) Switch the selected item Player Display the “Source Select” menu. Switch to the next item Selected item (DVR), (Rhapsody) 1 Press [SOURCE SELECT]. SOURCE SELECT (Use u to switch.) (VCR), (V.AUX) (Media Server), Switch the main remote control unit to the “MAIN” or “MACRO” mode when performing this operation (vpage 108 “Operating the Main Remote Control Unit”). If the main remote control unit is in “ZONE2”, “ZONE3” or “ZONE4” mode, the “Source Select” menu will not be displayed when [SOURCE SELECT] is pressed. n Icon Switch the selected item (TV), Multi-zone z8 : History icon z9 : Operation guidance text z10 : Operation step indicators z11 : Illustration z12 : Guide text for the currently selected setup item z13 : Operation button guidance (SAT/CBL), Playback Start Auto Setup : q Using the “Source Select” Menu Auto Setup Start z12 Video Settings Connect the speakers and place them according to the recommendations in the manual. Set the following items if necessary. There are three ways to select the input source, as described below. qSelecting the input source using the “Source Select” menu (GUI menu) wSelecting the input source using the [INPUT SOURCE SELECT] (Main remote control unit) eSelecting the input source using the <SOURCE SELECT> (Main unit) Connections z8 eIcons for the input sources in the different categories are displayed. Selecting the Input Source Getting Started GUI Menu Operation Getting Started Make the Optimal Speaker Settings, and Correct the Room Acoustics (Audyssey™ Auto Setup) Connections The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically. n Audyssey Auto Setup Flow Settings aC onnect the Included Setup Microphone (vpage 33) Playback s Audyssey Auto Setup Preparations Multi-zone (vpage 34) Remote Control Information n Change the Amplifier Assignment (Amp Assign) (vpage 34) n Set the Channels You will not Use (Channel Skip) (vpage 34) n When Using the Front Height Speakers Important information GExample qH Audyssey MultEQ® XT automatically measures the acoustical problems in the listening environment to create the best audio experience for your home theater. • When performing Audyssey Auto Setup, the MultEQ® XT / Dynamic EQ™ / Dynamic Volume™ functions become valid (vpage 92, 93). • Use the included setup microphone (DM-A409) to perform Audyssey Auto Setup. • Measurements are performed by placing the setup microphone successively at multiple positions throughout the entire listening area, as shown in GExample qH. For best results, we recommend you measure in 6 or more positions, as shown in the illustration. Even if the listening environment is small as shown in GExample wH, measuring at multiple points throughout the listening environment results in more effective correction. FHL FL SW C FL SW C C FR GExample wH FHR FHL FL SW C FR FHR *M *M SL SR SL SR n When Using the Front Wide Speakers GExample qH FL GExample wH FR SW ( : Measuring positions) n When Using the Surround Back Speakers GExample qH FL SW C GExample wH FR FWL FL FWR SW C FR FWL FWR FR ( : Measuring positions) d Perform Audyssey Auto Setup (vpage 35) ( : Measuring positions) *M *M SL SR SL SR *M *M Troubleshooting Check the Measuring Results and Equalizer Type after Audyssey Auto Setup (Parameter Check) (vpage 38) SBL SBR SBL SL SBR SR Specifications FL : Front speaker (L) FR : Front speaker (R) FHL : Front height speaker (L) FHR : Front height speaker (R) FWL : Front wide speaker (L) FWR : Front wide speaker (R) SL SR C : Center speaker SW : Subwoofer SL : Surround speaker (L) SR : Surround speaker (R) SBL : Surround back speaker (L) SBR : Surround back speaker (R) About the main listening position (*M) The main listening position refers to the position where listeners would normally sit or where one would normally sit alone within the listening environment. Audyssey MultEQ XT uses the measurements from this position to calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer. 32 NOTE a Connect the Included Setup Microphone • Do not remove the setup microphone until Audyssey Auto Setup is completed. • When using headphones, unplug the headphones before starting Audyssey Auto Setup. When placing the setup microphone, adjust the height of the sound receiver part to the level of the listener’s ear. Settings (vpage 14 “Speaker Connections”) Playback Setup microphone Change the TV input to AVR-4810CI input. (vpage 28 “Turning the Power On”) NOTE 33 Specifications • Do not hold the microphone in your hand during measurements. • Avoid placing the microphone close to a seat back or wall as sound reflections may give inaccurate results. • When you use two or three subwoofers, please adjust the subwoofer volume controls individually so that each subwoofer level is as close as possible to 75 dB using the test tone (vpage 42) before Audyssey Auto Setup. If the subwoofer level error message appears, please select “Skip” and then press ENTER. Troubleshooting “Audyssey Auto Setup” screen is displayed when you connect the setup microphone. Remote Control Information Sound receptor If you subwoofer provides volume and crossover settings, set these as shown below before starting Audyssey Auto Setup. • Volume setting : “12 o’clock” position” or the middle of the gain knob’s range. • Low path filter setting is “Off”, or Crossover Frequency setting is “Maximum/Highest Frequency” • Phase setting : 0° • Standby mode setting : “Off” • If you connect two or three subwoofers, the best results will be achieved when: • Subwoofers are placed at equal distances from the main listening position. • Individual level controls on the back of each subwoofer are set so that each subwoofer plays at the same level. Multi-zone 1 Check the speaker connections. 2 Turn on the TV and subwoofer power. 3 Turn on the AVR-4810CI power. the setup microphone to the SETUP MIC 4 Connect jack of the AVR-4810CI. the setup microphone on a tripod or stand 5 Mount and place it in the main listening position. Connections • Loud test sounds may be played during Audyssey Auto setup. This is part of normal operation. If there is background noise in room, these test signals will increase in volume. • Do not stand between the speakers and setup microphone or allow obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. This will cause inaccurate readings. • Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt the room measurements. Close windows, silence cell phones, televisions, radios, air conditioners, fluorescent lights, home appliances, light dimmers, or other devices as measurements may be affected by these sounds. Cell phones should be placed away from all audio electronics during the measurement process as Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) may cause measurement disruptions (even if the cell phone is not in use). • Operating MASTER VOLUME during the measurements will cancel the measurements. Getting Started Make the Optimal Speaker Settings, and Correct the Room Acoustics (Audyssey™ Auto Setup) Getting Started Make the Optimal Speaker Settings, and Correct the Room Acoustics (Audyssey™ Auto Setup) s Audyssey Auto Setup Preparations around items indicate the settings. o p, set the usage method for the power 4 Pressing amp (“Assign Mode”), and then press i. NORMAL Connections STEP1 Preparation Settings Perform the following settings if adjustments, etc., are required for the speaker environment you’re using. If you do not need to perform the following settings, or have already completed them, select “Auto Setup Start” and then press ENTER. Proceed to “ STEP2 ”. Change the Amplifier Assignment (Amp Assign) Playback It is possible to switch the signals being output from the Bi-Wir. or BiAmp, FRONT, S.BACK/F.HEIGHT/F.WIDE, F.HEIGHT/F.WIDE, ZONE2 and ZONE3 speaker terminals on the AVR-4810CI to suit the speaker environment being used (vpage 39 ~ 41 “Amp Assign”). Multi-zone “Amp Assign” 1 Select and then press +Z2 +Z2+Z3 : Assign a power amp to ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio. ALL Z2 : Assign all power amps to ZONE2 audio. NOTE ALL Z2+Z3 : Assign all power amps to ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio. FREE : Freely assign power amps to the desired channels. Pressing o p, set the connection method for the 5 front speakers (“Front”), and then press i. NORMAL : This is the usual configuration. Bi-WIRING : Bi-wire the front speakers. : Bi-amp the front speakers. Bi-AMP 2CH BW ENTER. : This is the usual configuration. : Assign a power amp to ZONE2 audio. Remote Control Information 2CH BA • When you are using speaker terminals for multi-zone (ZONE2/ ZONE3), set “Assign Mode” to “+Z2” or “+Z2+Z3”. • You can set in the same way as described in “Amp Assign” on page 34. : B i-wire another front speaker for 2 channel play mode. : B i-amp another front speaker for 2 channel play mode. Since “Configuration” of AVR-4810CI is set to “5.1ch” by default, audio is not output from the surround back speakers. When using the surround back speakers with MAIN ZONE, set “Configuration” to something other than “5.1ch”, and then select “SB” in “Extra Channel”. Set the Channels You will not Use (Channel Skip) If you set the channels you will not use beforehand, those channels will not be measured. Therefore, you can save an amount of time commensurate with that which would have been taken to measure those channels. “Channel 1 Select Skip” and then press ENTER. 6 The following screen is displayed. o p, select the MAIN ZONE channel 2 Pressing configuration (“Configuration”) and then press i. 5.1ch 7.1ch 9.1ch 11.1ch Troubleshooting selecting “7.1ch” or “9.1ch” in step 2, press o 3 When p to select the channels to be used (“Extra Channel”), and then press i. Specifications n When setting “Configuration” to “7.1ch” : When using surround back channel SB FH :W hen using front height channel FW : When using front wide channel The speaker terminals and the output from the pre-out terminals can be checked on this screen. q Current settings w Speaker terminal name e Signal being output from speaker terminal r Output from pre-out terminal b Terminals not being used q are greyed out. w e Main remote control unit operation buttons n Configurable channels Subwoofer : Set the subwoofer channel. Surround Back : Set the surround back channel. r b See page 14, 15 on how to connect the speakers. Front Height : Set the front height channel. Front Wide : Set the front wide channel. n Settings Measure Skip n When setting “Configuration” to “9.1ch” :W hen using surround back channel and front height SB/FH channel : When using surround back channel and front wide SB/FW channel :W hen using front height channel and front wide FH/FW channel 34 ui to select a channel, press o p to select 2 Press the item, and then press ENTER. :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu : Measure the selected channel. : Skip the selected channel and do not measure. b To cancel, press RETURN. Displayed when “Surround Back”, “Front Height” and “Front Wide” are set using “Extra Channel” in “Amp Assign”. :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu d Perform Audyssey Auto Setup STEP4 Calculation the 2 Move microphone STEP3 the 4 On screen, select “Next setup to position 2, select “Measure”, and then press ENTER. → Calculation”, and then press ENTER. STEP2 Speaker Detection b To skip this step, select “Next → Calculation” and proceed to STEP4 . 3 ~ 8. b When “Subwoofer” is set to “Skip” with “Channel Skip”, this measurement is not taken, and the process proceeds to “w Measure each speaker”. w Measure each speaker b Once the measurements in step q are complete, the measurements in step w start automatically. b The measuring channel changes depending on the setting of “Amp Assign” (vpage 39 ~ 41) and “Channel Skip” (vpage 34). STEP5 the 5 On screen, press ui b To skip this step, select “Next → Calculation” and proceed to STEP4 . b Measure in at least 6 positions in and around the main listening position. Even though you can complete measurement with at least 6 positions, it is advisable to use more than 6 (a maximum of 8 positions). to select the item you want to check, and then press ENTER. Speaker Config. Check Distance Check Channel Level Check Crossover Freq. Check b Subwoofers may measure a greater reported distance than the actual distance due to added electrical delay common in subwoofers. 6 Press ui to select the channel you want to check. The measurement result of each speaker is displayed. b If you want to check another item, press RETURN. b Select “Next → Store” and press ENTER to proceed to “ STEP6 ”. See overleaf Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu 35 Specifications e Check the speaker detection results When measuring ends, the speaker detection results are displayed. b Select “Next → Measurement” and press ENTER to proceed to “ STEP3 ”. b Press u to select “Retry”, and when you press ENTER, measuring at the main listening position starts again. Troubleshooting When an error message is displayed, check “Error Messages” for details (vpage 37). STEP5 Check When measurement of position 8 is completed, a “Measurements finished.” message is displayed. Remote Control Information b To stop measuring, select “Cancel” and then press ENTER. Multi-zone step 2, 3 Repeat measuring positions q Measure the subwoofer level b Analysis takes several minutes to complete. The time required for this analysis depends on the number of speakers connected. The more connected speakers there are, the longer it takes to perform analysis. Playback “Measure” and 1 Select then press ENTER. Measuring results are analyzed, and the frequency response of each speaker in the listening room is determined. Settings The measurement of the 2nd position starts. Connections • Audyssey Auto Setup detects the presence of each speaker and automatically calculates the speaker size, channel level, distance and crossover frequency settings. In addition, acoustical distortions are corrected within the listening area. • When measuring begins, a test tone is output from each speaker. • Position and connect all speakers before commencing Audyssey Auto Setup. STEP3 Measurement Getting Started Make the Optimal Speaker Settings, and Correct the Room Acoustics (Audyssey™ Auto Setup) Getting Started Make the Optimal Speaker Settings, and Correct the Room Acoustics (Audyssey™ Auto Setup) STEP6 Store “Store” and 7 Select then press ENTER. Connections Save the results. measuring b The save operation takes about 30 seconds to complete. Settings NOTE Playback During saving of measuring results, be sure not to turn off the power. • If there is a disparity between the results and the connection status, or if an error message is displayed, check the error message against the errors listed in the “Error Messages” section (vpage 37) and perform Audyssey Auto Setup again. • If the result still differs from the actual connection status after remeasurement or the error message still appears, it is possible that the speakers are not connected properly. Turn the AVR-4810CI off, check the speaker connections and repeat the measurement process from the beginning. Turn the AVR-4810CI off, check the speaker connections and repeat the measurement process from the beginning. • If you change a speaker position or orientation, perform Audyssey Auto Setup again to obtain optimal equalizer correction. Multi-zone the screen 8 When shown on the right Remote Control Information 9 Select “Exit” and then press ENTER. Troubleshooting appears, unplug the setup microphone from the AVR-4810CI SETUP MIC jack. After performing Audyssey Auto Setup, do not change the speaker connections or subwoofer volume. In event of a change, perform Audyssey Auto Setup again. n Exiting the GUI Menu Press MENU while the GUI menu is displayed. The GUI menu display disappears. NOTE Specifications 36 Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu Error messages (examples) Error Messages Measures • Correct measurement is not possible due to • When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier inappropriate subwoofer volume. (active type), use “SW Level Matching” to adjust the subwoofer volume (vpage 38). • When using a subwoofer without a built-in amplifier, select “Skip”, and then press ENTER. NOTE n When Performing Audyssey Auto Setup Over Again n When Measuring has Stopped • Not all speakers could be detected. • The front L speaker was not properly detected. • Connect the included setup microphone to the SETUP MIC jack of the AVR-4810CI. • Check the speaker connections. Multi-zone ress RETURN, the “Cancel auto setup?” prompt is displayed. P Press o p and select “Yes”, then press ENTER. Playback Press ui to select “Retry”, and then press ENTER. • Included setup microphone is not connected. Settings Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections. Connections An error message is displayed if it was not possible to complete Audyssey Auto Setup due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If this happens, check the relevant items, be sure to take the necessary measures, then perform Audyssey Auto Setup over again. Error contents Getting Started Make the Optimal Speaker Settings, and Correct the Room Acoustics (Audyssey™ Auto Setup) • Displayed speaker could not be detected. • Check the connections of the displayed speaker. Remote Control Information • Too much noise in the room for accurate • Either turn off any device generating noise or measurements to be made. move it away. • Perform again when the surroundings are quieter. • Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low for • Check the speaker installation and the direction in accurate measurements to be made. which the speakers are facing. • Adjust the subwoofer’s volume. Troubleshooting Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu 37 Specifications • Displayed speaker connected with the polarities • Check the polarities of the displayed speaker. reversed. • For some speakers, this error message may be displayed even if the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure the connection is correct, press ui to select “Skip”, then press ENTER. Getting Started Make the Optimal Speaker Settings, and Correct the Room Acoustics (Audyssey™ Auto Setup) Subwoofer Level Error Message and How to Adjust Connections The optimal level of the subwoofer channel is 75 dB. During subwoofer level measurement (d:Perform Audyssey Auto Setup, “ STEP2 : Speaker Detection” (vpage 35), 1 - q), an error message is displayed when the subwoofer level is outside the 72 ~ 78 dB range. When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (active type), adjust the subwoofer volume so that the subwoofer level is within the 72 ~ 78 dB range. “SW Level 1 Select Matching” and then 3 Adjust control This is displayed after Audyssey Auto Setup is completed. the volume on your subwoofer so that the measured level is within the 72 ~ 78 dB Blue range. press ENTER. Settings Playback Multi-zone “SW Test 2 Select Start” and then press i to select 1 Press “Parameter Check”, and the measured level is within the 72 ~ 78 dB 4 When range, press ENTER. “Next” and 5 Select then press ENTER. Remote Control Information Subwoofer level measurement begins. During measuring, a “Testing …” message is displayed. The measured level appears on the level indicator after about 3 ~ 5 seconds. Proceed to “d:Perform Audyssey Auto Setup, STEP2 : Speaker Detection” (vpage 35), 1 - w. then ENTER or p. b If the measured level is within the 72 ~ 78 dB range, the level indicator is blue. ENTER. Check the Measuring Results and Equalizer Type after Audyssey Auto Setup (Parameter Check) press ui to select the item you want to check, and 2 Press then press ENTER or p. Speaker Config. Check Distance Check Crossover Freq. Check EQ Check Channel Level Check 3 Press ui to select the channel you want to check. The measurement result of each speaker is displayed. Troubleshooting b When you selected “EQ Check” in step 2, press ui to select the Correction curve you want to check (“Audyssey” or “Audyssey Flat”). b When you want to check another item, press RETURN. Pressing RETURN returns you to step 2; from there, proceed to steps 2 and 3. Red Specifications If you set “Restore” to “Yes”, you can return to Audyssey Auto Setup measurement result (value calculated at the start by MultEQ XT) even when you have changed each setting manually. b If the measured level is outside the 72 ~ 78 dB range, the level indicator is red. b When measuring stops, press ENTER. 38 Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu For details on how to select, set and cancel settings for each menu, see “GUI Menu Operation” (vpage 26). Default settings are underlined. Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings made in Audyssey Auto Setup. Change power amp assignment to suit the speaker system configuration (Amp Assign) Connections n Examples of Amp Assign Menu Screen Displays [1st page] Settings Set when changing Audyssey Auto Setup settings, or when changing the audio, video, display or other settings. • If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey Auto Setup, it will not be possible to select MultEQ® XT, Dynamic EQ™ and Dynamic Volume™ (vpages 92, 93). • Can be used without changing the settings. Please set if necessary. • See pages 29, 30 for “GUI Menu Map” and “GUI Menu Operation”. Making the Speaker Settings (Speaker Setup) Set items 1 ~ 4 referring to “Steps for setting ‘“Amp Assign”’ (vpage 40, 41) AMP ASSIGN n Items that can be set with the Manual Setup procedure [1/2] Making the speaker settings (Speaker Setup) vpage 39 Item 3 Config Extra ch Assign Mode Front Playback Item 1 Item 2 7.1ch SB +Z2 NORMAL ZONE2: Multi-zone Item 4 Making the HDMI settings (HDMI Setup) vpage 43 Getting Started Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) ZONE3: Return Select the speaker channel configuration RETURN [2nd page] b The signal being output by each speaker can change according to “Amp Assign” setting. b The speaker terminals and the output from the pre-out terminals can be checked on this screen. Making the network settings (Network Setup) vpage 46 AMP ASSIGN [2/2] TERMINAL Making the Multi-zone settings (Zone Setup) vpage 52 Making other settings (Option Setup) vpage 53 q FRONT CENTER SURR. SB/H/W H/W SW/BA ZONE2 ZONE3 SIGNAL FRONT CENTER SURR. S.BACK ----ZONE2 --- PRE F C S SB H W SW Z2 Z3 RETURN Return w speaker e terminal/signal Connect speaker to match above r Specifications Making language settings (Language) vpage 57 7.1ch SB +Z2 :NORMAL Current settings Speaker terminal name Signal being output from speaker terminal Output from pre-out terminal b Terminals not being used are greyed out. Troubleshooting OPTION Config Extra Ch Assign Mode Front q w e r Remote Control Information Making the audio settings (Audio Setup) vpage 44 See also page 14, 15 for how to connect the speakers. 39 Getting Started Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) n “Free Assign” settings n Steps for setting “Amp Assign” Connections It is possible to freely select the signal being output from each speaker terminal (except for “Bi-Wir./BiAmp”, “ZONE2”, “ZONE3”) when “Assign Mode” is set to “FREE”. In the screen below, press ui to select the speaker terminal, then press o p to select the output signal. Item 1 : “Configuration” settings Select MAIN ZONE channel configuration. AMP ASSIGN 5.1ch 7.1ch 9.1ch [2/2] 11.1ch TERMINAL Config 11.1ch Extra ch SB/FH/(FW) Assign Mode FREE Settings Item 2 : “Extra Channel” settings FRONT CENTER SURR. SB/H/W H/W SW/BA ZONE2 ZONE3 Select the channels to be used from among surround back speakers (SB), front height speakers (FH), front wide speakers (FW). Playback SB FH FW SB/FH SB/FW SIGNAL FRONT CENTER SURR. S.BACK HEIGHT ------- PRE F C S SB H W SW Z2 Z3 RETURN Return Select the signal output from the FRONT terminals FH/FW Multi-zone Refer to the chart below for the signals that can be output to each speaker terminal. 5.1ch 5.1ch+FW 5.1ch+SB 5.1ch+SB+FH 5.1ch+FH Speaker terminal 5.1ch+SB+FH+FW 5.1ch+SB+FW 5.1ch+FH+FW Remote Control Information Determine the maximum number of channels used by the AVR-4810CI. Item 3 : “Assign Mode” settings Select power amp usage method. Signal NORMAL +Z2 +Z2+Z3 ALL Z2 Troubleshooting Item 4 : “Front” settings Specifications Bi-AMP Bi-WIRING 2CH BW FREE Set channels assigned to power amps (vpage 40). 2CH BA Perform the settings for each speaker using “Speaker Configuration” (vpage 41). See page 41 for details of the settings in “Assign Mode” and “Front”. 40 Main remote control unit operation buttons FRONT CENTER SURROUND S.BACK *1 F.HEIGHT *2 F.WIDE*3 ZONE2 ZONE2 ZONE2 ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE3 ZONE3 ZONE3 CENTER SURROUND FRONT CENTER SURROUND S.BACK *1 F.HEIGHT *2 F.WIDE*3 CENTER S.BACK *1 ZONE2 ZONE3 ––– Z2/Z3(MONO) ––– Select front speaker connection method. NORMAL ALL Z2+Z3 FRONT CENTER SURROUND S.BACK *1 F.HEIGHT *2 F.WIDE*3 S.BACK / F.HEIGHT / F.WIDE FRONT CENTER SURROUND S.BACK *1 F.HEIGHT *2 F.WIDE*3 FRONT :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu F.HEIGHT / F.WIDE Z2/Z3(MONO) Z2/Z3(MONO) Z2/Z3(MONO) ––– ––– ––– – – – : No channel output *1 : Can be selected when “SB” is set in “Extra Channel”. *2 : Can be selected when “FH” is set in “Extra Channel”. *3 : Can be selected when “FW” is set in “Extra Channel”. • When “Z2/Z3 (MONO)” is selected, ZONE2 and ZONE3 use monaural audio. The ZONE2 mono audio is output from the speaker terminal’s L ch and the ZONE3 mono audio is output from the R ch. • When selecting “S.BACK” for the center speaker terminal output, set the “Speaker Configuration” – “Surround Back” (vpage 41) to “1spkr”. • When selecting “ZONE2” or “ZONE3” for the center speaker terminal, set the “Zone Setup” – “Channel” (vpage 52) to “Mono”. :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu Setting items Setting items Configuration : Select MAIN ZONE channel configuration. power • 5.1ch / 7.1ch / 9.1ch / 11.1ch to suit Extra Channel : Select the channels to be used from among surround system back speakers (SB), front height speakers (FH), front wide speakers (FW). Speaker Configuration (Continued) n When setting “Configuration” to “7.1ch” • SB / FH / FW • 2spkrs : Use two surround back speakers. • 1spkr : Use only one surround back speaker. When you select this setting, connect the surround back speaker to the left (L) channel. See overleaf Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu 41 Specifications “Large” is not displayed when “Front” is set to “Small”. Troubleshooting • When “Configuration” is set to “5.1ch” in the “Amp Assign” settings or when “SB” is not selected using “Extra Channel”, no settings can be made for “Surround Back”. • Even when the Surround Back Speaker setting is other than “None”, sound may not be emitted from the surround back speaker, depending on the playback source. In this case, “Surround Parameters” – “Surround Back” setting other than “OFF” (vpage 91). Remote Control Information • When “Surround” is set to “Large”, “Surround Back”, “Front Height” and “Front Wide“ can be set to “Large”. • When “Surround” is set to “None”, “Surround Back”, “Front Height” and “Front Wide” can automatically set to “None”. Surround Back : Set the presence, size and number of surround back speakers. • Large : Use of a large speaker that can adequately playback low frequencies. • Small : Use of a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies. • None : Select when the surround back speakers are not connected. Multi-zone • When “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” can automatically set to “Large”. • When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Center”, “Surround“, “Surround Back”, “Front Height” and “Front Wide“ can not be set to “Large”. Center : Set the presence and size of the center speaker. • Large : Use of a large speaker that can adequately playback low frequencies. • Small : Use of a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies. • None : Select when a center speaker is not connected. hen “Front” is set to “Small”, “Subwoofer” can automatically set W to “Yes”. Surround : Set the presence and size of the surround speakers. • Large : Use of a large speaker that can adequately playback low frequencies. • Small : Use of a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies. • None : Select when the surround speakers are not connected. Playback NOTE elect “Large” or “Small” S not according to the physical size of the speaker but according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities based on the frequency set at “Crossover Frequency” (vpage 43). Subwoofer : Set the presence of a subwoofer. • Yes : Use a subwoofer. • No : Select when a subwoofer is not connected. Settings n When setting “Configuration” to “9.1ch” • SB/FH / SB/FW / FH/FW Assign : Select power amp usage method. • NORMAL : This is the usual configuration. • +Z2 : Assign a power amp to ZONE2 audio. • +Z2+Z3 : Assign a power amp to ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio. • ALL Z2 : Assign all power amps to ZONE2 audio. • ALL Z2+Z3 : Assign all power amps to ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio. • FREE : Freely assign power amps to the desired channels. Front : Select front speaker connection method. • NORMAL : This is the usual configuration. • Bi-WIRING : Bi-wire the front speakers. • Bi-AMP : Bi-amp the front speakers. • 2CH BW : Bi-wire another front speaker for 2 channel play mode. • 2CH BA : Bi-amp another front speaker for 2 channel play mode. Speaker Configuration Front : Set the front speaker size. Select speaker configuration • Large : Use of a large speaker that can adequately playback low and size (bass reproduction frequencies. capability). • Small : Use of a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies. Setting contents Connections Amp Assign Change the amp assignment the speaker configuration. Setting contents Getting Started Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) Getting Started Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) Setting items Speaker Configuration (Continued) Connections Setting contents Setting items Front Height : Set the presence and size of the front height speakers. • Large : Use of a large speaker that can adequately playback low frequencies. • Small : Use of a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies. • None : Select when the front height speakers are not connected. Distance Set distance from listening position to speakers. Measure beforehand the distance from the listening position to each speaker. Settings hen “Configuration” is set to “5.1ch” in the “Amp Assign” settings W (vpage 41) or when “FH” is not selected using “Extra Channel”, no settings can be made for “Front Height”. Front Wide : Set the presence and size of the front wide speakers. • Large : Use of a large speaker that can adequately playback low frequencies. • Small : Use of a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies. • None : Select when the front wide speakers are not connected. Playback Multi-zone Remote Control Information hen “Configuration” is set to “5.1ch” in the “Amp Assign” settings W (vpage 41) or when “FW” is not selected using “Extra Channel”, no settings can be made for “Front Wide”. Bass Setting Subwoofer Mode : Select low range signals to be reproduced by Settings for subwoofer and subwoofer. LFE signal range playback. • LFE : The low range signal of the channel set to “Small” speaker size is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer. • LFE+Main : The low range signal of all channels is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer. Troubleshooting • This can be set when “Speaker Configuration” – “Subwoofer” (vpage 41) is set to “Yes”. • Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass. • Select “LFE+Main” if you want the bass signals to always be produced from the subwoofer. LPF for LFE : Set LFE signal playback range. • 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz / 250Hz Setting contents Feet / Meters : Set the unit of distance. Step : Set the minimum variable width of the distance. • 1ft / 0.1ft • 0.1m / 0.01m Default : Reset all distance settings to factory default. • Yes : Reset to the defaults. • No : Do not reset to the defaults. hen you select “Default” and press ENTER, the “Return all settings W to the default?” prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or “No”, and press ENTER. Front L / Front R / Center / Subwoofer / Surround A L / Surround A R / Surround B L / Surround B R / Surr. Back Lz / Surr. Back Rz / Front Height L / Front Height R / Front Wide L / Front Wide R : Select the speaker. z: W hen the “Speaker Configuration” – “Surround Back” setting (vpage 41) is set to “1spkr”, “Surr. Back” is displayed. • 0.0ft ~ 60.0ft / 0.00m ~ 18.00m : Set the distance. • Speakers set to “None” in “Speaker Configuration” (vpage 41) are not displayed. • The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the “Amp Assign” (vpage 41) and “Speaker Configuration” (vpage 41) settings. • Default settings : Front / Center / Subwoofer / Front Height / Front Wide : 12.0 ft (3.60 m) Surround A / Surround B / Surround Back : 10.0 ft (3.00 m) • Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 20 feet (6.0 meters). Channel Level Test Tone : Output test tone. Set the volume of the test • Front L / Front Height L / Center / Front Height R / Front R / Front tone to be the same when it Wide R / Surround R /Surr. Back Rz /Surr. Back Lz / Surround L / is output from each speaker. Front Wide L / Subwoofer : Select the speaker. z:W hen the “Speaker Configuration” – “Surround Back” setting (vpage 41) is set to “1spkr”, “Surr. Back” is displayed. Specifications • –12dB ~ +12dB (0dB) : Adjust the volume. • Speakers set to “None” in the “Speaker Configuration” (vpage 41) settings are not displayed. • When o is pressed while the subwoofer volume is set to “–12 dB”, the “Subwoofer” setting switches to “OFF”. • When a headphones jack is inserted in the PHONES terminal of the AVR4810CI, the “Channel Level” is not displayed. • You can also press CHANNEL LEVEL to set (vpage 100 “Adjust the Volume of the Different Speakers“). 42 Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu Setting items Setting contents Default settings are underlined. Make settings for HDMI video/audio output. Setting items Setting contents Normal : Output with RGB video range (16 (black) to 235 (white)). Enhanced : Output with RGB video range (0 (black) to 255 (white)). This setting is valid when using a TV equipped with a DVI terminal. ON : Expand image signal in vertical direction. OFF : Do not expand signal in vertical direction. Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu 43 Specifications See overleaf Troubleshooting • If both the Monitor 1 and 2 connectors are connected and “Resolution” (vpage 61) is set to “Auto”, the signals are output with a resolution compatible with both TV. • With “Resolution” (vpage 61) not set to “Auto”, check whether the TV you are using is compatible with the resolution under “HDMI Information” – “Monitor 1” and “Monitor 2” (vpage 96). • Depending on the monitor you have connected, the display may not be correct when you set to “Auto (Dual)”. In such a case, set to either “Monitor 1” or “Monitor 2”. • You can also set “Monitor Out” by pressing M.SEL on the main remote control unit. Remote Control Information heck the speaker impedance (Ω) shown on the back of your speakers C or in the instruction manual beforehand. Multi-zone his setting is valid with respect to the HDMI output when using an T HDMI-compatible TV. When not using an HDMI-compatible TV, it is valid with respect to the analog output. Auto Lip Sync ON : Compensated. Automatic compensation OFF : Not compensated. for timing shift in audio and video output. HDMI Audio Out Amp : Playback through speakers connected to the receiver. Select HDMI audio output TV : Playback through TV connected to the receiver. device. When the HDMI control function is operating, the setting of audio playback in the connected TV takes priority (vpage 99 “HDMI Control Function”). Monitor Out Auto (Dual) : The presence of a TV connected to the MONITOR 1 or Make settings for HDMI MONITOR 2 terminal is detected automatically, and that TV connection monitor output. is used. Monitor 1 : A TV connected to the MONITOR 1 terminal is always used. Monitor 2 : A TV connected to the MONITOR 2 terminal is always used. Playback RGB Range Set the video range of RGB output from the HDMI terminal. Vertical Stretch Expand image signal in vertical direction. Settings Speaker Impedance Set the impedance connected speakers. • Can be set when the “Speaker Configuration” – “Subwoofer” (vpage 41) setting is “Yes”, or when you have a speaker that is set to “Small”. • Always set the crossover frequency to “80Hz”. When using small speakers, however, we recommend setting the crossover frequency to a higher frequency. • For speakers set to “Small”, sound below the crossover frequency is cut from the sound output. The cut bass sound is output from the subwoofer or front speakers. • The speakers that can be set when “Advanced” is selected differ according to the “Subwoofer Mode” setting (vpage 42). • When “LFE” is selected, speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker Configuration” can be set. If the speakers are set to “Large”, “Full Band” is displayed and the setting cannot be made. • If set to “LFE+Main”, this setting can be made regardless of the speaker size. 8Ω/ohms : Select when the impedance of the connected speaker is 8 of Ω/ohms or more. 6Ω/ohms : Select when the impedance of the connected speaker is at least 6 Ω/ohms but less than 8 Ω/ohms. Making the HDMI Settings (HDMI Setup) Connections Default : Reset all distance settings to factory default. • Yes : Reset to the defaults. • No : Do not reset to the defaults. Crossover Frequency 40Hz / 60Hz / 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz / Outputs at below set 250Hz : Set the crossover frequency. frequency, each speaker’s Advanced : Specify crossover frequency for each speaker. bass signal output from • Front / Center / Surround / Surround Back / Front Height / Front the subwoofer. Set this Wide : Select the speaker. according to the low • 40Hz / 60Hz / 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz /150Hz / 200Hz / frequency reproduction 250Hz : Set the crossover frequency. capabilities of the speakers you are using. Channel Level (Continued) Getting Started Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) Getting Started Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) Setting items Setting contents Connections HDMI Control Control External devices can be • ON : Use HDMI control function controlled from the AVR- • OFF : Do not use HDMI control function 4810CI and the AVR-4810CI When a device that is not compatible with the HDMI control function can be controlled from is connected, set “Control” to “OFF”. external devices. NOTE Settings Playback Multi-zone Remote Control Information • Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device to check the settings. • Refer to “HDMI Control Function” (vpage 99) for more information about the HDMI control function. • When the “Control” setting has been changed, always turn off the power to the connecting devices afterwards and then turn back on. NOTE Troubleshooting he HDMI control function T controls operations of a TV that is compatible with the HDMI control function. Make sure that the TV and HDMI are connected when you perform HDMI control. • When “Control” is set to “ON”, it consumes more standby power. • When not using this unit for a long period, we recommend that you press POWER on the main unit to turn off the power. • “HDMI Control” does not work when the power to the equipment is off. Either power on or set to standby. Standby Source : Set the HDMI connector for HDMI signal input during standby. • Last : Standby with last used input source during power on. • HDMI1 / HDMI2 / HDMI3 / HDMI4 / HDMI5 / HDMI6 : The standby mode is set at the input source assigned to the respective. Making the Audio Settings (Audio Setup) Default settings are underlined. Make settings for audio playback. Setting items Setting contents EXT. IN Setup Setup playback method for analog signals inputted from external input connectors (EXT. IN). 2ch Direct/Stereo Make speaker settings for 2channel mode playback. Subwoofer Level : Set playback level of subwoofer signal input from the external input connector (EXT. IN). • +15dB : This is the recommended level. • +10dB / +5dB / 0dB : Select the level according to the player being used. Setting : Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct and stereo playback modes. • Basic : The settings at “Speaker Setup” (vpage 41) are applied. • Custom : Make separate settings for 2-channel. Front : Set the front speaker size. • Large : Use of a large speaker that can adequately playback low frequencies. • Small : Use of a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies. This can be set when “Control“ is set to “ON“. Control Monitor : Set the HDMI MONITOR terminal to output the HDMI control signal. • Monitor 1 : Output from the MONITOR 1 terminal. • Monitor 2 : Output from the MONITOR 2 terminal. This can be set when “Control“ is set to “ON“. Power Off Control : The power of the AVR-4810CI and external device turn off together. • ON : Interlock. • OFF : Do not interlock. This can be set when “Control“ is set to “ON“. If “Speaker Configuration” – “Subwoofer” (vpage 41) is set to “No”, the setting is automatically set to “Large”. Subwoofer : Set the presence of a subwoofer. • Yes : Use a subwoofer. • No : Select when a subwoofer is not connected. Specifications If “Speaker Configuration” – “Subwoofer” (vpage 41) is set to “No”, the setting is automatically set to “No”. If the “Front” setting is “Small”, the setting is automatically “Yes”. SW Mode : Select low range signal to be reproduced by subwoofer. • LFE : When the “2ch Direct/Stereo” – “Front” setting is set to “Large”, the LFE signal alone is output from the subwoofer. Also, when the “2ch Direct/Stereo” – “Front” setting is set to “Small”, the front channel low range signal is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer. • LFE+Main : The front channel low range signal is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer. his can be set when “2ch Direct/Stereo” – “Subwoofer” is set to T “Yes”. 44 Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu Setting items 2ch Direct/Stereo (Continued) Setting contents Setting items Playback Multi-zone Remote Control Information et so that the difference between the front left speaker and front S right speaker distances is 20.0 ft (6.0 m) or less. Level FL / Level FR : Select the speaker. • –12.0dB ~ +12.0dB (0.0dB) : Adjust the level of each channel. Auto Surround Mode ON : Memorize settings. Automatically play with the last used surround Make setting for memorizing mode. surround mode setting for OFF : Do not memorize settings. Surround mode does not change each input signal type. according to input signal. “Not Used” is set with the Set so that “Audyssey Flat” settings can be made when Audyssey Quick Select function cannot Auto Setup is performed. be stored and called out. Manual : Set when not using the “Manual” equalizer. • Used : Use. • Not Used : Do not use. Settings • This can be set when “2ch Direct/Stereo” – “Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”. • If the “2ch Direct/Stereo” – “Front” setting is “Large” and the “SW Mode” setting is “LFE”, “Full Band” is displayed and the setting cannot be made. Distance FL / Distance FR : Select the speaker. • 0.0ft ~ 60.0ft (12.0ft) / 0.00m ~ 18.00m (3.60m) : Set the distance to the speaker. EQ Customize Audyssey Byp. L/R : Set when not using “Audyssey Byp L/R” equalizer. Set so that unused equalizer • Used : Use. settings are not displayed • Not Used : Do not use. when MULTEQ XT on the Set so that “Audyssey Byp. L/R” settings can be made when Audyssey main remote control unit is Auto Setup is performed. pressed. Audyssey Flat : Set when not using “Audyssey Flat” equalizer. • Used : Use. Equalizer settings for which • Not Used : Do not use. Connections Crossover : Outputs at below set frequency, each speaker’s bass signal output from the subwoofer. • 40Hz / 60Hz / 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz / 250Hz Setting contents Getting Started Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) Troubleshooting • The auto surround mode function lets you store in the memory the surround mode last used for playing the four types of input signals listed below. q Analog and PCM 2-channel signals w Dolby Digital and DTS 2-channel signals e Dolby Digital and DTS multi-channel signals rMulti-channel signals other than Dolby Digital and DTS (PCM, DSD, etc.) • When playing in the PURE DIRECT, the surround mode does not change even if the input signal is changed. Specifications Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu 45 Getting Started Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) Making the Network Settings (Network Setup) Default settings are underlined. Setting items Network Connecting (Continued) Setting contents b If the access points are repeat search, use i to select the “Search” and press ENTER. Connections Make network settings. NETWORK CONNECTING Setting items Network Connecting Setting contents Please select access point to connect. Settings Playback Multi-zone Wireless LAN settings Make settings for wired or Use this procedure to configure the Wireless LAN settings. wireless LAN. 1.Fitting a rod antenna (vpage 26 “Connecting to a Home Network (LAN)”). b If a LAN cable is connected, remove it. 2.Turn on the AVR-4810CI (vpage 28 “Turning the Power On”). 3.Set the access point at the “Network Connecting”. When searching access points to connect automatically, refer to “Automatic settings”. When searching access points to connect manually, refer to “Manual settings”. n Automatic settings Remote Control Information NETWORK CONNECTING Enter Select access point to connect RETURN Cancel e If there is an encryption setting for the access point you selected in step w, enter same encryption key as used for the access point. (If there is no encryption setting, proceed to step t.) NETWORK CONNECTING Enter same encryption key (security) key as used Enter encryption key Cancel NETWORK CONNECTING Troubleshooting Please select access point to connect. w 82% WEP Specifications Search Enter Select access point to connect RETURN Cancel q On the GUI menu, select “Network Connecting” – “Search” and press ENTER. The access point you have set is displayed. w Use ui to select the access point, and then press ENTER. The DHCP function is disabled. :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu AAAAA 1 r t Enter RETURN Cancel Use uio p to input the “Key” (encryption key) and press ENTER. Enter the same encryption key as used for the access point. The types of characters that can be input are as shown below. RETURN DENON e Connection q Enter Search and set the access point Main remote control unit operation buttons Select Search WEP Key Default Key Manual 46 82% WEP for access point Select a connection method appropriate for your wireless LAN host Search WPS DENON :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) GLower case charactersH abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz GUpper case charactersH ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ GSymbolsH! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ˆ _ ` { | } ˜ GNumbersH 0123456789 (Space) • You can change the character type when you press SEARCH on the main remote control unit or MENU during character input. • When no security settings have been used in the Internet connection settings, this step is not necessary. r When encryption is by “WEP”, select the “Default Key” using i, and then press o p. 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 : Select the same default key as used for the access point. This should normally be set to “1”. :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu Setting items Network Connecting (Continued) Setting contents t Use i to select “Connection” and press ENTER. Setting items Network Connecting (Continued) e Press WPS for the target access point. r Select “Connection” and press ENTER. When connection is established with access point, “Connection completed” is displayed. NETWORK CONNECTING Connection completed. Select “Connection” after pressing the access point ON WPS button 192.168.100.85 Connection Enter Terminate setup Cancel his WPS (push-button) setup screen can be displayed directly T by pressing and holding o and p on the main unit for at least 3 seconds. n How to connect with WPS (PIN code method) Use access points (routers) equipped with WPS functions. See the router user manual for details. NETWORK CONNECTING Select a connection method appropriate for your NETWORK CONNECTING wireless LAN host Select a connection method appropriate for your wireless LAN host Search WPS q Enter Set using the WPS function Manual RETURN Cancel RETURN Troubleshooting Manual q Cancel NETWORK CONNECTING Select whether to connect with the push-button or NETWORK CONNECTING PIN code method Specifications Select whether to connect with the push-button or PIN code method Push button PIN Code Push button PIN Code w w RETURN Cancel Enter Connect to network with the PIN code method RETURN Cancel Enter Connect to network with the push-button method q Select “WPS” and press ENTER. w Select “PIN Code” and press ENTER. q Select “WPS” and press ENTER. w Select “Push Button” and press ENTER. See overleaf Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu Remote Control Information Use access points (routers) equipped with WPS functions. See the router user manual for details. RETURN Multi-zone n How to connect with WPS (Push-button method) Enter Set using the WPS function Enter Start connection AVR-4810CI performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP function. When connecting to a network without a DHCP function, you will need to manually configure the IP address. For details, see page 49 “Wired LAN settings” in step 3. Search WPS r Playback Exit Detail Settings DHCP IP Address NETWORK CONNECTING Connections Network connection starts. When connection is established with the access point, “Connection completed.” is displayed. Setting contents Getting Started Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) 47 Getting Started Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) Setting items Network Connecting Setting contents Setting items Network Connecting The access point is displayed. (Continued) (Continued) NETWORK CONNECTING Connections Please select access point to connect. DENON 46% WEP Settings RETURN Cancel Playback ou can change the character type when you press SEARCH on the Y main remote control unit or MENU during character input. e Use u i to select the access point and press ENTER. PIN code number is displayed. e Use ui to select the Security and press i. None : Select if not encrypted. Can also be used even without encryption, through we recommend encryption for improved security. WEP / WPA-PSK(TKIP) / WPA-PSK(AES) / WPA2-PSK(TKIP) / WPA2PSK(AES) : Select the encryption method according to the encryption setting of the access point you are using. r Use uio p to input the “Key” (encryption key) and press ENTER. Enter the same encryption key as used for the access point. The types of characters that can be input are as shown below. Multi-zone NETWORK CONNECTING Enter below PIN code in the registrar to start the registrar Remote Control Information Current PIN code PIN code 12345678 Waiting for connection.... r Set the PIN code displayed on the GUI screen to registrar. When connection is established with access point, “Connection completed” is displayed. Troubleshooting NETWORK CONNECTING Select a connection method appropriate for your wireless LAN host Specifications q Manual Make settings manually NETWORK CONNECTING RETURN Cancel Enter SSID Security Key Default Key Connection [1/2] 48 Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu w t When encryption is by “WEP”, select the “Default Key” using i, and then press o p. 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 : Select the same default key as used for the access point. This should normally be set to “1”. DENON WEP AAAAA 1 e t r y RETURN Manually enter SSID GLower case charactersH abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz GUpper case charactersH ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ GSymbolsH! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ˆ _ ` { | } ˜ GNumbersH 0123456789 (Space) • You can change the character type when you press SEARCH on the main remote control unit or MENU during character input. • When no security settings have been used in the Internet connection settings, this step is not necessary. n Manual settings Search WPS q On the GUI menu, select “Network Connecting” – “Manual” and press ENTER. w Use uio p to input the name of the wireless network (SSID) and press ENTER. The types of characters that can be input are as shown below. GLower case charactersH abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz GUpper case charactersH ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ GSymbolsH! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ˆ _ ` { | } ˜ GNumbersH 0123456789 (Space) Search Enter Select access point to connect Setting contents Cancel :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu Setting items Network Connecting (Continued) Setting contents y Use i to select “Connection” and press ENTER. Setting items Network Connecting (Continued) NETWORK CONNECTING Connection completed. ON 192.168.100.85 Terminate setup Enter NETWORK CONNECTING Exit Detail ON 192.168.100.33 q Enter Set IP address and proxy manually w DHCP IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Secondary DNS OFF 192 255 000 000 000 Proxy Exit . . . . . 168 255 000 000 000 r . . . . . 100 255 000 000 000 033 000 000 000 000 e RETURN Set IP address manually . . . . . Cancel • If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), there is no need to make the settings at “IP Address” and “Proxy”, since the DHCP function is set to “ON” in the AVR-4810CI’s default settings. • If the AVR-4810CI is being used connected to a network without the DHCP function, the network settings must be made. In this case, some knowledge of networks is required. For details, consult a network administrator. • If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and settings (vpage 26). • If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP (Internet Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your computer. • When you want to cancel the setting during IP address input, press RETURN. See overleaf Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu 49 Specifications DHCP IP Address NETWORK CONNECTING b When connecting to the network via a Proxy server, select “Proxy” and press ENTER (vpage 50 “Proxy settings”). Troubleshooting 1.Connect the LAN cable (vpage 26 “Connecting to a Home Network (LAN)”). 2.Turn on the AVR-4810CI (vpage 28 “Turning the Power On”). AVR-4810CI performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP function. When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function, perform the setting in step 3. 3.Set the IP address at the “Network Connecting”. Remote Control Information Wired LAN settings Use this procedure to configure the Wired LAN settings. Multi-zone AVR-4810CI performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP function. When connecting to a network without a DHCP function, you will need to manually configure the IP address. For details, see page 49 “Wired LAN settings” in step 3. Playback Exit Detail • IP Address : Set the IP address within the ranges shown below. The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses are set. CLASS A: 10.0.0.0 ~ 10.255.255.255 CLASS B: 172.16.0.0 ~ 172.31.255.255 CLASS C: 192.168.0.0 ~ 192.168.255.255 • Subnet Mask : When connecting an xDSL modem or terminal adapter directly to the AVR-4810CI, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider. Normally input 255.255.255.0. • Default Gateway : When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address. • Primary DNS, Secondary DNS : If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider, input it at “Primary DNS”. If there are two or more DNS addresses, input the first one at “Secondary DNS”. r Use i to select “Exit” and press ENTER. Setup is complete. Settings DHCP IP Address q On the GUI menu, select “Network Connecting” – “Detail” and press ENTER. w Use o p to set “DHCP” to “OFF”, then press i. The DHCP function is disabled. e Use uip to input the address and press ENTER. Connections Network connection starts. When connection is established with the access point, “Connection completed.” is displayed. Setting contents Getting Started Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) Getting Started Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) Setting items Network Connecting (Continued) Setting contents Setting items Proxy settings : Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server. Connections NETWORK CONNECTING DHCP IP Address NETWORK CONNCTING ON 192.168.100.33 Settings Exit Detail DHCP IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Secondary DNS ON 192 255 192 192 000 Proxy Exit q Playback Enter Set IP address and proxy manually .168 .255 .168 .168 .000 . . . . . 100 255 100 100 000 . . . . . 033 000 001 001 000 Network Connecting (Continued) y Use uio p to input the proxy server port number and press ENTER. u Use i to select “Exit” and press ENTER. Setup is complete. Other Network Standby : Set the network function on/off during standby. Network function on/off • ON : Network is on during standby. Main unit operable with a networksetting during standby, and compatible controller. PC language setting. • OFF : Suspend network function during standby. w Set to “ON” when using the web control function (vpage 103). Enter Set if using proxy server RETURN Cancel NETWORK CONNCTING Multi-zone Proxy Proxy r e 000 . 000 . 000 . 000 Address Port ON Address y Remote Control Information Exit t 00000 u RETURN Proxy server is used Cancel Troubleshooting q On the GUI menu, select “Network Connecting” – “Detail” or “Manual” and press ENTER. w Use ui to set “Proxy” and press ENTER. e Use o p to set “Proxy” to “ON” and press i. The proxy server is enabled. r Use o p to select the proxy server input method, and then press i. Address : Select when inputting by address. Name : Select when inputting by domain name. t Use uio p to input the proxy server address or domain name and press ENTER. When “Address” is selected in step r : Input the address When“Name” is selected in step r : Input the domain name The types of characters that can be input are as shown below. Specifications GLower case charactersH abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz GUpper case charactersH ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ GSymbolsH! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ˆ _ ` { | } ˜ GNumbersH 0123456789 (Space) ou can change the character type when you press SEARCH on the Y main remote control unit or MENU during character input. 50 Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu Setting contents :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) Character : When characters are not displayed correctly, set the MP3 ID3Tag character code type reproduced by the USB memory device. • Auto : Auto-select character code. • Latin : Select ISO 8859-1 Latin-1. • Japanese : Select Shift-JIS. If the characters are not properly displayed when set to “Auto”, set to “Latin” or “Japanese”. PC Language : Select computer environment language. • ara / chi (smpl) / chi (trad) / cze / dan / dut / eng / fin / fre / ger / gre / heb / hun / ita / jpn / kor / nor / pol / por / por(BR) / rus / spa / swe / tur Friendly Name Edit : The Friendly Name is the name AVR-4810CI displayed on the network. Up to 63 characters can be input. The default Friendly Name on first use is “DENON:[AVR-4810CI]”. The types of characters that can be input are as shown below. GLower case charactersH abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz GUpper case charactersH ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ GSymbolsH! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ˆ _ ` { | } ˜ GNumbersH 0123456789 (Space) ou can change the character type when you press SEARCH on the Y main remote control unit or MENU during character input. Default : Reset all settings to factory default. • Yes : Reset to the defaults. • No : Do not reset to the defaults. Party Mode Function : Set the Party Mode function. • OFF : Disable Party Mode function. • ON : Enable Party Mode function. efer to page 101, “Playing the Same Network Audio on Different R Devices Connected in a Network (Party Mode Function)” for more information on the party mode function. :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu Setting items Other (Continued) Setting contents GSymbolsH! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ˆ _ ` { | } ˜ GNumbersH 0123456789 (Space) Troubleshooting • When you press ENTER during display of the notification message, the “Check for Update” screen is displayed. (Refer to page 56 for more information on “Firmware Update”.) • Press RETURN to erase the notification message. Upgrade Notification : Display a notification message on the AVR4810CI’s GUI screen when downloadable firmware is released with “Add New Feature”. The notification message is displayed for about 20 seconds when the power is turned on. Connect to broadband Internet (vpage 26) when using this function. • ON : Display upgrade message. • OFF : Do not display upgrade message. Specifications • When you press ENTER during display of the notification message, the “Add New Feature” screen is displayed. (Refer to page 56 for more information on “Add New Feature”.) • Press RETURN to erase the notification message. Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) Remote Control Information • You can change the character type when you press SEARCH on the main remote control unit or MENU during character input. • The password may not contain underscores ( _ ). Friendly Name / Network=Wired/Wireless / SSID / Network Information Display network information. DHCP= ON/OFF / IP Address / MAC Address Multi-zone • You can change the character type when you press SEARCH on the main remote control unit or MENU during character input. • The password may not contain underscores ( _ ). Username / Password Napster Account Set or change Username The types of characters that can be input are as shown below. and Password (vpage 82 GLower case charactersH abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz “Listening to Napster“). GUpper case charactersH ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Playback Network Status” is only displayed for DENON products supporting “ the Network Status function. Update Notification : Displays a notification message on the AVR4810CI’s GUI screen when the latest firmware is released with “Firmware Update”. The notification message is displayed for about 20 seconds when the power is turned on. Connect to broadband Internet (vpage 26) when using this function. • ON : Display update message. • OFF : Do not display update message. Username / Password Set or change Username The types of characters that can be input are as shown below. and Password (vpage 83 GLower case charactersH abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz “Listening to Rhapsody“). GUpper case charactersH ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ GSymbolsH! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ˆ _ ` { | } ˜ GNumbersH 0123456789 (Space) Settings • This can be set when “Party Mode Function“ is set to “ON“. • This is displayed from 0 to 99 when “Volume Display” (vpage 53) is set to “Absolute”. • You can set to the upper limit set with “Volume Limit” (vpage 53) . Network Status : Displays up to a maximum of 10 DENON products connected on the same network. • Friendly Name / Model Name / Power ON/Standby / Select Source / Volume Level / Party Mode status Setting contents Connections Party Start Level : Make settings for volume level when the Party Mode is started. • Last : The same volume as set before the party mode was started. • – – – (0) : Always use the muting on condition when the Party Mode is started. • –80dB ~ 18dB (1 ~ 99) : Start party mode with your preferred volume. Setting items Rhapsody Account Getting Started Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu 51 Getting Started Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) Setting items Making the Multi-zone Settings (Zone Setup) Default settings are underlined. Connections Set the audio to playback with multi-zone (ZONE2, ZONE3). Setting items Settings Playback Multi-zone Bass Adjust low frequency range (bass). Treble Adjust high frequency range (treble). HPF Make settings for cutting the low range to reduce distortion in the bass. Lch Level Adjust the left channel output level. Remote Control Information Rch Level Adjust the right output level. Setting contents –10dB ~ +10dB (0dB) –10dB ~ +10dB (0dB) OFF : The low range is not attenuated. ON : The low range is attenuated. –12dB ~ +12dB (0dB) he “Lch Level” can be set when “Channel“ (vpage 52) is set to T “Stereo“. –12dB ~ +12dB (0dB) channel Troubleshooting he “Rch Level” can be set when “Channel“ (vpage 52) is set to T “Stereo“. Channel Stereo : Select stereo output. Set the signal output from Mono : Select mono output. multi-zone. When “Amp Assign” - “Assign Mode” (vpage 41) is set to “FREE”, and the signal assigned to the power amp is set to “Z2/Z3(M)”, the “Channel” setting automatically becomes “Mono”. Volume Display Relative : Display - - - dB (Min), in the range –80 dB ~ 18 dB. Set how volume is Absolute : Display in the range 0 (Min) ~ 99. displayed. Setting contents Volume Level Variable : Volume adjustment enabled by main unit and remote control Set the volume output level. unit. –40dB (41) : Fix volume at –40 dB. Set when adjusting volume by external amplifier. 0dB (81) : Fix volume at 0 dB. Set when adjusting volume by external amplifier. hen “Amp Assign” – “Assign Mode” (vpage 41) is set to “+Z2”, W “+Z2+Z3”, “ALL Z2” or “ALL Z2+Z3”, the “Volume Level” setting is automatically set to “Variable”. Volume Limit OFF : Do not set a maximum volume. Make a setting for maximum –20dB (61) / –10dB (71) / 0dB (81) volume. Can be set when the multi-zone “Volume Level” setting (vpage 52) is “Variable”. Power On Level Last : Use the memorized setting from the last session. Define the volume setting – – – (0) : Always use the muting on condition when power is turned on. that is active when the –80dB ~ 18dB (1 ~ 99) : The volume is adjusted to the set level. power is turned on. Can be set when the multi-zone “Volume Level” setting (vpage 52) is “Variable”. Mute Level Full : The sound is muted entirely. Set the amount of attenuation –40dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down. when muting is on. –20dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down. Specifications • The “Volume Display” setting is applied also to the “Volume Level”, “Volume Limit” and “Power On Level” display method. • The “Volume Display” setting applies to all zones. 52 Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu OPTION Setting items Making Other Settings (Option Setup) Default settings are underlined. Setting contents Volume Control Volume Display : Set how volume is displayed. Set the MAIN ZONE volume • Relative : Display ---dB (Min), in the range –80 dB ~ 18 dB. setting. • Absolute : Display in the range 0 (Min) ~ 99. See overleaf Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu 53 Specifications hen the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed W on movie subtitles, set to “Top”. NET/USB : Set the NET/USB screen display time when the input source is “NET/USB”. • Always : Show display continuously. • 30s : Show display for 30 seconds after operation. • 10s : Show display for 10 seconds after operation. • OFF : Turn display off. Troubleshooting When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set, the picture will not be displayed properly. Text : Display the content of operation during switching of surround mode, input mode, etc. • ON : Turn display on. • OFF : Turn display off. Master Volume : Master volume display during adjustment. • Bottom : Display at the bottom. • Top : Display at the top. • OFF : Turn display off. Remote Control Information NOTE Multi-zone GUI Make GUI related settings. • Input sources being used in the various zones cannot be deleted. • Input sources set to “Delete” cannot be selected using SOURCE SELECT. Screensaver : Make screensaver settings. • ON : The screen saver is activated during GUI menu display or NET/USB / iPod / TUNER / XM / SIRIUS / HD Radio screen display if no operation is performed approximately for a continuous 3-minute period. When you press uio p, the screen saver is cancelled and the screen before that screen saver started is displayed. • OFF : Screen saver is not activated. 1.Press and hold the main unit’s DSX and RETURN for at least 3 seconds. “Video Format” appears on the display. 2. Press o p and set the video signal format. 3.Press the main unit’s ENTER, MENU or RETURN to complete the setting. Playback NOTE The “Format” can also be set by the following procedure. However, the GUI screen is not displayed. Settings • The “Volume Display” setting is applied also to the “Volume Limit” and “Power On Level” display method. • The “Volume Display” setting applies to all zones. Volume Limit : Make a setting for maximum volume • OFF : Do not set a maximum volume. • –20dB (61) / –10dB (71) / 0dB (81) Power On Level : Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on. • Last : Use the memorized setting from the last session. • – – – (0) : Always use the muting on condition when power is turned on. • –80dB ~ 18dB (1 ~ 99) : The volume is adjusted to the set level. Mute Level : Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on. • Full : The sound is muted entirely. • –40dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down. • –20dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down. Source Delete PHONO / CD / DVD / HDP / TV / SAT/CBL / VCR / DVR / V.AUX / Remove input sources NET/USB / TUNER / XM / SIRIUS / HD Radio : Select input source that that are not used from the is not used. display. • ON : Use this source. • Delete : Do not use this source. Wall Paper : Set wallpaper to display the background when playback is stopped, etc. • Picture : Set the background to a picture (DENON logo). • Black : Set the background to black. • Gray : Set the background to gray. • Blue : Set the background to blue. Format : Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using. • NTSC : Select NTSC output. • PAL : Select PAL output. Connections Setting items GUI (Continued) Setting contents Getting Started Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) Getting Started Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) Setting items Setting contents Setting items Connections Settings Playback Multi-zone iPod : Set the iPod screen display time when the input source is “iPod”. • Always : Show display continuously. • 30s : Show display for 30 seconds after operation. • 10s : Show display for 10 seconds after operation. • OFF : Turn display off. Tuner : Set the tuner screen display time when the input source is “TUNER”, “XM”, “SIRIUS” or “HD Radio”. • Always : Show display continuously. • 30s : Show display for 30 seconds after operation. • 10s : Show display for 10 seconds after operation. • OFF : Turn display off. Remote Preset Codes When preset codes are registered in the included main remote control Search a preset code to unit, it can then be used to operate any devices you have, such as DVD register in the remote control players or TVs made by different manufacturers. unit. In this menu, you can search and display the preset codes that can be preset in the included main remote control unit. GUI (Continued) Remote Preset Codes (Continued) Setting contents 3. Pressing ui, select the first character of the brand name. Then press ENTER or p. bThe first character is displayed as 1, A ~ Z. In the case of brand names starting with the @ symbol, select “A”. For brand names that start with codes or numbers other than the @ symbol, select “1”. OPTION Remote Control Information DVD Player DENON [32134] Video Cassette Recorder Tivo [20739] Television SONY [10810] Satellite Set Top Box DirecTV [01377] Select first letter of device brand OPTION HE Helios Troubleshooting Specifications REMOTE PRESET CODES Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu CHCH+ Previous Select the device brand Next b When there are several pages of brand names, the pages can be switched by pressing the main remote control unit’s CH+ or CH– when the main remote control unit is in “MAIN” mode. nH ow to carry out preset register See page 109 for details on how to carry out preset registration. 1. Press DEVICE (DVD/HDP, VCR/DVR, TV or SAT/CABLE) on the main remote control unit for the device you want to preset. 2. Press and hold in RC SETUP on the main remote control unit for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. 3. Enter a 5-digit code using 0 ~ 9 on the main remote control unit. When the code is registered, the signal transmission indicator flashes twice. 1 A B C D E F G H I Select the device category 54 [1/3] -DVD- 1. On the GUI menu, select “Remote Preset Codes” and press ENTER or p. 2. Pressing ui, select the category of device for preset registration. Then press ENTER or p. PVR/SAT PVR/CABLE REMOTE PRESET CODES H&B Haaz Haier Hanseatic Harman/Kardon HCM HDT Operate with the main remote control unit switched to the “MAIN” mode (vpage 109 “Operating the Main Remote Control Unit”). HD-DVD DVD DVD-R CD CD-R VCR PVR A B C D E F G H I PVR/SAT PVR/CABLE n How to search for preset codes OPTION 1 HD-DVD DVD DVD-R CD CD-R VCR PVR 4. Pressing ui, select the brand name. Then press ENTER or p. The procedures for registering remote control codes and remote control preset registration are displayed. n Default settings for preset codes BD REMOTE PRESET CODES BD :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu Setting items Remote Preset Codes (Continued) Setting contents Setting items The main unit can also be operated with MENU, uio p, ENTER. Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu 55 Specifications See overleaf Troubleshooting 4. Repeat steps 1 ~ 3 to change the display name. • ON : Activate trigger on this mode. • – – – : Do not activate trigger on this mode. Remote (SIRIUS / XM) SAT TU : XM : Set when operating XM. Set to SAT TU operating SAT TU : SIRIUS : Set when operating SIRIUS. mode on the included remote control unit. Remote ID 1/2/3/4 Set when you operate When changing the remote ID, also change the “MAIN”, “iPod”, another DENON AV amplifier “TUNER”, “SAT TU”, “DTU” and “NET/USB” modes of the main with the remote control unit remote control unit at the same time. Also change the sub remote of the AVR-4810CI. Match control unit at the same time (vpage 112, 119 “Setting the Remote the remote control unit you ID”). are using with the remote ID of the AVR-4810CI. Remote Control Information GUpper case charactersH ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ GLower case charactersH abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz GSymbolsH ! # % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = “ > ? @ [ \ ] GNumbersH 0123456789 (Space) n When setting for “Vertical Stretch” Activate trigger out through linkage when “Vertical Stretch” (vpage 43) is set to “ON”. Multi-zone 4. Repeat steps 1 ~ 3 to change the display name. Zone Rename 1. Use ui to select the zone name (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2, ZONE3 or Change the display title of ZONE4) you want to change, then press p or ENTER. each zone to one you prefer. 2. Use o p to set the cursor to the character you want to change. 3. Use ui to change the character, then press ENTER. • Up to 10 characters can be input. • You can change the character type when you press SEARCH on the main remote control unit or MENU during character input. • The types of characters that can be input are as shown below. alid when the “MAIN ZONE” set to “ON” with “When Setting V for Zone” is selected, and when the input source set to “ON” with “When Setting for Input Source” is selected. Playback n When Setting for HDMI Monitor Activate trigger out when the HDMI monitor set to “ON” is selected. GUpper case charactersH ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ GLower case charactersH abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz GSymbolsH ! # % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = “ > ? @ [ \ ] GNumbersH 0123456789 (Space) Settings Quick Select Name 1. Use ui to select the name of the Quick Select setting you want to Change the “Quick Select” change, then press p or ENTER. display title to one you 2. Use o p to set the cursor to the character you want to change. prefer. 3. Use ui to change the character, then press ENTER. • Up to 16 characters can be input. • You can change the character type when you press SEARCH on the main remote control unit or MENU during character input. • The types of characters that can be input are as shown below. Trigger Out 1 n When Setting for Zone (MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3 / ZONE4) Select the condition for Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set to activating Trigger Out 1 for “ON”. the input source, surround n When Setting for Input Source mode, etc. Activate trigger out when the input source set to “ON” is selected. See “TRIGGER OUT jacks” Valid for the zone set to “ON” with “When Setting for Zone”. (vpage 26) for more information on trigger out. n When Setting for Surround Mode Trigger Out 2 Activate trigger out when the surround mode set to “ON” is selected. As with “Trigger Out 1”, Valid when the “MAIN ZONE” set to “ON” with “When Setting select the condition for for Zone” is selected, and when the input source set to “ON” with activating Trigger Out 2. “When Setting for Input Source” is selected. Connections 4. Check if the device is operating with the registered preset code. If the device does not operate try registering a different preset code. 5. Press MAIN on the main remote control unit to set the remote control to “MAIN” mode. Setting contents Getting Started Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) Getting Started Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) Setting items Setting contents Setting items Connections 232C Port Serial Control : Set when using an external controller. Set when using an external 2Way Remote : Set when using a 2-way remote control unit. controller or two-way remote When using a DENON two-way remote control unit (RC-7000CI or RCcontrol unit connected to the 7001RCI, sold separately), set to “2Way Remote”. RS-232C terminal. NOTE Settings Playback Multi-zone When setting to “2Way Remote”, you can not use the RS-232C connector as an external controller. Dimmer Bright : Normal display brightness. Adjust display brightness of Dim : Reduced display brightness. the receiver. Dark : Very low display brightness. OFF : Turns the display off. Setup Lock OFF : Turn protection off. Protect settings from ON : Turn protection on. inadvertent change. Remote Control Information • When “Setup Lock” is set to “ON”, the settings listed below can no longer be changed. Also, “SETUP LOCKED!” is displayed if you attempt to operate related settings. · GUI menu operations · Dynamic Volume · RESTORER · Channel Level · Audio/Video Adjust · Audio Delay · MultEQ XT · Input Mode · Dynamic EQ • When canceling the setting, set “Setup Lock” to “OFF”. Troubleshooting Maintenance Mode NOTE Used when receiving Only use this function if so instructed by a DENON serviceperson or maintenance from a DENON installer. service engineer or custom installer. Setting contents Firmware Update Check for Update : You can check for firmware updates. You can also Update the firmware of the check approximately how long it will take to complete an update. receiver. Start : Execute the update process. When updating starts, the power indicator becomes red and the GUI screen is shut down. The amount of update time which has elapsed is displayed. When updating is complete the power indicator becomes green and normal status is resumed. b If updating fails, the set automatically retries, but if updating is still not possible, one of the messages shown below is displayed. If the display reads as shown below, check the settings and network environment, then update again. Display Updating failed Login failed Server is busy Connection fail Download fail Add New Feature Display new features that can be downloaded to the AVR-4810CI and perform an update. Description Updating failed. Failure to log into server. Server is busy. Wait a while then try again. Failure connecting to server. Downloading of the firmware has failed. Upgrade : Execute the upgrade process. When updating starts, the power indicator becomes red and the GUI screen is shut down. The amount of update time which has elapsed is displayed. When upgrading is complete the power indicator becomes green and normal status is resumed. b If the upgrade is not successful, an error message identical to those in “Firmware Update” will appear on the display, check the settings and network environment, then update again. Upgrade Status : A list of the additional functions provided by the Upgrade will be displayed. Specifications See the DENON website for details about updates. When the procedure is complete, “Registered” is displayed in this menu and updates can be carried out. If the procedure has not been carried out, “Not Registered” is displayed. The ID number shown on this screen is needed when carrying out the procedure. The ID number can also be displayed by pressing and holding p and STATUS on the main unit for at least 3 seconds. 56 Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu Notes concerning use of “Firmware Update” and “Add New Feature” For details on how to select, set and cancel settings for each menu, see “GUI Menu Operation” (vpage 26). Connections Select input source and make playback settings. n Items that can be set with the Source Select procedure Changing the Input Terminal Assignments (Input Assign) vpage 58 Settings Making the Video Settings (Video) vpage 60 Playback Changing the Input Mode and Decoding Mode (Input Mode) vpage 61 Changing the Input Source’s Display Name (Rename) vpage 62 Multi-zone • In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system requirements and settings for a broadband Internet connection (vpage 26). • Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrating is completed. • Even with a broadband connection to the Internet, approximately 1 hour is required for the updating/ upgrading procedure to be completed. Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on the AVR-4810CI cannot be performed until updating/upgrading is completed. Furthermore, updating/upgrading the firmware may reset the backup data for the parameters, etc., set for the AVR-4810CI. • The following backup data may be erased after an update or upgrade. • Internet radio preset channel • Internet radio Recently Played data • Care of data in Internet radio, media server and USB memory device • In the event of an update error during update or upgrade, turn the AVR-4810CI’s power off and then on again. “Update retry” appears on the display and update restarts from the point at which update failed. If the error continues despite this, check the network environment. Making the Input Settings (Source Select) Correcting the Input Source’s Playback Level (Source Level) vpage 62 Making Language Settings (Language) Setting the Playback Mode (Playback Mode) vpage 62 n iPod (vpage 62) n NET/USB (vpage 62) n Media Server, USB/iPod, Napster and Rhapsody (vpage 63) Making the Settings to Play Still Pictures (Still Picture) vpage 63 Automatically Presetting Radio Stations (Auto Preset) vpage 63 Setting contents English / Français Setting Preset Channels so that They are not Displayed When Tuning (Preset Skip) vpage 63 Specifications The “Language” can also be set by the following procedure. However, the GUI screen is not displayed. 1. Press and hold the main unit’s DSX and RETURN for at least 3 seconds. “Video Format” appears on the display. 2. Use ui to set “GUI Language”. 3. Press o p and set the language. 4. Press the main unit’s ENTER, MENU or RETURN to complete the setting. Displaying the Playback Screen for the Different Input Sources (Play) vpage 62 Troubleshooting Default settings are underlined. Set the language for display on the GUI screen. Remote Control Information • Information regarding the “Firmware Update” function and “Add New Feature” will be announced on the DENON web site each time related plans are defined. • When usable new firmware is released with “Firmware Update” or “Add New Feature”, a notification message is displayed on the GUI screen. When you do not want to be notified, set “Update Notification” (vpage 51) and “Upgrade Notification” (vpage 51) to “OFF”. Giving Names to Preset Stations (Preset Name) vpage 64 Check the XM Radio and SIRIUS Radio Reception Sensitivity (Antenna Aiming) vpage 64 Setting SIRIUS Radio Reception Restrictions (Parental Lock) vpage 65 Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu Getting Started Making Detailed Settings (Manual Setup) 57 Getting Started Making the Input Settings (Source Select) n Input Assignments Menu Operations Important Information About the Display of Input Sources in This Manual Connections In this manual, the names of input sources that can be set at the different items are indicated as shown below. PHONO CD Internet Radio DVD HDP Media Server TV SAT/CBL USB/iPod VCR Napster DVR Rhapsody V.AUX NET/USB TUNER XM 1 Press MENU. The GUI menu is displayed on the TV screen. Use ui to select “SOURCE SELECT”, the press ENTER or p. Favorites SIRIUS HD Radio Settings SOURCE SELECT NOTE Playback DVD HDP TV SAT/CBL VCR/iPod DVR Input sources that have been set to “Delete” at “Source Delete” (vpage 53) cannot be selected. Multi-zone Changing the Input Terminal Assignments (Input Assign) Default settings are underlined. 2 Remote Control Information INPUT ASSIGN q w Default DVD HDP TV SAT/CBL VCR/iPod DVR V.AUX HDMI DIGITAL HDMI1 HDMI2 None HDMI3 HDMI4 HDMI5 HDMI6 COAX1 None OPT1 COAX2 None OPT2 OPT3 COMP 1-RCA 2-RCA None None None 3-RCA None DVD iPod Input Assign Video Input Mode Rename Source Level None None None None Assign None None Troubleshooting Select e Enter r RETURNtReturny Change HDMI input connector assignment Specifications q Default button w Input Source e HDMI input Press ui to select the input source you want to set, then press p. [1/2] r Digital audio input t Component video input y iPod dock The “INPUT ASSIGN” screen is displayed. INPUT ASSIGN [1/2] HDMI DIGITAL HDMI1 HDMI2 None HDMI3 HDMI4 HDMI5 HDMI6 COAX1 None OPT1 COAX2 None OPT2 OPT3 COMP 1-RCA 2-RCA None None None 3-RCA None iPod None None None None Assign None None RETURN Return Select Enter Change HDMI input connector assignment 58 DIGITAL HDMI1 HDMI2 None HDMI3 HDMI4 HDMI5 HDMI6 COAX1 None OPT1 COAX2 None OPT2 OPT3 COMP 1-RCA 2-RCA None None None 3-RCA None iPod None None None None Assign None None ENTER, then use o p to select 5 Press the input terminal to be assigned. INPUT ASSIGN Default DVD HDP TV SAT/CBL VCR/iPod DVR V.AUX [1/2] HDMI DIGITAL HDMI1 HDMI2 None HDMI3 HDMI4 HDMI5 HDMI6 COAX1 None OPT1 COAX2 None OPT2 OPT3 COMP 1-RCA 2-RCA None None None 3-RCA None RETURN iPod None None None None Assign None None Cancel 6 Press ENTER to enter the setting. “Input Assign”, then press 3 Select ENTER or p. DVD HDP TV SAT/CBL VCR/iPod DVR V.AUX DVD HDP TV SAT/CBL VCR/iPod DVR V.AUX [1/2] HDMI Select Enter Assign COAXIAL 2 input connector The input source is “DVD” Default INPUT ASSIGN Default RETURN Return Select Enter Change digital input connector assignment Select input source and make playback settings n Examples of Input Assign Menu Screen Displays uio p to move the gray 4 Use highlight to the item you want to set. Setting items Setting contents Setting items Digital DIGITAL (Continued) Input source HDP HDMI HDMI 1 2 TV SAT/ CBL None HDMI 3 VCR DVR HDMI HDMI 4 5 V.AUX HDMI 6 DVD HDP TV SAT/CBL VCR Default setting None COAX 1 None OPT 1 COAX 2 None Input source DVR V.AUX CD Default setting OPT 2 OPT 3 COAX 3 hen control dock for iPod is used as the input source, assignment of W the digital input terminal is disabled, even if it is assigned. -RCA (Component video 1) / 2-RCA (Component video 2) / 3-RCA 1 (Component video 3) None : Do not assign a component video input terminal to the selected input source. b Upon purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as shown below. Input source DVD HDP TV SAT/ CBL VCR DVR V.AUX Default setting 1-RCA 2-RCA None None None 3-RCA None See overleaf Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu 59 Specifications • An input source to which a component video input terminal cannot be assigned is displayed as “– – –”. • When control dock for iPod is used as the input source, assignment of the component video input terminal is disabled, even if it is assigned. Troubleshooting Digital DIGITAL TV SAT/CBL VCR DVR V.AUX CD The SIRIUS DVD HDP Set this to change the digital input sources are assigned to the digital input terminals as shown below. input terminals assigned to COAX 1 (COAXIAL) / COAX 2 / COAX 3 / OPT 1 (OPTICAL) / OPT 2 / OPT the input sources. 3 / D.LINK (DENON LINK)z z : “D.LINK” is set when the AVR-4810CI is connected by DENON LINK to a DENON Blu-ray disc / DVD player (vpage 23 “Components Equipped with a DENON LINK Connector”). None : Do not assign a digital input terminal to the selected input source. The DVD HDP TV SAT/CBL VCR DVR V.AUX input sources are assigned to the component video input terminals as shown below. Remote Control Information Component COMP Set this to change the component video input terminals assigned to the input sources. Multi-zone • An input source to which an HDMI input terminal cannot be assigned is displayed as “– – –”. • To play the video signal assigned at “HDMI” combined with the audio signal assigned at “Input Assign“ – “Digital”, select “Digital” at “Input Mode” (vpage 59). • When the AVR-4810CI and monitor are connected with an HDMI cable, if the monitor is not compatible with HDMI audio signal playback, only the video signals are output to the monitor. • The audio signals input from the analog, digital and EXT. IN connectors are not output to the monitor. • When control dock for iPod is used as the input source, assignment of the HDMI input terminal is disabled, even if it is assigned. • When “HDMI Control” – “Control” (vpage 44) is set to “ON”, HDMI input terminal cannot be assigned to “TV”. SIRIUS Playback Default setting DVD Input source Settings b Upon purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as shown below. b Upon purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as shown below. Connections HDMI HDMI TV SAT/CBL VCR DVR V.AUX input sources The DVD HDP Set this to change the HDMI are assigned to the HDMI input terminals as shown below. input terminals assigned to HDMI 1 / HDMI 2 / HDMI 3 / HDMI 4 / HDMI 5 / HDMI 6 the input sources. None : Do not assign an HDMI input terminal to the selected input source. Setting contents Getting Started Making the Input Settings (Source Select) Getting Started Making the Input Settings (Source Select) Setting items Setting contents Connections iPod The control dock for iPod can be assigned to the DVD HDP TV iPod dock CD input sources. Assign the control dock for SAT/CBL VCR DVR V.AUX iPod input. Assign : Assign the control dock for iPod to the selected input source. None : Do not assign the control dock for iPod to the selected input source. Making the Video Settings (Video) Default settings are underlined. Setting items Setting contents Video Select SOURCE : Play the picture and sound of the input source. Change video input to your DVD / HDP / TV / SAT/CBL / VCR / DVR / V.AUX : Select video input preferred input source. source to view. This can be set for individual input sources. Settings Playback Multi-zone • By default on first use, it is assigned to “VCR (iPod)”. • An input source to which control dock for iPod cannot be assigned is displayed as “– – –”. • If control dock for iPod is not connected to the AVR-4810CI, assignment of the “iPod dock” is disabled, and you can use it as a standard input source. Default Yes : Reset to the defaults. Reset all settings to factory No : Do not reset to the defaults. default. Set by either pressing VIDEO SELECT on the main unit or VIDEO SELECT on the main remote control unit. • When operating from the main remote control unit Press VIDEO SELECT on the main remote control unit repeatedly until the picture you want to see is displayed. To cancel, press VIDEO SELECT on the main remote control unit, and select “SOURCE”. • When operating from the main unit After pressing VIDEO SELECT on the main unit, turn the SOURCE SELECT on the main unit until the picture you want to see is displayed. To cancel, press VIDEO SELECT on the main unit, then turn SOURCE SELECT on the main unit and select “SOURCE”. Remote Control Information If you select “Default” and press ENTER the message “Return all settings to the default?” is displayed. Select “Yes” or “No”, and then press ENTER. NOTE • It is not possible to select HDMI input signals. • The video select function does not work with HDMI signals. • Input sources for which “Delete” is selected at “Source Delete” (vpage 53) cannot be selected. Troubleshooting Video Convert The input video signal is converted automatically in function of the connected TV (vpage 10 “Converting Input Video Signals for Output (Video Conversion Function)”). Specifications 60 Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) This can be set when the input source is DVD VCR DVR V.AUX . HDP TV SAT/CBL ON : The input video signal is converted. OFF : The input video signal is not converted. • When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion function might not operate. In this case set “Video Convert” to “OFF”. • When “Video Convert” is set to “OFF”, the video conversion function does not work. In this case, connect the AVR-4810CI and TV with the same type of cable. :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu Setting items Setting contents Setting items Setting contents Input Mode Auto : Automatically detect input signal and perform playback. Set the audio input modes for HDMI : Play only signals from HDMI input. the different input sources. Digital : Play only signals from digital input. Analog : Play only signals from analog input. EXT. IN : Play only signals from EXT. IN input. Decode Mode This can be set when the input source is CD DVD HDP TV Set the decode mode for SAT/CBL VCR DVR V.AUX . input source Auto : Detect type of digital input signal and decode and play automatically. PCM : Decode and play only PCM input signals. DTS : Decode and play only DTS input signals. Remote Control Information • This can be set for input sources for which “HDMI” or “Digital” is assigned at “Input Assign” (vpage 59). • Normally set this to “Auto”. Set “PCM” and “DTS” when inputting the corresponding input signal. Troubleshooting • “HDMI” can be set for input sources for which “HDMI” is assigned at “Input Assign” (vpage 59). • “Digital” can be set for input sources for which “Digital” is assigned at “Input Assign” (vpage 59). • When digital signals are properly input, the ” ” indicator lights on the display. If the ” ” indicator does not light, check the digital input connector assignment and the connections. • The surround mode cannot be set if the input mode is set to “EXT. IN”. Specifications his can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than T “OFF”. Aspect This can be set when the input source is DVD Set the aspect ratio for the VCR DVR V.AUX NET/USB . video signals output to the Full : Output at 16:9 aspect ratio. HDMI. Normal : Output at 4:3 aspect ratio. HDP TV SAT/CBL This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “OFF”. Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu Multi-zone Progressive Mode This can be set when the input source is DVD HDP TV SAT/CBL Select optimum progressive VCR DVR V.AUX . mode for video material. Auto : The video material is automatically detected and the appropriate mode is set. Video 1 : Select mode suitable for video playback Video 2 : Select mode suitable for video and 30-frame film material playback. The selectable input modes depend on the input source and “Input Assign” (vpage 58) setting. Playback • This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “OFF”. • When “i/p Scaler” is set to ”Analog & HDMI”, the resolution of both the analog video input signal and HDMI input signal can be set. • To watch 1080p/24Hz pictures, use a TV that supports 1080p/24Hz video signals. • When set to “1080p/24Hz”, you can enjoy film-like pictures for film sources (in 24 Hz). For video sources and mixed sources, we recommend setting the resolution to “1080p”. • It is not possible to convert a 50 Hz signal into 1080p/24Hz. It is output at a resolution of 1080p/50Hz. Default settings are underlined. Settings • This can be set when “Video Convert” is set to “ON”. • “Analog & HDMI” can be set for input sources for which an HDMI input terminal is assigned. • This function is not effective when the input signal is x.v.Color or computer resolution. Resolution Auto : The number of pixels the TV connected to the HDMI output terminal Set resolution of the video supports is detected automatically and the appropriate output resolution signal output to HDMI. is set. 480p/576p / 1080i / 720p / 1080p / 1080p:24Hz : Set the output resolution. Changing the Input Mode and Decoding Mode (Input Mode) Connections i/p Scaler Analog : Use i/p scaler function for analog video signal. The input source’s resolution Analog & HDMI : Use i/p scaler function for analog and HDMI video signal. is converted to the resolution OFF : Do not use i/p scaler function. set at “Resolution”. Getting Started Making the Input Settings (Source Select) :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu 61 Getting Started Making the Input Settings (Source Select) Displaying the Playback Screen for the Different Input Sources (Play) Changing the Input Source’s Display Name (Rename) Setting items Setting contents Connections Settings Rename 1.Press p or ENTER. Change the display name of 2. Use o p to set the cursor to the character you want to change. the selected input source. 3. Use ui to change the character, then press ENTER. • Up to 8 characters can be input. • The input character type can be switched by pressing SEARCH on the main remote control unit or MENU while the display name is being changed. • The types of characters that can be input are as shown below. Playback Multi-zone 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change the display name. Setting contents Shuffle Songs : Shuffle all songs. Make settings for shuffle Albums : Shuffle songs from current album only. mode. OFF : Cancel shuffle mode. Remote Control Information Setting the NET/USB Playback Mode (Playback Mode) Correcting the Input Source’s Playback Level (Source Level) Default settings are underlined. • Corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s audio input. • Set this if there are differences in the input volume levels between the different sources. Default settings are underlined. This can be set when the input source is NET/USB . Setting items Setting contents Troubleshooting USB Select Front : Select front-panel port. Set the USB port to be Rear : Select rear-panel port. used. Setting contents –12dB ~ +12dB (0dB) Specifications • The analog input level and digital input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which “HDMI” or “Digital” is assigned at “Input Assign“ (vpage 59). • When the input source is “ Internet Radio Media Server Napster Rhapsody USB/iPod Favorites ”, the setting is NET/USB . :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu This can be set for the input source for which “iPod dock” is assigned at “Input Assign” (vpage 60). Repeat All : Repeat all songs. Make settings for repeat One : Repeat the current song. mode. OFF : Cancel repeat mode. Default Yes : Reset to the defaults. Reset all settings to factory No : Do not reset to the defaults. default. Main remote control unit operation buttons Setting the iPod with iPod Dock Playback Mode (Playback Mode) Setting items GUpper case charactersH ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ GLower case charactersH abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz GSymbolsH ! # % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = “ > ? @ [ \ ] GNumbersH 0123456789 (Space) 62 When the input source is “ NET/USB ( Favorites ) Internet Radio Media Server USB/iPod Napster Rhapsody XM SIRIUS HD Radio TUNER ( iPod )”, the corresponding screen can be displayed. Direct Play Favorites : Play songs registered as “Favorites”. Use DIRECT PLAY on the All Music : Play the songs saved on the PC media. sub remote control unit to set the folder to be played. :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu Setting the Media Server, USB/iPod, Napster and Rhapsody Playback Mode (Playback Mode) Automatically Presetting Radio Stations (Auto Preset) Default settings are underlined. Setting items Setting items Setting contents preset ON : Enable random playback. mode OFF : Disable random playback. If an FM station cannot be preset automatically, select the desired station by tuning it in manually, then preset it manually. This can be set when the input source is NET/USB . ON : Display still picture images in a slide show. OFF : Display only the selected still picture image. Interval 5s ~ 60s Set the playback time per image. Setting contents hen set to “All” to “Skip”, it is possible to skip entire preset memory W blocks (A to G). Remote Control Information Setting contents Setting items A~G This can be set when the input source is XM SIRIUS HD Radio TUNER . Set the preset channels that you do not want to display. All : All the preset channels in the selected memory block are skipped. 1 ~ 8 : Set the preset channels you do not want to displayed. • ON : Display the selected preset channel. • Skip : Do not display the selected preset channel. Multi-zone Default settings are underlined. Default settings are underlined. Slide Show Make slide show settings. TUNER . Setting Preset Channels so that They are not Displayed When Tuning (Preset Skip) Making the Settings to Play Still Pictures (Still Picture) Setting items This can be set when the input source is HD Radio Playback Random Make random settings. auto Setting contents Settings Start Start the process. Repeat All : Repeat all files. Make settings for repeat One : Repeat the current file. mode. OFF : Cancel repeat mode. Connections This can be set when the input source is Media Server USB/iPod Napster Rhapsody . Getting Started Making the Input Settings (Source Select) Troubleshooting Specifications Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu 63 Getting Started Making the Input Settings (Source Select) Giving Names to Preset Stations (Preset Name) Default settings are underlined. Connections Setting items A1 ~ G8 Select the preset channel. Setting contents This can be set when the input source is HD Radio TUNER . Settings Playback 1.Press p or ENTER. 2.Use o p to set the cursor to the character you want to change. 3.Use ui to change the character, then press ENTER. • Up to 8 characters can be input. • The input character type can be switched by pressing SEARCH on the main remote control unit or MENU while the display name is being changed. • The types of characters that can be input are as shown below. Multi-zone GUpper case charactersH ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ GLower case charactersH abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz GSymbolsH ! # % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = “ > ? @ [ \ ] (Space) GNumbersH 0123456789 Remote Control Information 4.Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change the display name. Default Yes : Reset to the defaults. Reset all settings to factory No : Do not reset to the defaults. default. Troubleshooting Specifications 64 Check the XM Radio and SIRIUS Radio Reception Sensitivity (Antenna Aiming) Default settings are underlined. • This can be set when the input source is XM SIRIUS . • Install the antenna with radio reception sensitivity set to maximum. Setting items Satellite Indicate strength. satellite Terrestrial Indicate terrestrial strength. Setting contents signal n When the input source is XM Display Condition Signal strength is strong Signal strength is good Signal strength is marginal Signal strength is weak No signal ¡¡¡¡ ¡¡¡ ¡¡ ¡ signal n When the input source is SIRIUS Display ¡¡¡ ¡¡ ¡ Condition Signal strength is excellent Signal strength is good Signal strength is weak No signal Setting SIRIUS Radio Reception Restrictions (Parental Lock) Default settings are underlined. Connections • This can be set when the input source is SIRIUS . • For any channel, set the radio reception limits. Setting items Setting contents 1.Press ui to select “Lock Setting”, and then press p or ENTER. radio 2.Pressing uio p, input the password (4 digits number) and press ENTER. 3. Select channel by pressing ui, and set the lock by pressing o p. Unlock : Do not lock selected channel(s). Lock : Lock selected channel(s). When a Parental Locked channel is tuned, “Enter Lock Code” is displayed, then input the password. Settings Lock Setting Set the channel reception limits. Playback Multi-zone Remote Control Information • The default password is “0000”. • If the password is wrong, “Lock Code is incorrect” is displayed. Input the correct password. • While listening to the channel being played, you can also set parental lock (vpage 74). Edit Lock Code Change the password. Troubleshooting 1.Press ui to select “Edit Lock Code”, and then press p or ENTER. 2.Input current lock code (4 digits) using uio p, and press ENTER. 3.Input new lock code (4 digits) using uio p, and press ENTER. 4.Input new lock code (4 digits) again using uio p, and press ENTER. 5.Press ui to select “Execute”, and then press ENTER. If the correct password is input, “Completed” is displayed, and the new password is modified. :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) Specifications • If the old password is incorrectly input, “Current Lock Code is incorrect” is displayed, and proceed again from step 1. • If the password input is 3 digits or less, “Enter 4 digits number” is displayed, and input again with a 4 digit password. • If the new password is not correctly input, “New Lock Codes do not Match” is displayed and the password does not change. Main remote control unit operation buttons Getting Started Making the Input Settings (Source Select) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu 65 Getting Started Playback Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Connections Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit Button only on the main unit Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON <BUTTON> [BUTTON] Settings ENTER Important Information Before starting playback, make the connections between the different components and the settings on the receiver. NOTE • Also refer to the operating instructions of the connected components when playing them. • External devices can be controlled by remote control unit (vpage 108 “Operating the Connected Devices by Remote Control Unit”). Playback Playing Components Multi-zone Playing a Blu-ray Disc Player/DVD Player Remote Control Information <ON/STANDBY> uio p <STATUS> • The following describes the procedure for playing Blu-ray disc player / DVD player. Use the same procedure to play other components. • Switch the main remote control unit to the “MAIN” mode when performing this operation (vpage 108 “Operating the Main Remote Control Unit”). 1 [ iPod] Playback preparation. qTurn on the power of the TV, subwoofer and player. wSwitch the TV’s input to the AVR-4810CI. eLoad the disc in the player. 2 3 Press [SOURCE SELECT] and select the input source. 4 Play the component connected to the AVR-4810CI. Turn the AVR-4810CI power on. Troubleshooting Display the source select menu (vpage 31). [POWER OFF] Specifications Make the necessary settings on the player (language setting, subtitles setting, etc.) beforehand. [SOURCE SELECT] (MAIN mode) [iPod] (MAIN mode) 66 When a DENON control dock for iPod (ASD-1R or ASD-11R, sold separately) is used, you can play images and music stored on an iPod®. Listening to music on an iPod® 1 Playback preparation. qConnecting the DENON control dock for iPod to the AVR4810CI (vpage 19 “Control Dock for iPod”). wSet the iPod® in the DENON control dock for iPod. 2 Turn the AVR-4810CI power on. [SOURCE SELECT] to display the GUI Source 3 Press Select menu, then select “ ” (vpage 31). (vpage 28 “Turning the Power On“) The input source switches to the source to which the control dock for iPod is assigned and the iPod menu is displayed. – GUI screen – [1/6] Music Playlistes Artists Albums Songs [1/2] iPod Music Videos Genres Composers (vpage 28 “Turning the Power On“) [1] [SEARCH] uio p ENTER Playing an iPod® Using a Control Dock for iPod 5 Adjust the items below. n Adjusting the master volume (vpage 85) n Selecting the surround mode (vpage 87) n Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality (vpage 90) (When using an ASD-1R) (When using an ASD-11R) b When using an ASD-11R, the “Music” and “Videos” folders are displayed on the top menu. b Once communications between the AVR-4810CI and the iPod are completed, the connections screen is displayed on the iPod. b If the connections screen is not displayed, the iPod may not be properly connected. Reconnect it. the main remote control unit to the “iPod” mode 4 Set (vpage 108 “Operating the Main Remote Control Unit”). 5 Press [SEARCH] and hold it down for a 2 seconds or more to select the display mode. Playable Picture file files Movie file Active buttons Remote mode S S A Sz2 Sz1 Sz2 Main remote control unit (AVR-4810CI) S iPod® A S S Playback starts. n Adjusting the master volume (vpage 85) n Selecting the surround mode (vpage 87) n Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality n Searching pages (vpage 86) • Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound (vpage 94). The default setting is “Mode 3”. • The title name, artist name and album name can be checked by pressing <STATUS> during playback. • The time (default : 30 sec) for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at “GUI” – “iPod” (vpage 54). Press uio p to return to the original screen. • Press [POWER OFF] or <ON/STANDBY> and set the AVR-4810CI’s power to the standby mode before disconnecting the iPod. Also switch the input source to one to which the menu “iPod” is not assigned before disconnecting the iPod. NOTE • Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some functions may not operate. • DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss of iPod data. Playback starts. Viewing Still Pictures and Videos on an iPod® in the Remote Mode Photos and videos on an iPod® equipped with a slide show or video function can be played using a DENON ASD-1R or ASD-11R control dock for iPod. 1 Press and hold [SEARCH] to set the Remote mode. the iPod’s screen, use ui to select 2 Watching “Photos” or “Videos”. “Remote iPod” is displayed on the AVR-4810CI’s display. b Depending on the iPod model, it may be necessary to operate the iPod unit directly. Press ENTER until the image you want to view is 3 displayed. “TV Out” at the iPod’s “Slide show Settings” or “Video Settings” must be set to “On” in order to display the iPod’s photo data or videos on the monitor. For details, see the iPod’s operating instructions. NOTE Video may not be output, depending on the combination of ASD-1R or ASD-11R DENON control dock for iPod and iPod. (vpage 90) 67 Specifications ui to select the item, then press ENTER or p to 6 Use select the file to be played. 7 Press ENTER, p or [1]. 8 Adjust the items below. n Shuffling playback (vpage 86) ui to select “Videos”, then press ENTER or 1 Use p. ui to select the search item or folder, then 2 Use press ENTER or p. ui to select the video file, then press ENTER 3 Use or p. Troubleshooting z1 : When using an ASD-11R DENON control dock for iPod. z2 : Video may not be output, depending on the combination of ASD-1R or ASD-11R DENON control dock for iPod and iPod. n Playing repeatedly (vpage 86) Remote Control Information Audio file Browse mode n To cue to the beginning of a track (vpage 85) Multi-zone Display mode n Fast-forwarding or fast-reversing (vpage 85) Playback Remote mode : This is the mode for performing operations directly on the iPod itself while watching the screen displayed on the iPod. In this mode, the GUI screen is not displayed. z “Remote iPod” is displayed on the AVR-4810CI’s display. When an iPod equipped with a video function is connected to a DENON ASD-11R control dock for iPod, video files can be played in the browse mode. Settings Browse mode : This is the mode for displaying the iPod information on the GUI screen to operate the iPod. In this mode, you cannot perform operations directly on the iPod itself. � z With the AVR-4810CI’s display, only English letters and numbers and certain symbols can be displayed. Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “. (period)”. n Stopping playback temporarily (vpage 85) Connections b There are two modes for display the contents recorded on the iPod. n To stop (vpage 85) Getting Started Playing Components Viewing Videos on an iPod® in the Browse Mode Getting Started Playing Components Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Connections Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit Button only on the main unit Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON <BUTTON> [BUTTON] Settings Playback Multi-zone uio p ENTER <STATUS> Remote Control Information [ iPod] [ Troubleshooting (MAIN mode) Specifications [iPod] (MAIN mode) b When no control dock for iPod is connected, this operation is also possible in the “iPod” mode. 68 • Music stored on an iPod can be played on the AVR-4810CI when the AVR-4810CI and iPod are connected by USB cable. • The AVR-4810CI supports iPod (5th generation and later), iPod nano, iPod classic, and iPod touch audio (it is not compatible with iPod shuffle). However, some functions may be limited on certain models. • The operation may not work properly if the iPod’s software is old. Be sure to use the latest version of iPod software. • With iPods, non-copyrighted material and material for which duplication and playback is authorized by law can be duplicated and played by individuals for their personal enjoyment. Infringement of copyrights is prohibited by law. • Note that DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising with the data on an iPod when using the AVR4810CI in conjunction with the iPod. Listening to music on an iPod® Connect the iPod® to the AVR-4810CI’s USB port using the USB cable included with the iPod (vpage 24 “USB Port”). NET/USB] 1 2 Turn the AVR-4810CI power on. Press [SOURCE SELECT] to display the GUI Source 3 Select menu, then select “ ” (vpage 31). (vpage 28 “Turning the Power On“) [1] [SEARCH] uio p ENTER [SOURCE SELECT] Playing an iPod® Connected Directly to the AVR-4810CI’s USB Port [SEARCH] uio p ENTER [SOURCE SELECT] (MAIN mode) – GUI screen – DENON’s iPod [1/9] Playlistes Artists Albums Songs Podcasts Genres Composers the main remote control unit to the “NET/USB” 4 Set mode (vpage 108 “Operating the Main Remote Control Unit”). b When no control dock for iPod is connected, this operation is also possible in the “iPod” mode. [SEARCH] and hold it down for a 2 seconds or 5 Press more to select the display mode. b There are two modes for display the contents recorded on the iPod. Browse mode : his is the mode for displaying the iPod information on the GUI T screen to operate the iPod. In this mode, you cannot perform operations directly on the iPod itself. zWith the AVR-4810CI’s display, only English letters and numbers and certain symbols can be displayed. Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “. (period)”. Remote mode : This is the mode for performing operations directly on the iPod itself while watching the screen displayed on the iPod. In this mode, the GUI screen is not displayed. z “Remote iPod” is displayed on the AVR-4810CI’s display. b The Remote mode is not supported on 5th generation iPods or iPod nanos. Search b When the iPod is connected directly to the USB port, menus under “Music” are displayed. b If the screens above are not displayed, the iPod may not be properly connected. Try connecting again. b When no control dock for iPod is connected, this can also be selected by pressing [iPod]. Remote mode S S A A A Az Main remote control unit (AVR-4810CI) S S iPod® A S Audio file Playable Picture file files Movie file Active buttons SEARCH Browse mode Display mode z:O nly the sound is played. ui to select the item, then press ENTER or p to 6 Use select the file to be played. 7 Press ENTER, p or [1]. Playback starts. 8 Adjust the items below. (vpage 90) n To stop (vpage 85) n Fast-forwarding or fast-reversing (vpage 85) n Playing in random order (vpage 86) n Searching pages (vpage 86) NOTE Family friendly packages are also available to restrict channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for children. To subscribe to XM, U.S. customers should visit xmradio.com or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346); Canadian customers should visit xmradio.ca or call XM Listener Care at 1-877-GETXMSR (1-877-4389677). To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. and Canadian customers can call 1-888539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit sirius.com (US) or siriuscanada.ca (Canada). HD Radio stations offer higher sound quality than conventional FM/ AM broadcasts. It is also possible to receive data services and select broadcasts from among up to eight multicast programs. HD Radio technology provides higher quality sound than conventional broadcasts and allows reception of data services. • FM sounds as sensational as CDs • AM sounds as rich as analog FM stereo • A variety of “data services”, including text-based information, song title, artist name, album name, genre, etc. can be received. Furthermore, in addition to conventional broadcasts, with HD Radio broadcasting it is possible to choose from up to 8 multicast programs. For detailed information on HD Radio technology, please go to “www. ibiquity.com”. HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD Radio logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Specifications “Made for iPod” means that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Troubleshooting • Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some functions may not operate. • DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss of iPod data. Whether you purchase a SIRIUS or XM tuner, you’ll need to activate and subscribe to begin enjoying the service. Easy to follow installation and setup instructions are provided with the satellite tuners. Whichever service you choose, there are a variety of programming packages available, including the option of adding “The Best of SIRIUS” programming to your XM tuner or “The Best of XM” programming to your SIRIUS tuner, enabling you to enjoy the most popular programming among both services. The “Best of” packages are not available to SIRIUS or XM Canada subscribers at this time. Using the HD Radio™ Receiver Remote Control Information • Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound (vpage 94). The default setting is “Mode 3”. • The title name, artist name and album name can be checked by pressing <STATUS> during playback. • The time (default : 30 sec) for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at “GUI” – “iPod” (vpage 54). Press uio p to return to the original screen. Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free music from categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country, R&B, Dance, Jazz, Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional and college sports including play by play games from select leagues and teams. Additional programming includes expert sports talk, uncensored entertainment, comedy, family programming, local traffic and weather and news from your most trusted sources. Multi-zone n Playing repeatedly (vpage 86) To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect either a SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to your satellite-ready receiver. Satellite Radio is available to residents of the US (except Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada. Playback n To cue to the beginning of a track (vpage 85) About SIRIUS XM Radio SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. SIRIUS and XM subscriptions sold separately. Taxes and a one-time activation fee may apply. XM tuners and home docks or SIRIUS tuners (each sold separately) are required to receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite radio service. All programming and fees subject to change. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio Systems. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii. Settings n Stopping playback temporarily (vpage 85) Important Information SIRIUS XM Radio Legal Connections n Adjusting the master volume (vpage 85) n Selecting the surround mode (vpage 87) n Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality Tuning in Radio Stations Getting Started Playing Components b The iPod may only be used to copy or play contents that are not copyrighted or contents for which copying or playback is legally permitted for your private use as an individual. Be sure to comply with applicable copyright legislation. 69 Getting Started Tuning in Radio Stations – FM/AM Broadcasts Listening to FM/AM Broadcasts Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Connections Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit Button only on the main unit Button only on the remote control unit Settings <SOURCE SELECT> BUTTON <BUTTON> [BUTTON] ENTER 1 Press [SOURCE SELECT] to display the GUI Source Select menu, then select “ ” (vpage 31). the main remote control unit to the “TUNER” 2 Set mode (vpage 108 “Operating the Main Remote Control Unit”). Playback 3 Press [BAND] to select “FM” or “AM”. 4 Tune in the desired broadcast station. Multi-zone q To tune in automatically (Auto Tuning) Press [MODE] to select “AUTO”, then use [TU d] or [TU f] to select the station you want to hear. w To tune in manually (Manual Tuning) Press [MODE] to select “MANUAL”, then use [TU d] or [TU f]. <TUNING PRESET> uio p <STATUS> Remote Control Information [ TUNER] [ Troubleshooting [TU d] [A ~ G] [TU f] [BAND] [MODE] [MEMO] [SEARCH] uio p ENTER [SOURCE SELECT] n Adjusting the master volume (vpage 85) n Selecting the surround mode (vpage 87) n Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality (vpage 90) [TU d] [TU f] Specifications [SOURCE SELECT] (MAIN mode) (MAIN mode) [CHANNEL] [0 ~ 9] [SAT TU] [TUNER] (MAIN mode) (MAIN mode) [TUNER] [SHIFT] 70 SAT TU] 5 Adjust the items below. Sub remote control unit [SAT TU] Presetting Radio Stations (Preset Memory) Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset. 1 Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset. 2 Press [MEMO]. [A ~ G] to select the block in which the channel 3 Press is to be preset, then press [CHANNEL] or [1 ~ 8] to select the preset number. b The memory block can also be selected by pressing [SHIFT] on the sub remote control unit. 4 Press [MEMO] again to complete the setting. • To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4. • Stations can be preset automatically at “Auto Preset” (vpage 63). NOTE Preset stations are erased by overwriting them. Listening to Preset Stations • If the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning, tune it in manually. • When tuning in stations manually, press and hold [TU d] or [TU f] to change frequencies continuously. • The time (default : 30 sec) for which the GUI menu is displayed can be set “GUI” - “Tuner” (vpage 54). Press uio p to return to the original screen. 1 Press [A ~ G] to select the memory block (A to G). [CHANNEL] or [1 ~ 8] to select the desired preset 2 Press station. You can also operate via the main unit. In this case, perform the following operations. Press <TUNING PRESET>, then turn <SOURCE SELECT> to select the preset radio station. n Default settings Auto tuner presets Direct Frequency Tuning 3 When setting is completed, press ENTER. The preset frequency is tuned in. Display GOOD MARGINAL WEAK NO GUI Status Signal strength is good Signal strength is marginal Signal strength is weak No signal GUI menu “Option Setup” – “Remote (SIRIUS/ 1 Set XM)” (vpage 55) to “SAT TU : XM”. [SOURCE SELECT] to display the GUI Source the position of the antenna until “SIGNAL: 2 Press Select menu, then select “ ” (vpage 31). 2 Adjust GOOD” is shown on the display. Press <STATUS> until the channel (example: 3 Set the main remote control unit to the “SAT TU” is displayed. 3 mode (vpage 108 “Operating the Main Remote “XM001”) [TU d] or [TU f] and select channel 0 Control Unit”). 4 Press (XM000). 4 Use [TU d] or [TU f] to select the channel. The input source becomes that set in step 1. You can then operate the input source you set in step 1. When the channel is tuned in, the name of the song and artist are displayed. 5 Adjust the items below. n Adjusting the master volume (vpage 85) n Selecting the surround mode (vpage 87) n Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality The radio ID is shown on the display. Radio ID The strength of both the XM satellite and terrestrial signals can be checked “Antenna Aiming” (vpage 64). (vpage 90) Remote Control Information b If o is pressed, the immediately preceding input is cancelled. The display will switch as shown below, depending on the reception conditions. Multi-zone 1 2 Input frequencies by means of [0 ~ 9]. Press [SEARCH]. <STATUS> until “SIGNAL” appears on the 1 Press display. Playback You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in. When operating XM with the AVR-4810CI via the main remote control unit or sub remote control unit, use [SAT TU]. Before operating, set to [SAT TU] operating mode. [SAT TU] of [INPUT SOURCE SELECT] and [SAT TU] of [DEVICE SELECT] mode can use only either XM or SIRIUS. The default setting is for SIRIUS operation. Settings 87.5 / 89.1 / 98.1 / 107.9 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 MHz 520 / 600 / 1000 / 1400 / 1500 / 1710 kHz, 90.1 / 90.1 MHz 90.1 MHz 90.1 MHz 90.1 MHz 90.1 MHz 90.1 MHz Checking the XM Signal Strength and Radio ID Connections A1 ~ A8 B1 ~ B8 C1 ~ C8 D1 ~ D8 E1 ~ E8 F1 ~ F8 G1 ~ G8 Listening to XM Satellite Radio Getting Started Tuning in Radio Stations – FM/AM Broadcasts Troubleshooting Specifications • The channel switches continuously when [TU d] or [TU f] is pressed and held. • The artist name, song title, category and reception level can be checked by pressing <STATUS>. • The time (default : 30 sec) for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set “GUI” – “Tuner” (vpage 54). Press uio p to return to the original screen. 71 Getting Started Tuning in Radio Stations – XM Satellite Radio Presetting Radio Channels (Preset Memory) Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Connections Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit Button only on the main unit Button only on the remote control unit <SOURCE SELECT> BUTTON <BUTTON> [BUTTON] ENTER Your favorite broadcast channels can be preset so that you can tune them in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset. Channel category Settings Playback select the preset number. Multi-zone 4 Press [MEMO] again to complete the setting. Remote Control Information To preset other channels, repeat steps 1 to 4. [ SAT TU] [ SAT TU] [A ~ G] [A ~ G] [TU d] [TU f] [MEMO] Troubleshooting [MEMO] [SEARCH] uio p ENTER Specifications uio p [CHANNEL] [SOURCE SELECT] (MAIN mode) [CHANNEL] [0 ~ 9] [1 ~ 8] [SAT TU] (MAIN mode) [SHIFT] [SAT TU] Sub remote control unit 72 1 Press o p. 1 Tune in the broadcast channel you want to preset. o p to select the category, to use ui to select 2 Press [MEMO]. 2 Use the desired channel. [A ~ G] to select the block in which the channel 3 Press is to be preset, then press [CHANNEL] or [1 ~ 8] to Accessing XM Radio Channels Directly b The memory block can also be selected by pressing [SHIFT] on the sub remote control unit. <TUNING PRESET> uio p <STATUS> Searching Categories NOTE 1 Press [SEARCH]. 2 Press [0 ~ 9] to input the channel. Example:Accessing channel “XM123”: Press [1], [2] and [3]. b If no button is pressed within several seconds, the channel automatically switches to the one whose number has been input. 3 Press ENTER to set that channel. Reception switches to the selected channel. Preset channels are erased by overwriting them. Listening to Preset Channels 1 Press [A ~ G] to select the memory block. [CHANNEL] or [1 ~ 8] to select the desired 2 Press preset channel. You can also operate via the main unit. In this case, perform the following operations. Press <TUNING PRESET>, then turn <SOURCE SELECT> to select the preset radio channel. • “LOADING” is displayed while channels or data are being received. • Refer to “Troubleshooting“ – “XM Satellite Radio“ (vpage 133) regarding other messages. Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio <STATUS> until “SIGNAL” appears on the 1 Press display. The display will switch as shown below, depending on the reception conditions. Status Signal strength is excellent Signal strength is good Signal strength is weak No signal Your favorite broadcast channels can be preset so that you can tune them in easily. Up to 56 channels can be preset. 1 Tune in the broadcast channel you want to preset. 2 Press [MEMO]. [A ~ G] to select the block in which the channel 3 Press is to be preset, then press [CHANNEL] or [1 ~ 8] to b The memory block can also be selected by pressing [SHIFT] on the sub remote control unit. The input source becomes that set in step 1. 5 Adjust the items below. n Adjusting the master volume (vpage 85) n Selecting the surround mode (vpage 87) n Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality (vpage 90) SR000 SiriusID ************ Sirius ID b Write your own SIRIUS ID for storage use. Sirius ID : To preset other channels, repeat steps 1 to 4. NOTE Preset channels are erased by overwriting them. Listening to Preset Channels The strength of both the SIRIUS satellite and terrestrial signals can be checked “Antenna Aiming” (vpage 64). Press [CHANNEL] to select the desired preset channel, then press ENTER. b Selection is still possible if you press [1 ~ 8] after pressing [A ~ G]. 73 Specifications You can also operate via the main unit. In this case, perform the following operations. Press <TUNING PRESET>, then turn <SOURCE SELECT> to select the preset radio channel. Troubleshooting • The channel switches continuously when [TU d] or [TU f] is pressed and held. • The song title, artist name, composer name, category and reception level can be checked by pressing <STATUS>. • The time (default : 30 sec) for which the GUI menu are displayed can be set “GUI” – “Tuner” (vpage 54). Press uio p to return to the original screen. Channel No. and Sirius ID are alternately shown on the display. Remote Control Information When the channel is tuned in, the name of the song and artist are displayed. Multi-zone You can then operate the input source you set in step 1. Playback GUI menu “Option Setup” – “Remote (SIRIUS/ 1 Set XM)” (vpage 55) to “SAT TU : SIRIUS”. [SOURCE SELECT] to display the GUI Source the position of the antenna until “SIGNAL: select the preset number. 2 Press Select menu, then select “ ” (vpage 31). 2 Adjust EXCELLENT” is shown on the display. Press <STATUS> until the channel (example: Set the main remote control unit to the “SAT TU” 3 is displayed. Press [MEMO] again to complete the setting. 3 mode (vpage 108 “Operating the Main Remote “SR001”) Press [TU d ] or [TU f ] and select channel 0 (SR000). 4 Control Unit”). 4 4 Use [TU d] or [TU f] to select the channel. Settings Display EXCELLENT GOOD WEAK NO SIGNAL Presetting Radio Channels (Preset Memory) Connections When operating SIRIUS with the AVR-4810CI via the main remote control unit or sub remote control unit, use [SAT TU]. Before operating, set to [SAT TU] operating mode. [SAT TU] of [INPUT SOURCE SELECT] and [SAT TU] of [DEVICE SELECT] mode can use only either XM or SIRIUS. The default setting is for SIRIUS operation. Checking the SIRIUS Signal Strength and Radio ID Getting Started Tuning in Radio Stations – XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS Satellite Radio Getting Started Tuning in Radio Stations – SIRIUS Satellite Radio Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Connections Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit Button only on the main unit Button only on the remote control unit Settings <SOURCE SELECT> BUTTON <BUTTON> [BUTTON] Searching Categories Parental Lock 1 Press o p. 1 Tune to the channel you want to lock. 2 Press ENTER for at least 3 seconds. 3 Enter the 4-digit lock code using uio p. SR001 Hits 1 CAT : Pops Channel category o p to select the category, to use ui to select 2 Use the desired channel. ENTER Accessing SIRIUS Satellite Radio Channels Directly Playback 1 Press [SEARCH]. 2 Press [0 ~ 9] to input the channel. Multi-zone Example:Accessing channel “SR123”: Press [1], [2] and [3]. b If no button is pressed within several seconds, the channel automatically switches to the one whose number has been input. <TUNING PRESET> uio p Remote Control Information 3 Press ENTER to set that channel. Reception switches to the selected channel. [ SAT TU] [ DTU] [A ~ G] Troubleshooting [TU d] [TU f] [MEMO] [MODE] [BAND] uio p ENTER [SEARCH] [SOURCE SELECT] [SEARCH] uio p ENTER Specifications (MAIN mode) [CHANNEL] [DTU] [0 ~ 9] (MAIN mode) [0 ~ 9] [SHIFT] 74 [DTU] [SAT TU] Sub remote control unit • “UPDATING” is displayed while the encording code is being updated. • “SIRIUS UPDATING” is displayed when updating SIRIUS tuner firmware. • Refer to “Troubleshooting” – “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (vpage 133) regarding other messages. “Enter Lock Code” is displayed. When you enter the correct code, the corresponding channel is locked. 4 Press ENTER. • Channels under Parental Lock cannot be tuned in by performing Tuning Up/Down or by category search. • Channels stored in preset memory can be tuned in by the preset channel select operation, even if Parental Lock is applied. • When a channel to which Parental Lock is applied is being played, Parental Lock for that channel is cancelled by performing step 2. • See “Edit Lock Cord” (vpage 65) for the method of changing Parental Lock Cord. • You can also set “Parental Lock” (vpage 65) from the menu. Listening to HD Radio Technology 5 Adjust the items below. (vpage 90) select the preset number. b The memory block can also be selected by pressing [SHIFT] on the sub remote control unit. 4 Press [MEMO] again to complete the setting. n Default settings Tuner presets A1 ~ A8 B1 ~ B8 C1 ~ C8 D1 ~ D8 E1 ~ E8 F1 ~ F8 G1 ~ G8 87.5 / 87.9 / 89.1 / 93.3 / 97.9 / 98.1 / 98.9 /100.1 MHz 101.9 / 102.7 / 107.9 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 MHz 530 / 600 / 930 / 1000 / 1120 / 1210 / 1400 / 1710 kHz 90.1 MHz 90.1 MHz 90.1 MHz 90.1 MHz Direct Frequency Tuning You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in. • To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4. • Multicasts can also be preset. • Stations can be preset automatically at “Auto Preset” (vpage 63). NOTE Preset stations are erased by overwriting them. 1 Press [SEARCH]. 2 Input frequencies by means of [0 ~ 9]. Specifications • If the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning, tune it in manually. • When tuning in stations manually, press and hold [TU d] or [TU f] to change frequencies continuously. • The time (default : 30 sec) for which the GUI menu is displayed can be set “GUI” - “Tuner” (vpage 54). Press uio p to return to the original screen. 1 Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset. 2 Press [MEMO]. [A ~ G] to select the block in which the channel 3 Press is to be preset, then press [CHANNEL] or [1 ~ 8] to Troubleshooting n Adjusting the master volume (vpage 85) n Selecting the surround mode (vpage 87) n Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset. • You can also operate via the main unit. In this case, perform the following operations. Press <TUNING PRESET>, then turn <SOURCE SELECT> to select the preset radio station. • If an audio program from HD2 to HD8 has been interrupted or if a program is called out using the preset buttons after it has been interrupted, HD1 is automatically selected after about 20 seconds. Remote Control Information • The “ ” indicator lights on the display when an HD Radio station is tuned in. • When “HD-AUTO” (tuning mode) is selected, only HD Radio stations are tuned in. • If “AUTO” (tuning mode) is selected, both HD Radio and analog stations are tuned in. w To tune in manually (Manual Tuning) Press [MODE] to select “MANUAL”, then use [TU d] or [TU f]. Presetting Radio Stations (Preset Memory) Multi-zone q To tune in automatically (Auto Tuning) Press [MODE] to select “HD-AUTO” or “AUTO”, then use [TU d] or [TU f] to select the station you want to hear. If the station you are listening to has multiple audio programs, “HD1” is indicated on the display. If it only has one audio program, “HD” is indicated. Playback 3 4 Tune in the desired broadcast station. Press [BAND] to select “FM” or “AM”. Press ui to select the audio program. 1 Press [A ~ G] to select the memory block (A to G). [CHANNEL] or [1 ~ 8] to select the desired preset 2 Press station. Settings 2 Set the main remote control unit to the “DTU” mode (vpage 108 “Operating the Main Remote Control Unit”). HD Radio Technology enables stations to broadcast multiple Audio programs and data services on HD2/HD3 channels. Listening to Preset Stations Connections 1 Press [SOURCE SELECT] to display the GUI Source Select menu, then select “ ” (vpage 31). Selecting Audio Programs Getting Started Tuning in Radio Stations – HD Radio Technology b If o is pressed, the immediately preceding input is cancelled. 3 When setting is completed, press ENTER. The preset frequency is tuned in. 75 Getting Started Tuning in Radio Stations – HD Radio Technology Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Connections Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit Button only on the main unit Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON <BUTTON> [BUTTON] Check the HD Radio Reception Information Press <STATUS> while an HD Radio broadcast is being received. The current reception information is shown on the display. Settings Playback q Normal ↓ w Frequency / Signal strength ↓ eLong station name / Program and Program type ↓ r Title name / Artist name ↓ t Album name / Genre name NOTE Multi-zone <STATUS> Remote Control Information If the station signal weakens while receiving a digital broadcast (while “ ” and text is displayed), the mode automatically switches to the analog reception mode (the reception frequency is displayed). Because of this, the “ ” indicator and text may flicker if the station signal level is weak and unstable. Playing Network Audio, USB Memory Devices This procedure can be used to play Internet radio stations or music or still picture (JPEG) files stored on a computer or USB memory device. Important Information About the Internet Radio Function • Internet radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet. Internet radio stations from around the world can be tuned in. The AVR-4810CI is equipped with the following Internet radio functions: • Stations can be selected by genre and region. • Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset. • Internet radio stations in MP3 and WMA (Windows Media Audio) format can be listened to. • Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing an exclusive DENON Internet radio URL from a Web browser on a computer. b The function is managed for individual users, so you must provide your MAC or e-mail address. Exclusive URL: http://www.radiodenon.com b The radio station database service may be suspended without notice. • The AVR-4810CI’s Internet radio station list is created using a radio station database service (vTuner). This database service provides a list edited and created for the AVR-4810CI. Troubleshooting Specifications 76 Media Player n Slide Show Function he AVR-4810CI plays back image (JPEG) files in the orientation in T which they are stored in the folder. USB Memory Devices WMA (Windows Media Audio) 32/44.1/48kHz 48 ~ 192kbps .wma MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3) 32/44.1/48kHz 32 ~ 320kbps .mp3 The AVR-4810CI plays back image (JPEG) files in the orientation in which they are stored in the folder. WAV 32/44.1/48kHz – .wav MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48kHz 16 ~ 320kbps .aac/ .m4a/ .mp4 FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) 32/44.1/48kHz – .flac GCompatible formatsH Internet radio Media serverz1 USB memory devicesz1 WMA (Windows Media Audio) S S Sz3 MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3) S S S WAV – S S MPEG-4 AAC – Sz2 Sz2 FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) – S S JPEG – S S A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network. Napster is a monthly subscription music distribution service provided by Napster. This service allows users to download and play pieces of music they want to hear on the AVR-4810CI. Before you can use Napster, you will need to visit the Napster website on your PC to create an account and register as a member. For details, access the following site: http://www.napster.com/choose/index_default.html About Rhapsody Rhapsody is a paid music broadcast service of RealNetworks. When you first listen to Rhapsody, it is necessary to subscribe to a Rhapsody account at the Rhapsody homepage by your PC and register this machine. See the Rhapsody homepage for details. www.rhapsody.com/denon Specifications z1 : Media server and USB • The AVR-4810CI is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standards. • The AVR-4810CI is compatible with WMA META tags. • WAV format Quantization bit rate: 16 bits. z2 : Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on the AVR-4810CI. Contents downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc., on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings. z3 : Copyright-protected files can be played on certain portable players compatible with MTP. About Napster Troubleshooting A USB memory device can be connected to the AVR-4810CI’s USB port to play music and still picture (JPEG) files stored on the USB memory device. Also, files stored on an iPod can be played when the iPod is connected directly to the AVR-4810CI’s USB port. See “Playing an iPod® Connected Directly to the AVR-4810CI’s USB Port” (vpage 68). • Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be played on the AVR4810CI. • The AVR-4810CI is compatible with USB memory devices in “FAT16” or “FAT32” format. Still picture (JPEG) files stored on USB memory devices can be played as slide shows. The time for which each picture is displayed can be set. Remote Control Information Still picture (JPEG) files stored in folders on a media server can be played as slide shows. The time for which each picture is displayed can be set. Extension Multi-zone or music files in WMA (Windows Media Audio) format, the album F art is only played when using Windows Media Player ver. 11. Bit rate Playback When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing. n Slide Show Function Sampling frequency Settings n Album Art Function GCompatible formatsH When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while playing the file. Connections This function lets you play music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) stored on a computer (media server) connected to the AVR-4810CI via a network. With the AVR-4810CI’s network audio playback function, connection to the server is possible using one of the technologies below. • Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service • Windows Media DRM10 n Album Art Function Getting Started Playing Network Audio, USB Memory Devices 77 Getting Started Playing Network Audio, USB Memory Devices Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Connections Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit Button only on the main unit Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON <BUTTON> [BUTTON] Settings ENTER Listening to Internet Radio 1 Playback preparation. qCheck the network environment, then turn on the AVR4810CI’s power (vpage 26 “Connecting to a Home Network (LAN)”). wIf settings are required, make the “Network Connecting” (vpage 46). Press [SOURCE SELECT] to display the GUI Source 2 Select menu, then select “ ” (vpage 31). Playback the main remote control unit to the “NET/USB” 3 Set mode (vpage 108 “Operating the Main Remote Multi-zone ui to select the item you want to play, then 4 Press press ENTER or p. Control Unit”). uio p <STATUS> The station list is displayed. Remote Control Information ui to select the station, then press ENTER 5 Press or p. Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”. [ 6 NET/USB] [A ~ G] Adjust the items below. n Adjusting the master volume (vpage 85) n Selecting the surround mode (vpage 87) n Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality (vpage 90) Troubleshooting [MEMO] n To stop (vpage 85) n Searching pages (vpage 86) ENTER uio p Specifications [SOURCE SELECT] (MAIN mode) [1 ~ 8] 78 n Searching by first letter (vpage 86) • There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet, and the quality of the programs they broadcast as well as the bit rate of the tracks varies widely. Generally, the higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but depending on the communication lines and server traffic, the music or audio signals being streamed may be interrupted. Inversely, lower bit rates mean a lower sound quality but less tendency for the sound to be interrupted. • “Server Full” or “Connection Down” is displayed if the station is busy or not broadcasting. • On the AVR-4810CI, folder and file names can be displayed as titles. Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “. (period)”. • Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound “RESTORER” (vpage 94). The default setting is “Mode 3”. • When <STATUS> is pressed, the display can be switched between the title name and radio station name. • The time (default : 30 sec) for which the GUI menu are displayed can be set at GUI menu “GUI” – “NET/USB” (vpage 53). Press uio p to return to the original screen. Recently Played Internet Radio Stations Recently played internet radio stations can be selected from “Recently Played”. Up to 20 stations stored in “Recently Played”. ui to select “Recently Played”, then press 1 Press ENTER or p. ui to select the item you want to play, then 2 Press press ENTER or p. Search Stations by Keyword (Alphabetic Strings) ui to select “Search by Keyword”, then press 1 Press ENTER or p. Search by Keyword Enter Station Presetting Internet Radio Stations b If you do not want to register it, press p. Listening to Internet Radio Stations Registered in Your Favorites [SOURCE SELECT] to display the GUI Source 1 Press Select menu, then select “ ” (vpage 31). Remote Control Information Preset Internet radio stations can be selected directly. The Internet radio station is registered. Multi-zone 2 Enter the characters, then press ENTER. Playback Submit A/O [MEMO] while the Internet radio station you 1 Press want to register is playing. 2 Press ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER. 3 Press o to select “Add”. Settings Input SEARCH Favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen, so when a station is registered as a favorite it can be tuned in easily. Connections The search display appear. Registering Internet Radio Stations as Your Favorites 1 Press ui to select the Internet radio station, then 2 Press ui to select “Preset”, then press ENTER. press ENTER or p. 2 [A ~ G], then press [1 ~ 8] to select the desired 3 Press preset number. Clearing Internet Radio Stations from Your While the Internet radio station you want to preset is playing, press [MEMO]. The AVR-4810CI automatically connects to the Internet and playback begins. The Internet radio station is now preset. NOTE Listening to Preset Internet Radio Stations After pressing [A ~ G], press [1 ~ 8] to select the registered preset number. Favorites [SOURCE SELECT] to display the GUI Source 1 Press Select menu, then select “ ” (vpage 31). ui to select the Internet radio station you 2 Press want to clear, then press [MEMO]. 3 Press o to select “Remove”. Specifications If registered at a number that has already been preset, the previously registered setting is cleared. Troubleshooting 4 Press [MEMO] again to complete the setting. Getting Started Playing Network Audio, USB Memory Devices The selected Internet radio station is cleared. b To cancel the operation without clearing the station, press p. The AVR-4810CI automatically connects to the Internet and playback begins. 79 Getting Started Playing Network Audio, USB Memory Devices Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit Button only on the main unit Button only on the remote control unit Use this procedure to play music files, image files or playlists. Playback preparation. 2 Press [SOURCE SELECT] to display the GUI Source Select menu, then select “ ” (vpage 31). Multi-zone 3 Switching the main remote control unit to the “NET/USB” mode (vpage 108 “Operating the Main Remote Control Unit”). 4 5 6 7 Use ui to select the server including the file to be played, then press ENTER or p. Connections 1 Playback BUTTON <BUTTON> [BUTTON] Playing Files Stored on a Computer ENTER Settings ui p Remote Control Information [ <STATUS> NET/USB] Troubleshooting [TU d] [TU f] ENTER ui p Specifications [SOURCE SELECT] (MAIN mode) qCheck the network environment, then turn on the AVR4810CI’s power (vpage 26 “Connecting to a Home Network (LAN)”). wIf settings are required, make the “Network Connecting” (vpage 46). ePrepare the computer (vComputer’s operating instructions). Press ui to select the search item or folder, then press ENTER or p. Press ui to select the file, then press ENTER or p. Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”. Adjust the items below. n Adjusting the master volume (vpage 85) n Selecting the surround mode (vpage 87) n Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality (vpage 90) n To stop (vpage 85) n Stopping playback temporarily (vpage 85) n Selecting tracks (vpage 85) n Playing repeatedly (vpage 86) n Playing in random order (vpage 86) n Searching pages (vpage 86) [USB] 80 Sub remote control unit n Searching by first letter (vpage 86) • When playing still picture (JPEG) files, files can also be selected using the operation described below. During playback, either press [TU d] (previous file) or [TU f] (next file). • Connections to the required system and specific settings must be made in order to play music files (vpage 26). • Before starting, you must launch the computer’s server software and set the files as server contents. For details, see the operating instructions of your server software. • Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may be required for the file to be displayed. • The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on the server specifications. If due to the server specifications the tracks/ files are not displayed in alphabetical order, searching by the first letter may not work properly. • WMA Lossless files can be played when using a server supporting transcoding, such as Windows Media Player Ver. 11. • Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound (vpage 94). The default setting is “Mode 3”. • The time (default : 30 sec) for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at “GUI” – “NET/USB” (vpage 53). • Use <STATUS> to switch between displaying the title name, artist name or album name. Playing files that have been Preset or Registered in Your Favorites Files can be preset, registered in your favorites and played using the same operations as for Internet radio stations (vpage 78). NOTE • Presettings are erased by overwriting them. • When the operation described below is performed, the media server’s database is updated and it may no longer be possible to play preset or favorite music files. • When you quit the media server and then restart it. • When music files are deleted or added on the media server. • When using an ESCIENT server, place “ESCIENT” before the server name. Playing Files Stored on USB Memory Devices Set the main remote control unit to the “NET/USB” mode (vpage 108 “Operating the Main Remote Control Unit”). 4 Press ui to select the search item or folder, then press ENTER or p. 5 6 Press ui to select the file, then press ENTER or p. Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”. Adjust the items below. Troubleshooting n Adjusting the master volume (vpage 85) n Selecting the surround mode (vpage 87) n Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality Remote Control Information 3 NOTE • The AVR-4810CI is equipped with two USB ports, one each on the front and rear panels. It is not possible to use the set with USB memory devices connected to both the ports at the same time. Select the USB port you want to use at “USB Select” (vpage 62). • DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss or damage to data on USB memory devices when using the USB memory device connected to the AVR-4810CI. • USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub. • DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a portable USB connection type HDD of the kind to which an AC adapter can be connected to supply power, use the AC adapter. • It is not possible to connect and use a computer via the AVR-4810CI’s USB port using a USB cable. • The AVR-4810CI is not compatible with the iPod shuffle. Multi-zone 2 Press [SOURCE SELECT] to display the GUI Source Select menu, then select “ ” (vpage 31). q At “USB Select” (vpage 62), select the USB port to be used. w Connect the USB memory device to the USB port set in q. Playback Playback preparation. Settings 1 Connections Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be played on the AVR4810CI. • By default, the front panel’s USB port will be used. • Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may be required for the file to be displayed. • During playback of still picture (JPEG) files, the files can also be switched using [TU d] (previous file) and [TU f] (next file). • If the USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions, only the top partition can be selected. • The AVR-4810CI is compatible with MP3 files conforming to “MPEG1 Audio Layer-3” standards. • When [USB] on the sub remote control unit is pressed, playback starts from the first file stored on the USB memory device. Getting Started Playing Network Audio, USB Memory Devices (vpage 90) n To stop (vpage 85) n Stopping playback temporarily (vpage 85) Specifications n Selecting tracks (vpage 85) n Playing repeatedly (vpage 86) n Playing in random order (vpage 86) n Searching pages (vpage 86) n Searching by first letter (vpage 86) 81 Getting Started Playing Network Audio, USB Memory Devices Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Connections Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit Button only on the main unit Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON <BUTTON> [BUTTON] Settings ENTER <STATUS> 6 Adjust the items below. Listening to Napster 1 Playback preparation. qCheck the network environment, then turn on the AVR4810CI’s power (vpage 26 “Connecting to a Home Network (LAN)”). wIf settings are required, make the “Network Connecting” (vpage 46). (vpage 90) Search From Napster Menu Playback Use ui to select search item or folder, then press [SOURCE SELECT] to display the GUI Source 1 ENTER or p. 2 Press Select menu, then select “ ” (vpage 31). Use ui to select the track item, then press ENTER Set the main remote control unit to the “NET/USB” 2 or p. 3 mode (vpage 108 “Operating the Main Remote Control Unit”). Multi-zone 4 uip RETURN n Adjusting the master volume (vpage 85) n Selecting the surround mode (vpage 87) n Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality Use ui p to input “Username” and “Password”. Napster Account Enter a Character Search For the Track You Want to Listen to Remote Control Information 1 Press [SEARCH]. [1/7] Napster Username Password [ My Napster Library Top Search 100s by Artist New Releases Search by Albums Radio Search by Track OK NET/USB] Enter Username Troubleshooting inputting the “Username” and “Password”, 5 After select “OK”, then press ENTER. If the “Username” and “Password” match, the top menu for Napster is displayed. [SEARCH] Specifications ENTER [SOURCE SELECT] (MAIN mode) ui p RETURN Napster Playlists Staff Picks Genres Cancel n Username : b You can search by artist name, album name or track name. 2 Use ui to select the search item, then press ENTER. The search display appears. Search by Artist [Input characters] GLower case charactersH abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz GUpper case charactersH ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ GSymbolsH! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ˆ _ ` { | } ˜ GNumbersH 0123456789 (Space) Enter Artist Name n Password : [Input characters] GLower case charactersH abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz GUpper case charactersH ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ GSymbolsH! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ˆ ` { | } ˜ GNumbersH 0123456789 (Space) 82 Input SEARCH Submit A/O 3 Enter the characters, then press ENTER. Registering Tracks in My Napster Library 1 Press p while the track you wish to register is playing. The track is entered in the Library. After selecting, the information is displayed. Remote Control Unit”). ui to select “Sign in to your account”, then 4 Use press ENTER or p. Sign in to your account [Input characters] GLower case charactersH abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz GUpper case charactersH ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ GSymbolsH! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ˆ ` { | } ˜ GNumbersH 0123456789 (Space) (vpage 90) n Playing in random order (vpage 86) n Searching pages (vpage 86) Enter Return NOTE • The password should be no longer than 99 characters. • The password may not contain underscores ( _ ). • Press RETURN to cancel the input. When “Cancel input?” is displayed, select “Yes”, then press ENTER. 5 Enter Username and Password. Rhapsody Account Sign In Username Password Specifications OK Enter Username Troubleshooting • Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound. The default setting is “Mode 3” (vpage 94). • The time (default : 30 sec) for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at “GUI” – “NET/USB” (vpage 53). • Use <STATUS> to switch between displaying the title name, artist name or album name. n Password : n Adjusting the master volume (vpage 85) n Selecting the surround mode (vpage 87) n Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality Start a 30-day trial n Playing repeatedly (vpage 86) GLower case charactersH abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz GUpper case charactersH ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ GSymbolsH! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ˆ _ ` { | } ˜ GNumbersH 0123456789 (Space) 7 Adjust the items below. Rhapsody n Selecting tracks (vpage 85) [Input characters] Remote Control Information n To stop (vpage 85) the main remote control unit to the “NET/ 3 Switching USB” mode (vpage 108 “Operating the Main n Username : Multi-zone 2 Use ui to select the information or track, then press ENTER. [SOURCE SELECT] to display the GUI Source 2 Press Select menu, then select “ ” (vpage 31). If the “Username” and “Password” match, the top menu for Rhapsody is displayed. Playback ui to select “My Napster Library”, then press 1 Use ENTER or p. qCheck the network environment, then turn on the AVR4810CI’s power (vpage 26 “Connecting to a Home Network (LAN)”). wIf settings are required, make the “Network Connecting” (vpage 46). Settings n Listening to Tracks Registered In My Napster Library 1 Playback preparation. Connections 2 Select “Add to my library”, then press ENTER or p. inputting the “Username” and “Password”, 6 After select “OK”, then press ENTER. Listening to Rhapsody Getting Started Playing Napster Cancel 83 Getting Started Playing Rhapsody Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Connections Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit Button only on the main unit Button only on the remote control unit uio p BUTTON <BUTTON> [BUTTON] Select the Search Mode e Search From the Rhapsody Internet Radio Station [1/4] Rhapsody q Rhapsody Music Guide Search Rhapsody Channels My Library MASTER VOLUME r e w ui to select “Rhapsody Channels”, then press 1 Use ENTER or p. ui to select radio station, then press ENTER 2 Use or p. Settings r Listening to Tracks Registered In My Library Playback q Search From Rhapsody Latest Information Multi-zone ENTER <STATUS> PHONES jack ui to select “Rhapsody Music Guide”, then 1 Use press ENTER or p ui to select the information for track selection, 2 Use then press ENTER or p. Remote Control Information After selecting, the information is displayed ui to select the track, then press ENTER or 3 Use p. [8] [6] [2] [9] [7] [3] Troubleshooting uio p ENTER MASTER VOLUME Specifications [MUTE] w Enter a Character Search For the Track You Want to Listen to 1 ui to select the search item, then press ENTER 2 Use or p. Use ui to select “Search”, then press ENTER or p. The search display appears. b You can search by artist name, album name, track name or keyword. 3 Enter the characters, then press ENTER. uio p [8] [2] 84 ENTER [9] [1/3] Sub remote control unit ui to select “My Library”, then press ENTER 1 Use or p. ui to select the information or track, then 2 Use press ENTER or p. After selecting, the information is displayed Track Menu Press p during playback to display the Track Menu. [1/6] Introduction Jamp to artist Jamp to album Similar artists Similar albums q Add to my library Rating e w q Search From the Similar Music Use ui to select the search item, then press ENTER or p. w Registering Tracks in My Library The track is entered in the Library. e Rating Function Use MASTER VOLUME to adjust the volume. n When the “Volume Display” setting (vpage 53) is “Relative” GAdjustable rangeH – – – –80.5dB ~ 18.0dB n When the “Volume Display” setting (vpage 53) is “Absolute” GAdjustable rangeH 0.0 ~ 99.0 To Stop During playback, either press and hold ENTER or press [2]. Stopping Playback Temporarily During playback, press ENTER, [3] or [1/3] on the sub remote control unit. Playback Press again to resume playback. b The adjustable range depends on the input signal, the channel level settings, etc. Fast-forwarding or Fast-reversing Turning Off the Sound Temporarily (Muting) • The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” (vpage 53). • To cancel, press [MUTE] again. Muting can also be canceled by adjusting the master volume. b Control Dock for iPod only. To Cue to the Beginning of a Track During playback, either press [8] (to search for previous tracks) or [9] (to search for subsequent tracks), or press ui. Listening with Headphones Remote Control Information Press [MUTE]. During playback, press and hold [6] (fast-reverse) or [7] (fast-forward), or press and hold ui. Multi-zone • Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound. The default setting is “Mode 3” (vpage 94). • The time (default : 30 sec) for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at “GUI” – “NET/USB” (vpage 53). • Use <STATUS> to switch between displaying the title name, artist name or album name. Settings 1 Use ui to select “Rating”, then press ENTER or p. 2 Use o p to select the rating, then press ENTER. Adjusting the Master Volume Connections Use ui to select “Add to My Library”, then press ENTER or p. Operations During Playback Getting Started Playing Rhapsody Troubleshooting Plug the headphones into the PHONES jack on the main unit. The sound from the speakers and pre-out connectors is automatically cut. Specifications NOTE • To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume level excessively when using headphones. • Remove your headphones when performing Audyssey Auto Setup or adjusting the speaker volume. 85 Getting Started Operations During Playback Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Connections Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit Button only on the main unit Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON <BUTTON> [BUTTON] uio p Playing Repeatedly Playing in Random Order Press [REPEAT]. GUI menu GUI display during menu remote control display unit operation Press [RANDOM]. Display Setting contents Settings ON Enable random playback. One One Repeat the current song. OFF OFF Disable random playback. OFF OFF Disable repeat playback. Multi-zone ON Playback Repeat all songs. Remote Control Information Selecting Tracks MAIN] [RANDOM] [REPEAT] STANDARD During playback, either press u (previous track) or i (next track). b GUI menu “Random” (vpage 63) can be set in the same way. The random mode applies when playing tracks on the USB memory device and on the media server. Searching Pages Press [SEARCH], then press o (previous page) or p (next page). b To cancel, press ui or [SEARCH]. Searching by First Letter Shuffling Playback Troubleshooting [SEARCH] uio p Setting contents ALL The repeat mode applies when playing tracks on the USB memory device and on the media server. [ Display All b GUI menu “Repeat” (vpage 62, 63) can be set in the same way. STANDARD GUI menu GUI display during menu remote control display unit operation This operation is convenient for choosing items from the menu screens for Internet radio stations or files stored on the computer. Press [RANDOM]. Specifications GUI menu GUI display during menu remote control display unit operation Display Setting contents Albums Albums Shuffle songs from current album only. Songs Songs Shuffle all songs. • If there are multiple items starting with the selected letter, they are displayed in alphabetical order. • If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted list.” is displayed. OFF OFF Cancel shuffle mode. b To cancel, press ui or [SEARCH]. When the menu screen is displayed, press [SEARCH] twice, then press o p to select the first letter you want to search for. b GUI menu “Shuffle” (vpage 62) can be set in the same way. If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may not be able to perform a character search. uio p [SEARCH] [REPEAT] 86 [RANDOM] Sub remote control unit DOLBY PLgz z1 : The signals are decoded in DOLBY PLgz for playback. DOLBY PLgx z2 : The signals are decoded in DOLBY PLgx for playback. DOLBY PLg : The signals are decoded in DOLBY PLg for playback. DTS NEO:6 : The signals are decoded in DTS NEO:6 for playback. neural : It is possible to play analog input signals and PCM (2-channel, 48 kHz or less) in the surround mode. This is the optimum mode for playing sources recorded in XM HD Surround (vpage 121). w Select the mode for the source at “Mode” (vpage 90). Cinema : This mode is suited for movie sources. Music : This mode is suited for music sources. Game : This mode is suited for games. Height Input signal DOLBY DIGITAL (other than 2ch) / DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY DIGITAL Plus DOLBY TrueHD DTS (5.1ch) / DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 / DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 / DTS 96/24 : This is the Pro Logic playback mode. This can be selected when playing with a DOLBY PLg decoder. : This is the Front Height playback mode. Set “Front Height” to “ON” (vpage 91). DTS-HD PCM (multi ch) / DSD (multi ch) DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY DIGITAL+PLgx CINEMA DOLBY DIGITAL+PLgx MUSIC DOLBY DIGITAL+PLgz DOLBY DIGITAL+ DOLBY DIGITAL+ +EX DOLBY DIGITAL+ + PLgx CINEMA DOLBY DIGITAL+ + PLgx MUSIC DOLBY DIGITAL+ + PLgz DOLBY TrueHD DOLBY TrueHD+EX DOLBY TrueHD+PLgx CINEMA DOLBY TrueHD+PLgx MUSIC DOLBY TrueHD+PLgz DTS SURROUND DTS+PLgx CINEMA DTS+PLgx MUSIC DTS+PLgz DTS+NEO:6 DTS ES MTRX6.1 (z1) DTS ES DSCRT6.1 (z2) DTS 96/24 (z3) DTS-HD HI RES DTS-HD MSTR DTS-HD+NEO:6 DTS-HD+PLgx CINEMA DTS-HD+PLgx MUSIC DTS-HD+PLgz DTS EXPRESS MULTI CH IN MULTI IN+Dolby EX MULTI IN+PLgx CINEMA MULTI IN+PLgx MUSIC MULTI IN+PLgz MULTI CH IN 7.1 z1 : T his is displayed when the input signal is “DTS-ES Matrix 6.1” and the AVR-4810CI’s “AFDM” (vpage 91) setting is set to “ON” z2 : T his is displayed when the input signal is “DTS-ES Discrete 6.1”. z3 : T his is displayed when the input signal is “DTS 96/24”. For details, see page 126. 87 Specifications b The modes that can be selected depend on the input source being played. The indication contents of the display Troubleshooting Pro Logic Displaying the Currently Playing Surround Mode Remote Control Information z1 : This can be set when “Amp Assign” – “Extra Channel” is set to “FH” and “Speaker Configuration” – “Front Height” is set to something other than “None”. z2 : This can be set when “Amp Assign” – “Extra Channel” is set to “SB” and “Speaker Configuration” – “Surround Back” is set to something other than “None”. In the case of standard playback of multi channel sources, the AVR-4810CI recognizes the format of the multi-channel audio input signal and automatically operates the appropriate decoder for surround sound. Multi-zone 1 2 Press STANDARD to select the surround mode. Playing the source (vpage 66). pressed. Playback The selectable surround modes depend on the following: • Format of the audio signals being input • Number of channels of the audio signals being input • The set amplifier assignment (vpage 41) qThe mode switches as shown below each time STANDARD is nS urround Playback of Multi-channel Sources (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.) Settings Operations n Surround Playback of 2-channel Sources Connections q Playing Sources According to the Sources’ Audio Signal Format/ Number of Channels (Standard Playback) Getting Started Selecting the Surround Mode (Surround Mode) Getting Started Selecting the Surround Mode (Surround Mode) Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Connections Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit Button only on the main unit Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON <BUTTON> [BUTTON] w Playing in a DENON Original Surround Mode The desired mode according to the program source and viewing situation can be selected from among 10 DENON original surround modes. 1 the surround 2 Select SIMULATION. Playing the source (vpage 66). Settings DSP SIMULATION PURE DIRECT mode by pressing DSP Playback MULTI CH STEREO : This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers. WIDE SCREEN Multi-zone DIRECT/STEREO : This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of viewing a movie on a large screen. SUPER STADIUM : This mode is suited for viewing sports programs. ROCK ARENA : This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a live concert in an arena. Remote Control Information JAZZ CLUB : This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a live concert in a jazz club. CLASSIC CONCERT : This mode is for appreciating classical concert programs. [ MAIN] PURE DIRECT DIRECT/STEREO DSP SIMULATION MONO MOVIE z : This mode is for playing monaural movie sources with surround sound. Troubleshooting VIDEO GAME : This mode is suited for achieving surround sound with video games. MATRIX : This mode lets you add a sense of expansion to stereo music sources. VIRTUAL : This mode is for enjoying surround effects using only the front speakers or headphones. Specifications z : When playing sources recorded in monaural in the “MONO MOVIE” mode, the sound will be off balance with a single channel (left or right), so input to both channels. Depending on the program source being played, it may not be possible to achieve a satisfactory surround effect. In this case, try other modes to achieve a sound field suited to your tastes. 88 e Direct Playback In this mode the signals bypass the tone control circuitry for high quality sound. The sound is output to the same channels as the input signal. 1 Playing the source (vpage 66). 2 Press DIRECT/STEREO to select the “DIRECT”. Displaying the Currently Playing Surround Mode Input signal The indication contents of the display Analog signal / PCM (2ch) / Dolby Digital source / DIRECT DTS source / Other 2-channel digital signals DSD DIRECT (z) DSD (2ch) MULTI CH DIRECT MULTI CH DIRECT + Dolby EX MULTI CH DIRECT + PLgx CINEMA PCM (multi ch) MULTI CH DIRECT + PLgx MUSIC MULTI CH DIRECT 7.1 DSD MULT DIRECT (z) DSD (multi ch) z:W hen DSD signals are converted to PCM signals as set by the audio parameters and speaker settings, “DIRECT” or “MULTI CH DIRECT” is displayed. For details, see page 127. r Stereo Playback This is the mode for playing in stereo. The tone can be adjusted. Sound is output from the front left and right speakers and subwoofer. Getting Started Selecting the Surround Mode (Surround Mode) Connections Settings 1 Playing the source (vpage 66). 2 Press DIRECT/STEREO to select the “STEREO”. Playback t Playing the Pure Direct Mode Multi-zone This is the mode that recreates the original sound most faithfully, providing extremely high quality sound. Remote Control Information 1 Playing the source (vpage 66). 2 Press PURE DIRECT. Troubleshooting • To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again. • During playback in PURE DIRECT mode, the surround parameters are the same as in DIRECT mode. • Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the PURE DIRECT mode. NOTE When in the PURE DIRECT mode, the GUI menu display is not displayed and the display on the main unit is turned off. Specifications 89 Getting Started Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality (Audio/Video Adjust) For details on how to select, set and cancel settings for each menu, see “GUI Menu Operation” (vpage 26). Setting items Adjusting the Sound (Audio Adjust) Connections Default settings are underlined. Surround Parameters (Continued) Settings The sound being played in the surround mode can be adjusted to your liking. The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal being input and the currently set surround mode. For details on the adjustable parameters, see “Surround Modes and Parameters” (vpage 124). Setting items Setting contents Playback Multi-zone Surround Parameters Mode : Set the play modes for the different surround modes. Adjust surround sound n In the PLgx or PLg mode parameters. Cinema : Surround sound mode optimized for movie sources. Music : Surround sound mode optimized for music sources. Game : Surround sound mode optimized for games. Pro Logic : Dolby Pro Logic playback mode (PLg mode only). Remote Control Information n In the PLgz mode Height : Dolby PLgz Height playback mode. n In the DTS NEO:6 mode Cinema : Surround sound mode optimized for movie sources. Music : Surround sound mode optimized for music sources. Troubleshooting • When “Surround Parameters” – “Front Height” (vpage 91) is set to “ON”, the “Height” mode is set automatically. • The “Music” mode is also effective for movie sources including a lot of stereo music. Cinema EQ : Soften the treble range of movie soundtracks for better understanding. • OFF : “Cinema EQ” is not used. • ON : “Cinema EQ” is used. DRC : Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds) • Auto : Automatic dynamic range compression on/off control according to source. This can be set in the Dolby TrueHD mode. • Low / Middle / High : These set the compression level. • OFF : Dynamic range compression always off D.COMP : Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds). • OFF : Turn dynamic range compression off. • Low / Middle / High : These set the compression level. Specifications 90 Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) Setting contents LFE : Adjust the low-frequency effects level (LFE). • –10dB ~ 0dB or proper playback of the different sources, we recommend setting F to the values below. • Dolby Digital sources : “0dB” • DTS movie sources : “0dB” • DTS music sources : “–10dB” Center Image : Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider sound. • 0.0 ~ 1.0 (0.3) Panorama : Assign front L/R signal also to surround channels, for wider sound. • OFF : Do not set. • ON : Set. Dimension : Shift sound image center to front or rear, to adjust playback balance. • 0 ~ 6 (3) Center Width : Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider sound. • 0 ~ 7 (3) Delay Time : Adjust delay time to control sound stage size. • 0ms ~ 300ms (30ms) Effect : Switch effect signal for multi-surround speakers on and off. • ON : Create a wider sound stage. • OFF : The effect is not set. Effect Level : Adjust effect signal level. • 1 ~ 15 (10) et to a lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the S surround signals seems unnatural. Room Size : Determine size of acoustic environment. • Small : Simulate acoustics of a small room. • Medium small : Simulate acoustics of a medium-small room. • Medium : Simulate acoustics of a medium room. • Medium large : Simulate acoustics of a medium-large room. • Large : Simulate acoustics of a large room NOTE “Room Size” does not indicate the size of the room in which sources are played. :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu Setting items Surround Parameters (Continued) Setting contents Setting items Surround Parameters (Continued) Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu 91 Specifications See overleaf Troubleshooting et this to “ON” if the subwoofer channel level seems too high when S playing audio signal. Subwoofer : Turn subwoofer output on and off. • ON : The subwoofer is used. • OFF : The subwoofer is not used. Default : Restores all the surround parameter settings to their defaults. • No : Do not reset to the defaults. • Yes : Reset to the defaults. Remote Control Information n For 2-channel sources ON : The surround back channel is used. OFF : No signal is played from the surround back channels. • This can also be set by pressing STANDARD on the main remote control unit. • If the source being played contains a surround back signal, the decoder type is automatically selected by the AFDM function. Set “AFDM” to “OFF” to switch to your preferred decoder. • If the setting in “Speaker Configuration” – “Surround Back” (vpage 41) is “None”, “Surround Back” is not displayed. Subwoofer Att. : Attenuate subwoofer level when using EXT. IN input. • ON : Set. • OFF : Do not set. Usually use in this mode. Multi-zone • Some Dolby Digital EX sources do not include EX flags. If the playback mode does not switch automatically even when “AFDM” is set to “ON”, set “Surround Back” to “MTRX ON” or “PLgx CINEMA”. • If the setting in “Speaker Configuration” – “Surround Back” (vpage 41) is “None”, “Surround Back” is not displayed. Surround Back : Sets the method of generating of the surround back channel. z1 : T his can be selected when playing DTS sources. z2 : T his can be selected when playing DTS sources including a signal to identify discrete 6.1-channel signals. z3 : T his can be selected when “Speaker Configuration” – “Surround Back” (vpage 41) is set to “2spkrs”. Playback [Example] Playing Dolby Digital software (with EX flag) • When “AFDM” is set to “ON”, the surround mode is automatically set to the DOLBY D + PLgx C mode. • To play in the DOLBY DIGITAL EX mode, set “AFDM” to “OFF” and “Surround Back” to “MTRX ON”. DSCRT ON : Play the surround back signals included in the 7.1-channel source. MTRX ON : Generate and play the surround back signals from the surround channel signals. ES MTRXz1 : Generate and play the surround back signals from the surround channel signals of the DTS source. ES DSCRTz2 : Play the surround back signals included in the 6.1channel DTS source. PLgx CINEMAz3 : Generate and play the surround back signals by decoding the signals in the Dolby Pro Logic gx Cinema mode. PLgx MUSIC : Generate and play the surround back signals by decoding the signals in the Dolby Pro Logic gx Music mode. OFF : The surround back channel is not played. Settings • “Front Height” is not displayed with the settings listed below. • When “Amp Assign” – “Extra Channel” (vpage 41) is set to “FH” • When the “Speaker Configuration” – “Front Height” setting (vpage 42) is set to “None” • When “Surround Mode” (vpage 88) is set to something other than “STANDARD” • “Front Height” cannot be set if the HD Audio source being played includes a front height channel. In this case, the Front height channel is played back without decoding in PLgz mode, using the input signal. AFDM (Auto flag detect mode) : Detects the source’s surround back channel signal and sets the optimum surround mode automatically. • OFF : Do not set. • ON : Set. n For multi-channel sources Set the decoding method for the surround back channel. Connections Front Height : Set the Dolby PLgz Height mode to ON or OFF. • ON : Switch to Dolby PLgz Height mode. • OFF : Do not switch to Dolby PLgz Height mode. Setting contents Getting Started Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality (Audio/Video Adjust) Getting Started Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality (Audio/Video Adjust) Setting items Setting contents Setting items Connections Tone Tone Control : Sets the tone control function ON and OFF. Adjust the tonal quality of • ON : Allow tone adjustment (treble, bass). the sound. • OFF : Playback without tone adjustment. Audyssey Settings (Continued) Settings • This can be set when “Dynamic EQ” (vpage 92) is set to “OFF”. • The tone cannot be adjusted in the direct mode. Bass : Adjust low frequency range (bass). • –6dB ~ +6dB Playback This can be set when “Tone Control” is set to “ON”. Treble : Adjust high frequency range (treble). • –6dB ~ +6dB Multi-zone Remote Control Information Troubleshooting Specifications This can be set when “Tone Control” is set to “ON”. Audyssey Settings MultEQ XT : Corrects both time and frequency response problems in the Set MultEQ XT, Dynamic EQ listening area. and Dynamic Volume. • Audyssey : Optimize the frequency response of all speakers. • Audyssey Byp.L/R : Optimize frequency response of speakers except NOTE front L and R speakers. If you have not performed • Audyssey Flat : Optimize frequency response of all speakers to flat Auto Setup, or if you change response. the speaker settings after • Manual : Apply frequency response set with “Manual EQ” (vpage performing Auto Setup, you 94). may not be able to select • OFF : Turn “MultEQ XT” equalizer off. Dynamic EQ/Dynamic Volume, and “Run Audyssey” may be displayed. • “Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” and “Audyssey Flat” can be In this case, either perform selected after Audyssey Auto Setup has been performed. “Audyssey” Audyssey Auto Setup over is automatically selected after performing Audyssey Auto Setup. “When again or perform “Restore” “Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” or “Audyssey Flat” is selected, “ ” (vpage 38) to return to the lights. settings after Audyssey Auto • After running Audyssey Auto Setup, if the Speaker Configuration, Setup was run. Distance, Channel Level, and Crossover Frequency have changed without increasing the number of speakers measured, only “ ” lights. • If “Dynamic EQ” or “Dynamic Volume” is set to “ON” when “MultEQ XT” is set to either “OFF” or “Manual”, “MultEQ XT” is automatically set to “Audyssey”. • You can also press MULTEQ XT on the main remote control unit to set. Setting contents Dynamic EQ : Solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics. • ON : Use the Dynamic EQ equalizer. • OFF : Do not use the Dynamic EQ equalizer. • After performing “Audyssey Auto Setup”, the “Dynamic EQ” setting automatically becomes “ON”. • “ ” is displayed when set to “ON”. • When “MultEQ XT” is set to “OFF” or “Manual”, “Dynamic EQ” is automatically set to “OFF”. • If “Dynamic Volume” is set to “ON”, “Dynamic EQ” is automatically set to “ON”. • When you set ”Dynamic EQ” to ”ON”, “Tone Control” is switched ”OFF”. • You can also press DYNAMIC EQ on the main remote control unit to set. Dynamic EQ : ON/Volume : OFF Dynamic EQ / Volume : OFF “Red” “Green” “Off” “OFF” About Dynamic EQ Audyssey Dynamic EQ™ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics. Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ® XT to provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level. NOTE • “MultEQ XT” and “Manual” cannot be selected when “EQ Customize” is set to “Not Used” (vpage 45). • When using headphones, “MultEQ XT” is set to “OFF”. See overleaf 92 Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu Setting items Audyssey Settings (Continued) Setting contents Setting items Stage Height : Adjust sound stage height when using front height speakers. • –10 ~ 0 • When “MultEQ XT” is set to “OFF”, “Dynamic Volume” is automatically set to “OFF”. • You can also press DYNAMIC VOLUME on the main remote control unit to set. Dynamic EQ : ON / Volume : OFF “Green” “Red” See overleaf Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu 93 Specifications Dynamic EQ / Volume : ON • “DSX” can be set when you are using front height speakers or front wide speakers. • “DSX” is valid when using a center speaker. • “DSX” is valid when surround mode is STANDARD mode other than PLgz Height. • “DSX” can be operated by DSX on the main unit and SPEAKER on the main remote control unit. The “ ” indicator lights on the display. • “Stage Width” cannot be configured if the HD Audio source being played includes front wide channels. “Stage Height” cannot be configured if the HD Audio source being played includes front height channels. In these case, the respective channels are played back using the input signals. Troubleshooting ” is displayed when set to “ON”. Remote Control Information Can be set when “Dynamic Volume” is set to “ON”. Audyssey DSX Settings DSX : Provides more immersive surround sound by adding the new Adjust DSX setting and channels. sound stage parameters. • ON : Set Audyssey DSX to expand surround. • OFF : Do not set Audyssey DSX. Stage Width : Adjust sound stage width when using front wide speakers. • –10 ~ 0 Multi-zone Setting : Set “Dynamic Volume” equalizer effect. • Midnight : High setting affects volume the most, causing all sounds to be of equal loudness. • Evening : Middle setting prevents loud and soft sounds from being much louder and softer respectively than average sounds. • Day : Low setting provides the least adjustments to the loudest and softest of sounds. Playback • “ About Dynamic Volume Audyssey Dynamic Volume™ solves the problem of large variations in volume level between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ™ is integrated into Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog clarity remain the same. Settings etting is enabled when “Dynamic EQ” is “ON” (vpage 92). S Dynamic Volume : Solves the problem of large variations in volume level between TV, movies and other content (between quiet passages and loud passages, etc.) by automatically adjusting to the user’s preferred volume setting. • ON : Use the “Dynamic Volume” equalizer. The Dynamic Volume effect will be at the level of the “Setting” (vpage 93). • OFF : Do not use the “Dynamic Volume” equalizer. Audyssey Settings (Continued) Connections Reference Level Offset : Audyssey Dynamic EQ is referenced to the standard film mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the reference response and surround envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However, film reference level is not always used in music or other non-film content. The Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides three offsets from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be selected when the mix level of the content is not within the standard. • 0dB (Film Ref) : This is the default setting and should be used when listening to movies. • 5dB : Select this setting for content that has a very wide dynamic range, such as classical music. • 10dB : Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a wider dynamic range. This setting should also be selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at 10 dB below film reference. • 15dB : Select this setting for pop/rock music or other program material that is mixed at very high listening levels and has a compressed dynamic range. Setting contents Getting Started Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality (Audio/Video Adjust) Getting Started Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality (Audio/Video Adjust) Setting items Audyssey DSX Settings (Continued) Connections Settings Setting contents Setting items Setting contents About Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion (DSX) RESTORER This function restores compressed audio signals to how they were before compression and corrects the sense of volume of the bass and treble to obtain richer playback sound. OFF : Do not use RESTORER. Mode 1 (RESTORER 64) : Optimized mode for compressed sources with very weak highs. Mode 2 (RESTORER 96) : Apply suitable bass and treble boost for all compressed sources. Mode 3 (RESTORER HQ) : Optimized mode for compressed sources with normal highs. Playback Audyssey DSX is a scalable surround expansion system that adds new channels to improve the surround impression. Based on research in human hearing DSX adds a pair of Wide channels in the front because that information is critical in the rendering of a realistic soundstage. DSX then adds a pair of Height channels above the main front channels to reproduce the next most important acoustical and perceptual cues related to soundstage depth. In addition to creating these new channels, DSX applies Surround Envelopment Processing to enhance the blend between the front and side/back surround channels. The result is a much more seamless and enveloping home theater experience. Multi-zone • This can be set with analog signals or when a PCM signal (fs = 44.1/48 kHz) is input. This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “EXT. IN” or when the surround mode is set to “DIRECT”. • The default setting for “iPod” and “NET/USB” are “Mode 3”. All others are set to “OFF”. • When set to something other than “OFF”, “ ” is displayed. • This can also be set by pressing RESTORER on the main remote control unit during playback. Remote Control Information Manual EQ Adjust CH : Correct the tone of each speaker. Use the graphic equalizer q Select the speaker tone adjustment method. to adjust the tone of each All : Adjust the tone of all speakers together. speaker. L/R : Adjust the tone of left and right speakers together. Each : Adjust the tone of each speaker. wSelect the speaker. eSelect the adjustment frequency band. 63Hz / 125Hz / 250Hz / 500Hz / 1kHz / 2kHz / 4kHz / 8kHz / 16kHz b Select the speakers you want to adjust when “L/R” or “Each” is selected. r Adjust the level. –20.0dB ~ +6.0dB (0.0dB) OFF Mode 1 (RESTORER 64) Mode 2 (RESTORER 96) Mode 3 (RESTORER HQ) About the RESTORER function • Such compressed audio formats as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio) and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The RESTORER function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression. It also corrects the sense of volume of the bass to obtain richer sound with compressed audio signals. • This is displayed on the GUI menu and can be set when the input source is set to “TUNER”, “XM”, “HD Radio” or “NET/USB”, or when analog signals (including FM/AM signals) or PCM signals (fs = 44.1/48 kHz) are input. Troubleshooting Can be set when “MultEQ XT” setting (vpage 92) is “Manual”. Curve Copy : Copy “Audyssey Flat” curve from MultEQ® XT. Yes : Copy. No : Do not copy. “Curve Copy” is displayed after Audyssey Auto Setup has been performed. Specifications Default : Reset the settings to the default values. • Yes : Reset. • No : Do not Reset. Audio Delay 0ms ~ 200ms While viewing video, manually adjust the time to • This can be set within the range of 0 to 100 ms when “Auto Lip delay audio output. Sync” is set to “ON” and when a TV compatible with Auto Lipsync is connected. • Store “Audio Delay” for each input source. 94 Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu Getting Started Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality (Audio/Video Adjust) Adjusting the Picture Quality (Picture Adjust) Default settings are underlined. HDP TV SAT/CBL VCR DVR V.AUX NET/USB . Connections • This can be set when the input source is DVD b With input sources other than the ones above, this can be set when “Video Select” is selected. In this case, the original input source settings are called out. • Can be set when the “Video Convert” setting (vpage 60) is “ON”. Settings Setting items Setting contents –6 ~ 0 ~ +6 Playback 0 ~ +12 –6 ~ 0 ~ +6 Multi-zone –6 ~ 0 ~ +6 OFF / Low / Middle / High Remote Control Information Contrast Adjust picture contrast. Brightness Adjust picture brightness. Chroma Level Adjust picture chroma level (saturation). Hue Adjust color hue. DNR Reduce overall picture noise. Enhancer Emphasize picture contours. 0 ~ +12 • “DNR” and “Enhancer” are each effective with HDMI output. • The value set at “Picture Adjust” is stored in the memory individually for each input source. Troubleshooting Specifications Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu 95 Getting Started Checking the Status (Information) Setting items Setting items Setting contents Connections Settings Playback Multi-zone Remote Control Information n MAIN ZONE Status Shows information about settings for MAIN ZONE. The items displayed differ according to the input source. Shows information about Zone Rename / Select Source / Name / Surround Mode / Input Mode / current settings. Decode Mode / HDMI / Digital / Component / iPod dock / Rec Select / Video Select / Video Convert / i/p Scaler / Resolution / Progressive Mode / Aspect etc. n ZONE2 / ZONE3 / ZONE4 Shows information about settings for multi-zone. Zone Rename / Power / Select Source / Volume Level Surround Mode : The currently set surround mode Audio Input Signal Signal : The input signal type fs : The input signal’s sampling frequency Shows information about Format : The number of channels in the input signal (front, surround, audio input signals. LFE) Offset : The dialogue normalization correction value Flag : This is displayed when inputting signals including a surround back channel. “MATRIX” is displayed with Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES Matrix signals, “DISCRETE” with DTS-ES Discrete signals. Setting contents uto Surround A Mode Analog/PCM 2ch / Digital 2ch / Digital 5.1ch / Multi ch This can be displayed when “Auto Surround Mode” is set to “ON”. Shows information about auto surround mode settings. Quick Select 1 / Quick Select 2 / Quick Select 3 / ZONE2 Quick Select / ZONE3 Quick Select / ZONE4 Quick Select • Select Source / Video Select / MultEQ XT / Dynamic EQ / Dynamic Shows information about Volume / Auto Surround Mode (Analog/PCM 2ch / Digital 2ch / “Saving Frequently Used Digital 5.1ch / Multi ch) / Volume Level Settings (Quick Select Function)” (vpage 101) settings. Quick Select Preset Channel Shows information preset channels. This can be checked when the input source is set to TUNER XM SIRIUS HD Radio Internet Radio . about A / B / C / D / E / F / G • A1 ~ A8 / B1 ~ B8 / C1 ~ C8 / D1 ~ D8 / E1 ~ E8 / F1 ~ F8 / G1 ~ G8 Dialogue normalization function This is automatically activated when playing Dolby Digital sources. This function automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program sources. The correction value can be checked using the STATUS on the main unit. Troubleshooting The figure is the correction value when the standard level is corrected. Specifications Signal Info. • Resolution / Color Space / Pixel Depth Monitor 1 / Monitor 2 Shows information about • Interface / Supported resol. HDMI input/output signals and monitor. HDMI Information 96 Main remote control unit operation buttons :Displaying the menu Cancel the menu :Moves the cursor (Up/Down/Left/Right) NET/USB :Confirm the setting :Return to previous menu Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual BUTTON <BUTTON> [BUTTON] Playing a Blu-ray Disc Player Compatible with DENON LINK 4th <SOURCE SELECT> 59 “Input Assign”). in step 1. The “ [ MAIN] Remote Control Information “HDMI Control” – “Control” (vpage 44) to 2 Set “ON”. turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [INPUT 3 Either SOURCE SELECT] to select the input source assigned Multi-zone “HDMI” to the input source to be used, and 1 Assign assign “D.LINK” to the “Digital” setting (vpage Playback DENON LINK 4th uses the clock of the AV amplifier connected by DENON LINK to achieve HDMI signal transfer with little jitter when playing BD. Settings To play DENON LINK 4th signals, make HDMI and DENON LINK connections with the compatible Blu-ray disc player. NOTE • Set the Blu-ray disc player’s “HDMI Control” setting to “ON”, the “DENON LINK” setting to “4th”. For instructions on operation, refer to the Blu-ray disc player’s manual. • The jitter-free function does not work except during BD playback. In this case, the video signal is output from the HDMI OUT terminal, and the audio signal from the DENON LINK terminal. • When a BD is played with the input mode set to “Auto”, playback is performed in the DENON LINK 4th mode. When a disc other than a BD is played with the input mode set to “Auto”, playback is automatically performed in the DENON LINK 3rd mode. • When the input mode is set to “HDMI”, normal HDMI playback is performed. • When the input mode is set to “Digital”, playback is fixed to the DENON LINK 3rd mode and BDs cannot be played. Connections Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit Button only on the main unit Button only on the remote control unit Other Operations Getting Started Other Operations and Convenient Functions ” indicator lights on the display. Troubleshooting 4 Set “Input Mode” (vpage 61) to “AUTO”. the surround mode (vpage 87 “Selecting the 5 Select Surround Mode (Surround Mode)”). 6 Start playing the BD. Playback starts. Specifications [INPUT SOURCE SELECT] 97 Getting Started Other Operations Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Connections Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit Button only on the main unit Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON <BUTTON> [BUTTON] Playing Super Audio CD assign the input source to be used to “HDMI” 1 Either (vpage 59), or assign “D.LINK” at the “Digital” setting (vpage 59 “Input Assign”). turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [INPUT 2 Either SOURCE SELECT] to select the input source assigned Settings in step 1. <SOURCE SELECT> <ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT> The “ ” or “ ” indicator lights on the display. Playback the surround mode (vpage 87 “Selecting the 3 Select surround mode). b We recommend playing in the DIRECT mode. Multi-zone 4 Start playing the Super Audio CD. The “ ” indicator lights on the display. b For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s operating instructions. Remote Control Information [ MAIN] Troubleshooting Specifications [INPUT SOURCE SELECT] 98 • When playing DSD signals in the DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode, the DSD signals are converted as such into analog signals. When playing in other surround modes, the DSD signals are first converted into PCM format, then into analog signals. • “DSD DIRECT” is shown on the display when playing DSD 2-channel signals in the DIRECT mode. “DSD MULTI DIRECT” is shown on the display when playing DSD multi-channel signals in the DIRECT mode. Recording on an External Device (REC OUT mode) When using the audio/video recording connectors (VCR or DVR outputs), you can record the audio or video from a different program source while listening to the currently played track. 1 Press <ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT> . <SOURCE SELECT> until “RECOUT SOURCE” 2 Turn is displayed. “ZONE2 SOURCE” is shown on the display. The “ ” indicator lights. ZONE2 SOURCE ZONE2 TUNER ···· ZONE2 HD Radio RECOUT HD Radio RECOUT SIRIUS ···· RECOUT SOURCE <SOURCE SELECT> to choose the input source 3 Turn to be recorded. 4 Play the program source. b For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s operating instructions. 5 Start recording. b For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s operating instructions. n AVR-4810CI power off can be linked to the TV power off step. When you set “Output audio from amp” in the TV audio output setup operation, you can switch the amp power on. n You can switch audio output devices with a TV operation. n You can switch AVR-4810CI input source through linkage to TV input switching. the television input to the HDMI connected to 3 Switch the AVR-4810CI. the AVR-4810CI input to the HDMI input 4 Switch source and check if the picture from the player is ok. you turn the TV’s power to standby, check 5 When that the power of the AVR-4810CI and player also goes on standby. • When you want to listen to TV audio by AVR-4810CI, connect optical digital or analog audio (vpage 21 “TV“). • When using these functions set as follows: “HDMI Control” – “Control” (vpage 44) set to “ON“. NOTE NOTE 99 Specifications Should any of the operations below be performed, the interlocking function may be reset, in which case, repeat step’s 1 and 2. • “Input Assign” – “HDMI” (vpage 59) setting has changed. • “Monitor Out” (vpage 43) setting is changed. • There is a change to the connection between the equipment and the HDMI, or an increase in equipment. Troubleshooting • When “Control” is set to “ON”, it consumes more standby power. • The HDMI control function controls operations of a TV that is compatible with the HDMI control function. Make sure that the TV and HDMI are connected when you perform HDMI control. • When you power off AVR-4810CI, the HDMI control function does not operate. Either power on or set to standby. • Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or player. Check the owner’s manual of each device for details beforehand. Please refer to the DENON website for information on compatible equipment. • When “Control” is set to “ON”, it is not possible to assign an HDMI terminal to “TV” at “Input Assign” (vpage 59). If the HDMI control function does not operate properly, check the following points. • Is the TV or player compatible with the HDMI control function? • Is the AVR-4810CI properly set? • Is the “HDMI Control” – “Control” (vpage 44) set to “ON”? • Is the “Power Off Control” (vpage 44) set to “ON”? • Is the “Control Monitor” (vpage 44) set for the monitor output connected to television? • In the case of dual monitor connection, is the “Control Monitor” (page 44) on the GUI menu set to a monitor without HDMI control? • Are the HDMI control function settings of all equipment correct? Remote Control Information n When playing the player, the AVR-4810CI input function switches to the function of that player. Multi-zone n You can adjust AVR-4810CI volume in the TV volume adjustment operation. Set “HDMI Control” – “Control” (vpage 44) to “ON“. b Please consult the operating instructions for the connected equipment to check the settings. b Carryout steps 1 and 2 should any of the equipment be plugged out. Playback • Recordings you make are for your personal enjoyment and should not be used for other purposes without permission of the copyright holder. • Input sources for which “Delete” is selected at “Source Delete” (vpage 53) cannot be selected. When you make an HDMI connection with a TV or player compatible with AVR-4810CI and HDMI control functions, you can perform the following operations by setting the HDMI control function of each device. Settings NOTE HDMI Control Function the power on for all the equipment connected 1 Turn by HDMI cable. the HDMI control function for all equipment 2 Set connected by HDMI cable. Connections • To cancel, press <ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT>, then turn <SOURCE SELECT> until “ZONE2 SOURCE” is displayed. • Make a test recording before starting the actual recording. • Signals are only output to the analog REC OUT connectors when the digital signals input to the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/ COAXIAL) are PCM (2-channel) signals. • As the digital audio signal input from the HDMI connector is not output to the digital recording connector (OPTICAL), you should connect using the OPTICAL and COAXIAL connectors. • Sources selected with the REC OUT mode are output from ZONE2 as well. • In the REC OUT mode, the remote control unit’s ZONE2 mode buttons cannot be operated. • The “XM” and “HD Radio” digital audio output signals are not output from the OPTICAL2 output connectors. Also, network audio signals (Internet radio, music server, USB, Napster and Rhapsody) are output as copy-protected signals. Convenient Functions Getting Started Other Operations Getting Started Convenient Functions Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Connections Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit Button only on the main unit Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON <BUTTON> [BUTTON] Settings ENTER Setting the Power to Standby After a Certain Amount of Time (Sleep Timer Function) With this function, you can set the AVR-4810CI so that the power is automatically switched to standby after the set amount of time has passed. This is convenient for playing sources while going to sleep. Press [SLEEP] and display the time you want to set. Playback The “ ” indicator on the display lights. • The time switches as shown below each time [SLEEP] is pressed. OFF 120 min 30 min Multi-zone uio p Remote Control Information [ MAIN] Troubleshooting [SLEEP] uio p QUICK SELECT QUICK SELECT [PARTY] ENTER 90 min 60 min n To cancel the sleep timer Press [SLEEP] to set “OFF”. The “ ” indicator on the display turns off. • The sleep timer setting is canceled if the AVR-4810CI’s power is set to standby or turned off. • The sleep timer function can be set separately for the different zones (vpage 107 “Sleep Timer Function”). Adjust the Volume of the Speakers You can adjust the channel level either according to the playback sources or to suit your taste, as described below. Adjust the Volume of the Different Speakers 1 Press [CHANNEL LEVEL]. 2 Use ui to select the speaker. The speaker that can be set switches each time one of the buttons is pressed. 3 Use o p to adjust the volume. b In the case of a subwoofer, press o when it is at “–12 dB” will change the setting to “OFF”. When a headphone jack is inserted, the headphone channel level can be adjusted. djusting the Volume of Groups of Speakers A (Fader Function) This function lets you adjust (fade) the sound from all the front (Front speaker / Front height speaker / Front wide speaker / Center speaker) or rear (Surround speaker / Surround Back speaker) speakers at once. i to select “Fader”, then select the item to be 1 Use adjusting using o or p. 2 Use o p to adjust the volume of the speakers. (o : front, p: rear) Specifications [CHANNEL LEVEL] • The fader function does not affect the subwoofer. • The fader can be adjusted until the volume of the speaker adjusted to the lowest value is –12 dB. 100 Saving Frequently Used Settings (Quick Select Function) Saving the Settings Quick Select 1 Quick Select 2 Quick Select 3 GQuick Select DefaultsH Input Source DVD SAT/CBL VCR Volume –40dB –40dB –40dB Calling the Settings Out The “ ”, “ ” or “ ” indicator lights on the display. n Naming Quick Select settings See “Quick Select Name” (vpage 55). NOTE Input sources stored with the quick select function cannot be selected if they have been deleted at “Source Delete” (vpage 53). In this case, store them again. 2 Press o p to select “Yes”, then press ENTER. The “ ” indicator on the display lights. The input source automatically switches to “NET/USB” and the attendees are automatically selected. 3 Play the desired track. n To Cancel the Party Mode 1 While in the party mode, press [PARTY]. 2 Press o p to select “Yes”, then press ENTER. o p to select “Yes” or “No”, then press 3 Press ENTER. n To Cancel the Party Mode 1 While in the party mode, press [PARTY]. 2 Press o p to select “Yes”, then press ENTER. “Exit Party Mode?” is displayed on the GUI screen. In this case, the other devices remain in the party mode. “Rhapsody”, “Napster” and “USB” are not available in the Party Mode. There can only be one organizer in the network. To form a new party mode, first cancel the current party mode. “Exit Party Mode?” is displayed on the GUI screen. “Power off Attendees component?” is displayed. Yes No Specifications The Quick Select function can be set separately for the different zones (vpage 101 “Quick Select Function”). b An error message is displayed when you are not connected to a network. 2 Press o p to select “Yes”, then press ENTER. Troubleshooting Press QUICK SELECT at which the settings you want to call out are saved. “Enter Party Mode?” is displayed. b An error message is displayed when you are not connected to a network. Remote Control Information The current settings will be memorized. 1 Press [PARTY] to become the organizer. “Enter Party Mode?” is displayed. Multi-zone 2 Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT until “Memory” appears on the display. Starting the Party Mode as the Organizer 1 Press [PARTY]. Playback q Input Source (vpage 31) w Volume Level (vpage 85) e Surround Mode (vpage 87) rAudyssey Setting (MultEQ® XT, Dynamic EQ™, Dynamic Volume™) (vpage 92, 93) t Video Select (vpage 60) • When the organizer starts the party mode, up to four attendees are selected automatically. No operation is required. • When a device becomes an attendee, “ ” appears on the display. The input source automatically switches to “NET/USB” and the same network audio as on the organizer is played. • If there are fewer than four attendees, a device can join the party mode after it has started. To participate in the party mode, perform the operation described below. Settings 1 Set the items below to the settings you want to save. The same network audio (Internet Radio, Media Server or iPod DIRECT) can be played on multiple DENON products equipped with the Party Mode function and connected in a network. The party mode consists of one organizer and up to four attendees. When one unit starts the party mode as the organizer, up to four devices on which the party mode function is activated automatically participate in the party as attendees. “Party Mode Function” (vpage 50) must be set to “ON” ahead of time in order to use the party mode function. Participating in the Party Mode as an Attendee Connections All of the settings in step 1 can be memorized together. By memorizing frequently used settings, you can quickly access and enjoy a playback environment that is consistently the same. Playing the Same Network Audio on Different Devices Connected in a Network (Party Mode Function) Getting Started Convenient Functions : The power of the attendees is turned off and the party mode is canceled. : The party mode is canceled without turning off the power of the attendees. 101 Getting Started Convenient Functions Operating a Wireless LAN-Compatible Mobile Terminal to Play Music and Still Pictures Playing Contents on a Mobile Terminal Device Wireless LANcompatible router AVR-4810CI Connections • Perform this procedure using a wireless LAN-compatible mobile terminal conforming to the DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) standard. • This function allows you to play contents located on a computer (music server) or mobile terminal device connected in a network by operating a mobile terminal device in the same network. • There are two types of operations on the mobile terminal device. e Playback starts. r Operation. Settings Playing Contents on a Computer (Media Server) Wireless LANcompatible router AVR-4810CI Playback Computer (Media server) Streaming Streaming Multi-zone Remote Control Information e Playback starts. r Operation. Mobile terminal device q Select a content. Mobile terminal device q Select a content. w Select a player. 1 Select the contents you want to play from among the mobile terminal devices. the mobile terminal device, select the AVR-4810CI among the products in the 2 From network. w Select a player. Troubleshooting the mobile terminal device, browse the media server in the same network and 1 From choose the contents you want to play. the mobile terminal device, select the AVR-4810CI among the products in the 2 From network. Playback of the contents selected in step 1 begins. b When selecting the AVR-4810CI from the mobile terminal device, the name of the AVR-4810CI is displayed at “Friendly Name” (vpage 50 “Friendly Name Edit”). b The following operations are possible from the mobile terminal device: • File operations (play, stop, pause, track search) • Play mode settings (repeat/random) • Volume adjustment Playback of the contents selected in step 1 begins. Specifications b When selecting the AVR-4810CI from the mobile terminal device, the name of the AVR-4810CI is displayed at “Friendly Name” (vpage 50 “Friendly Name Edit”). b The following operations are possible from the mobile terminal device: • File operations (play, stop, pause, track search) • Play mode settings (repeat/random) • Volume adjustment •“ ” is displayed on the GUI screen while the mobile terminal device is being operated. • For the various settings and operating procedures, see the operating instructions of the mobile terminal devices being used. • When selecting the AVR-4810CI from the mobile terminal device, the name of the AVR-4810CI is displayed at “Friendly Name”. “Friendly Name” can be edited at “Friendly Name Edit” (vpage 50) as desired so that it is easily distinguishable from other devices. • When playback is started from the mobile terminal device, the AVR-4810CI’s input source automatically switches to “NET/USB”. Also, when the “Network Standby” setting (vpage 50) is set to “ON”, the power automatically turns on. NOTE 102 When operations related to browsing or playback (play, stop, pause, track search) are performed on the AVR-4810CI while operating the mobile terminal device, the connection to the network is disconnected. The network connection is also disconnected when the party mode is started. Operating the AVR-4810CI with a Browser (Web Control Function) the top menu is displayed, click on the menu 4 When 5 Operate. you want to operate. GExample 1H Main zone control screen NETWORK INFO z6 z3 DENON:[AVR-4810CI] Wired DHCP IP Address Mac Address ON z7 Playback Friendly Name Network z5 z4 Checking the IP address. Return the AVR-4810CI IP address in browser’s 3 Enter address box. For example, if the IP address of AVR-4810CI is “192.168.100.33”, enter “http://192.168.100.33”. z9 z8 Troubleshooting z6: Click to perform each operation. Changes to each operation screen (vGExample 5H) z7: Click when you update to the latest information. Normally, there is a change to the latest information each time you operate. When operated from the main unit, click because the screen is not updated. z8: Click to return to the top menu. Displayed when setting “Top Menu Link Setup” to “ON” in GExample 3H z9: Click to add a setting to the “Favorites” in your browser. We recommend registering the setting screens for the different zones in the browser’s favorites so as not to accidentally perform menu operations for zones you do not intend to operate. Remote Control Information RETURN z2: Click when you operate each zone (vGExample 1H) z3: Click when you operate the setup menu (vGExample 2H) z4: Click to change the Web control screen setting. (vGExample 3H) z5: Click when you operate a small screen such as a PDA screen, etc. (vGExample 4H) Multi-zone 192.168.100.33 0005cd004023 z1 z2 Settings “ON” the “Network Standby” setting 1 Switch (vpage 50). the AVR-4810CI’s IP address with “Network 2 Check Information” (vpage 51). Connections You can operate the AVR-4810CI using a browser. Getting Started Convenient Functions Specifications z1: Entering the IP address. See overleaf 103 Getting Started Convenient Functions GExample 2H Setup menu screen z10 GExample 4H PDA menu screen GExample 6H Dedicated iPod Touch screen b When accessed from the iPod Touch browser, an optimized operation screen is displayed. z12 Connections z13 z18 z18: Select to operate each zone. Settings z11 NOTE Playback You cannot change setup menu operations and zone name on the PDA menu screen. z14 GExample 5H Net Audio operating screen Multi-zone z15 Remote Control Information z10: Click the menu from which you want to make settings. The display on the right becomes each setting screen. z11: Click “SAVE” when you want to save settings, and click “LOAD” when you want to call settings. Becomes each operation screen. z12: Click “v” and select from the displayed items. z13: Click to determine a setting. z14: After entering characters, click “Set” to set, or click “Def” to return to initial setting. z15: Enter figures or click “<” or “>” to make the setting, and then click “Set”. GExample 3H Web configuration screen Troubleshooting z16 z17 Specifications z16: Click “ON” when performing Top Menu Link Setup. When set up, return to the top menu from each operation screen. (Default setting : “OFF”) z17: Click to return to the top menu. 104 z19 z20 z21 Various Memory Functions z22 z23 z24 z26 Personal Memory Plus Function This function sets the settings (input mode, surround mode, MultEQ XT, Dynamic EQ, Dynamic Volume, audio delay etc.) last selected for the individual input sources. z25 Last Function Memory z19: Click the menu from which you want to make settings. z20: Click “v” to select the preset channel you want to play. z21: Click to stop play. z22: When registering presets, click “v” to select the channel you want to register, and then click “MEMORY”. z23: When searching using an acronym, click “v” and select from the displayed characters. z24: Click when selecting menu. z25: Click to repeat play. z26: Click to random play. This stores the settings as they were directly before the standby mode was set. When the power is turned back on, the settings are restored to as they were directly before the standby mode was set. This function allows you to play sound in rooms other than the main zone where multi-channel sound is played. Audio Connections (ZONE2, ZONE3) The audio signals of the AVR-4810CI’s ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output terminals are output to the ZONE2 and ZONE3 amplifiers and played on these amplifiers. ZONE2 MAIN ZONE AVR-4810CI 48 '- '3 $ Playback MAIN ZONE AVR-4810CI L "69*/ R 43 4- ZONE3 q Zone Playback by Speaker Output L R "69*/ Connecting and Setting the Speakers “Amp Assign” mode setting (vpage 34) and the audio signals that are output Connecting the speakers NOTE w qw q Output signal : Stereo (L / R) bMono signals are outputted when “Amp ZONE2 Assign” – “Assign and Mode” is set to “FREE” ZONE3 and the signal assigned to the power amp is set to “Z2/Z3 (M)”. w qw q ZONE2 ZONE3 w w q MAIN ZONE q AVR-4810CI ;0/& $0.10/&/5 7*%&0 7*%&0 Specifications ZONE3 ZONE3 ZONE3 The video signals of the AVR-4810CI’s ZONE2 video output terminal are played by the ZONE2 monitor. Troubleshooting ZONE2 Output signal : Stereo (L / R) Video Connection • We recommend using high quality pin-plug cables for audio connections in order to prevent noise. • When the input source to which the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) are assigned is selected in ZONE2 or ZONE3, playback is only possible if the digital signal being input is in PCM (2-channel) format. • It is not possible to play the digital audio signals input from the HDMI or DENON LINK terminals in ZONE2 and ZONE3. • When certain digital signals are being input, noise may be output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors. • In ZONE4, it is not possible to select “XM”, “HD Radio”, or sources with no digital input signals (“TUNER”, “PHONO”, “iPod”, etc.). ZONE2 ZONE2 Also be sure to read the operating instructions of the connected devices. Video Output */ $0.10/&/5 7*%&0 Remote Control Information The ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio signals are output from the AVR4810CI’s SURR BACK/AMP ASSIGN speaker terminals using the amplifier assignment function. Multi-zone There are two methods to do this, as described below. Choose one of the methods. q Zone playback by speaker output w Zone playback by audio output (PRE OUT / OPT OUT) Use an external amplifier. ZONE4 Settings Audio Output • Connect audio from the ZONE4 OPTICAL OUT terminal on the AVR4810CI to the ZONE4 amp. • Use bitstream compatible amps in ZONE4. Connections The source selected for ZONE2 is also output from the recording output connectors. Digital Audio Connections (ZONE4) w Zone Playback by Audio Output (PRE OUT / OPT OUT) Getting Started Playing in ZONE2/ZONE3/ZONE4 (Multi-zone Function) 7*%&0 NOTE It is not possible to output video signals input to the HDMI to ZONE2. 105 Getting Started Playback Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Connections Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit Button only on the main unit Button only on the remote control unit The operating procedure is the same for “q Zone Playback by Speaker Output” and “w Zone Playback by Audio Output (PRE OUT)”. BUTTON <BUTTON> [BUTTON] 1 Turn on the AVR-4810CI’s power. 2 Turn on the zone power. 4 Adjust the item below. (vpage 28 “Turning the Power On“) <ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT> <MASTER VOLUME> <SOURCE SELECT> uio p n Adjust the Volume Operation on the main unit qP ress Settings Operation on the main unit <ZONE2 ON/OFF>, <ZONE3 ON/ OFF> or <ZONE4 ON/OFF> for the zone to Press Playback be operated. When the power turns on, the “ ”, “ or “ ” indicator lights on the display. ” Multi-zone Operation on the remote control unit [MAIN] to display the mode for the zone to be operated, the press [ZONE ON]. <ZONE4 ON/OFF> <ZONE2 ON/OFF> <ZONE3 ON/OFF> Press Remote Control Information [ [ MAIN] Troubleshooting [SLEEP] [MENU] uio p MAIN] [QUICK SELECT] [QUICK SELECT] [ZONE ON] [SLEEP] [ZONE ON] [MAIN ZONE ON] [MAIN ZONE OFF] ” b Also press [INPUT SOURCE SELECT] when in standby mode, the power turns on. b When using ZONE2, ZONE3 or ZONE4, it is possible to turn the power for the MAIN ZONE only on or off by pressing [MAIN ZONE ON] or [MAIN ZONE OFF]. 3 Select the input source. Operation on the main unit [ MAIN] [VOLUME] Specifications [MUTE] When the power turns on, the “ ”, “ or “ ” indicator lights on the display. qP ress <ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT> and select the zone to be adjusted. wT urn <SOURCE SELECT> to choose the input source. [INPUT SOURCE SELECT] [ZONE ON] Operation on the remote control unit In the zone mode you want to operate, press [INPUT SOURCE SELECT]. b The same input source as in the main zone can be selected easily by pressing the [M.ZONE CALL] on the sub remote control unit. [M. ZONE CALL] 106 Sub remote control unit <ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT> and select the zone to be adjusted. wT urn <MASTER VOLUME> to adjust. Operation on the remote control unit In the zone mode whose volume you want to adjust, press [VOLUME]. GAdjustable rangeH ––– –80dB ~ –40dB ~ 18dB (When the “Volume Display” setting is “Relative”) GAdjustable rangeH 0 ~ 41 ~ 99 (When the “Volume Display” setting is “Absolute”) b Upon purchase, “Volume Limit” is set to “10dB (71)”. n Turning off the Sound Temporarily (MUTE) In the zone mode for which you want to mute the sound, press [MUTE]. The sound is reduced to the level set at menu “Mute Level” (vpage 53). b To cancel, either adjust the volume or press [MUTE] again. b The setting is canceled when the zone’s power is turned off. b The volume can be adjusted in ZONE2 and ZONE3. Quick Select Function The settings related to tone adjustment and volume can be made. Sleep Timer Function It is also possible to save three settings for multi-zone. The ZONE2 or ZONE3 menu is displayed on the ZONE2 monitor. MENU ZONE2 MENU ZONE2 0dB 0dB OFF 0dB 0dB STEREO Relative - VAR -10dB LAST FULL For ZONE2, the “Zone Setup” can be made while watching the onscreen display. Also, when ZONE3 is operated, the on-screen display appears on the ZONE2 monitor, so operation can be performed watching this onscreen display. OFF 120 min 30 min Volume –40dB –40dB –40dB –40dB Calling the Settings Out 90 min 60 min n To cancel the sleep timer Press [SLEEP] to set “OFF”. The sleep timer is also canceled when the AVR-4810CI is set to the standby mode or the ZONE2 or ZONE3 power is turned off. Press [QUICK SELECT] at which the settings you want to call out are saved. n Naming Quick Select settings See “Quick Select Name” (vpage 55). Remote Control Information The on-screen display disappears. GQuick Select DefaultsH Input Source Z2/Z3/Z4 Quick Select 1 DVD Z2/Z3/Z4 Quick Select 2 SAT/CBL Z2/Z3 Quick Select 3 VCR Z4 Quick Select 3 DVR The time switches as shown below each time [SLEEP] is pressed. Multi-zone 2 3 Press [MENU] to enter the setting. Press uio p to select the menu to be set or operated. The current settings will be memorized. [MAIN] to display the mode for the zone to be 1 Press operated. 2 Press [SLEEP] and display the time you want to set. Playback >Bass Treble HPF Lch Lev. Rch Lev. >Channel Vol.Disp Vol.Lev. Vol.Limit P.On Lev. Mute Lev. 2 In the zone mode for which you want to operate, press and hold the desired [QUICK SELECT] until “Memory” appears on the on-screen display or display. Settings INPUT :SAT/CBL SIGNAL:ANALOG VOL. :-40dB qInput Source (vpage 106) wVolume Level (vpage 106) (except for ZONE4) Connections zone mode for which you want to operate, 1 Inpressthe[MENU] . 1 Set the items below to the settings you want to save. This is useful when you want to sleep while listening in ZONE2 or ZONE3. In ZONE4, the power switches off by interfacing with the MAIN ZONE sleep timer settings. Getting Started Menu Operation Troubleshooting • In ZONE4, only input sources to which XM, HD Radio, NET/USB and digital input have been assigned can be selected. • Use the sub remote control when performing Quick Select memory or call-up in ZONE4. Specifications 107 Getting Started Operating the Connected Devices by Remote Control Unit Connections Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Settings • On the main remote control unit, the display switches according to the device being operated and the mode. • In the “MAIN”, “TUNER”, “SAT TU”, “DTU”, “iPod” and “NET/USB” modes, when the remote ID is set, the AVR-4810CI can be used independently even in an environment containing multiple DENON amplifiers. (vpage 112 “Setting the Remote ID”) Playback Multi-zone Remote Control Information [POWER ON] [POWER OFF] [MASTER VOLUME] [MUTE] Troubleshooting [0 ~ 9] 1 Press [DEVICE SELECTOR] for the component to be operated. b The mode switches each time [MAIN] is pressed. GMAIN modeH GZONE2 modeH GZONE3 modeH The indicator for the component to be operated flashes. : MAIN / ZONE2 / ZONE3 / ZONE4 / MACRO : TUNER (FM/AM). : XM / SIRIUS Signal transmission indicator [DEVICE SELECTOR] [ MAIN] [QUICK SELECT] Operating AV Equipment : HD Radio (Digital Tuner) [ SAT/CBL] [ DVD/HDP] : Satellite Receiver / Cable Tuner / IPTV / HDTV (Set Top Box) [ VCR/DVR] [ TV] : iPod GMACRO modeH GZONE4 modeH : Network / USB : Blu-ray Disc Player / HD DVD Player / DVD Player (Recorder) / CD Player (Recorder) : Digital Video Recorder : TV 2 Operate the component. b For details, refer to the component’s operating instructions. [RC SETUP] Specifications • In ZONE2, ZONE3 and ZONE4 modes, you can switch the MAIN ZONE power on or off by pressing [POWER ON] or [POWER OFF]. • [QUICK SELECT], [MUTE] and [MASTER VOLUME] can also be operated when the device selected is something other than [MAIN]. In this case, the zone you used last can be operated. Check using the zone indicator. 108 Presetting The included main remote control unit can be preset to operate devices of various brands. CD Player / CD Recorder Operating Preset Components EL Display Device select button The mode indicator of the device to be operated flashes. EL Display Device select button • Some brands have more than one preset code. If the component does not operate, try inputting a different code. • Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your equipment, some buttons may not operate. In such cases we recommend using the learning function. (vpage 113 “Learning Function”) ( RPT Repeat RND Random SKIP+ Disc Skip (For charger-compatible devices) 89 Auto search (cue) SKIP+ Disc Skip (For charger-compatible devices) 89 Auto search (cue) 1 Playback 67 Manual search (fast-reverse/fast-forward) 3 Pause 2 Stop ON Power on z2 Power offz2 OFF Buttons MENU/ SEARCH Amp menu uio p Amp cursor ENTER Amp enter SETUP/RSTR RESTORER Playback 67 Manual search (fast-reverse/fast-forward) 3 Still/Pause RTN Amp return 2 Stop 0 ~ 9, +10 Track Selection ON Power on z2 Power offz2 Buttons (Popup) Menu uio p Cursor ENTER Enter SETUP/RSTR Setup RTN Return CH +, – Switch channels (up/down) 0 ~ 9, +10 Select title or chapter or channel selection z1: P reset registration is also possible for the Device Select buttons in ( ). z2: T his may power some devices ON/OFF. Specifications MENU/ SEARCH Buttons Troubleshooting 1 OFF Buttons Repeat Random Remote Control Information b The input mode is canceled if no button is operated for 10 seconds. )z1 RPT RND Multi-zone When the code is registered, the signal transmission indicator flashes twice. When the preset code is transmitted, the mode indicator for the component to which that code belongs flashes. EL Display )z1 Playback are shown in the Preset Code Table (vEnd of this manual). b For details, refer to the component’s operating instructions. ( Settings [DVD/HDP], [VCR/DVR], [TV] or [SAT/CABLE] 1 Press for the device you want to preset. Operate the component. 2 2 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. [0 ~ 9] and input the 5-digit number of the Blu-ray Disc Player / HD DVD Player / DVD Player / 3 Press brand of the component to be preset. The numbers DVD Recorder The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. EL Display Connections 1 Press [DEVICE SELECTOR] for the component to be operated. Getting Started Operating the Main Remote Control Unit z1: Preset registration is also possible for the Device Select buttons in ( ). z2: This may power some devices ON/OFF. 109 Getting Started Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Digital Video Recorder / Video cassette Recorder / Cassette Deck TV EL Display Connections EL Display EL Display Device select button ( )z1 EL Display ( EL Display Device select button )z1 ( )z1 Settings Playback 89 Auto search (cue) 89 1 Playback 1 Playback 67 Manual search (fast-reverse/fast-forward) 67 Manual search (fast-reverse/fast-forward) 3 Still/Pause 3 Still/Pause 2 Stop 2 Stop ON Power on z2 ON OFF Power off z2 OFF Power on z2 Power off z2 Multi-zone 89 Auto search (cue) 1 Playback 67 Manual search (fast-reverse/fast-forward) 3 Still/Pause 2 Stop ON Power on z2 OFF Power offz2 Buttons Auto search (cue) Buttons Remote Control Information MENU/ SEARCH Menu/guide MENU/ SEARCH Menu Cursor MENU/ SEARCH Menu/guide uio p Cursor uio p uio p Cursor ENTER Enter ENTER Enter ENTER Enter SETUP/RSTR RESTORER SETUP/RSTR Guide RTN Return RTN Return CH +, – Switch channels (up/down) 0 ~ 9, +10 Channel Selection SETUP/RSTR Setup RTN Return CH +, – Switch channels (up/down) CH +, – Switch channels (up/down) MUTE TV mute 1~9 Channel Selection VOL +, – TV Volume +, – 1~9 Channel Selection Troubleshooting z1: Preset registration is also possible for the Device Select buttons in ( ). z2: This may power some devices ON/OFF. Specifications 110 EL Display Device select button Buttons Buttons Set top box for Satellite / Cable / IP TV / HD TV Buttons TV INPUT TV inputs z1: Preset registration is also possible for the Device Select buttons in ( ). z2: This may power some devices ON/OFF. Buttons z1: P reset registration is also possible for the Device Select buttons in ( ). z2: T his may power some devices ON/OFF. iPod EL Display XM / SIRIUS EL Display EL Display RND 1-track/album shuffle play 89 Auto search (cue) 1 Playback 67 Manual search (fast-reverse/fast-forward) 3 Still/Pause 2 Stop Page search mode (Press and hold) Browse / Remote mode switching uio p Cursor / Manual Search (ui) ENTER Enter SETUP/RSTR RESTORER RTN Return TU df Channel selection TU df Tuning +/– MEMO Preset memory registration BAND AM/FM switching Preset memory block selection Buttons MODE Switch search modes MENU/ SEARCH Direct search MEMO Preset memory registration uio p Category search ENTER (press and hold) To parental lock password check screen (SIRIUS) MENU/ SEARCH Direct Frequency tuning uio p Multi cast switching (ui)z SETUP/RSTR RESTORER CH +/– Preset channel selection 0~9 Preset channel selection (1 ~ 8) / Direct channel search (0 ~ 9) Buttons SETUP/RSTR RESTORER CH +/– Preset channel selection 0~9 Preset channel selection (1 ~ 8) / Direct frequency tuning (0 ~ 9) Remote Control Information Buttons MENU/ SEARCH (Press and release) Preset memory block selection Device select button A~G Multi-zone Buttons EL Display Playback 1-track/All-track repeat play EL Display Settings RPT EL Display Device select button A~G z: H D Radio only Buttons Connections Device select button HD Radio / Tuner (FM/AM) Getting Started Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Buttons Troubleshooting Specifications 111 Getting Started Operating the Main Remote Control Unit EL Display Signal transmission indicator Device select button [DEVICE SELECTOR] NET/USB EL Display Connections A~G Preset memory block selection Settings TU df Switching picture MODE Direct play (Rhapsody) MEMO Preset memory registration Buttons Playback Multi-zone Remote Control Information MENU/ SEARCH Page Search / Character Search uio p Cursor ENTER Enter SETUP/RSTR RESTORER CH +/– Preset channel selection 1~8 Preset channel selection (1 ~ 8) [ [ [ TUNER] SAT TU] [ DTU] NET/USB] [ iPod] [ MAIN] [POWER ON] [POWER OFF] [SOURCE SELECT] [MASTER VOLUME] [MUTE] [0 ~ 9] [RC SETUP] Setting the Remote ID When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same room, make this setting so that only the desired AV receiver operates. 1 Press [MAIN] to light the “MAIN” zone indicator. 2 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. to the table at the right, and use [0 ~ 9] to input 3 Refer the 5-digit number corresponding to the remote ID The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. to be changed. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. [SAT TU], [TUNER], [iPod], [DTU] or [NET/USB] 4 Press to select the mode to be set. steps 2 to 4 to set the remote IDs for all 5 Repeat modes. DEVICE SELECTOR Buttons Signal transmission indicator [DEVICE SELECTOR] MAIN SAT TU (SIRIUS, TUNER XM) iPod DTU NET/ USB Remote ID Troubleshooting 1 (Default) 81001 52415 62863 72815 62840 62865 2 82001 52416 62275 72816 62841 62837 3 83001 52417 62276 72817 62842 62838 4 84001 52418 62277 72818 62843 62839 NOTE Specifications • When changing a setting, be sure to set the same remote ID as the AVR-4810CI’s (vpage 55). • When changing the MAIN mode’s remote ID, also change the “SAT TU”, “DTU” “iPod”, and “NET/USB” remote ID at the same time. [0 ~ 9] [RC SETUP] 112 Learning Function The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. Multi-zone [DEVICE SELECTOR] for the device you want 3 Press to set 4 Press the button to be set. learned. • Do not learn any remote control signals at [RC SETUP]. • The MAIN, ZONE2, ZONE3, ZONE4 and MACRO modes cannot be learned. • Codes cannot be learned at [MASTER VOLUME] or [MUTE] when the main remote control unit is set to “TUNER”, “SAT TU”, “DTU”, “NET/USB” or “iPod”. Playback The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the learning mode is set. NOTE • [POWER ON], [POWER OFF] and [SOURCE SELECT] cannot be Settings 1 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. 2 Press [9], [7] and [5], in that order. • With some remote control units, the signals cannot be learned or the device will not operate properly even when the signals have been learned. In this case, use the device’s own remote control unit. • Learned buttons have priority over the preset memory. If you no longer need the learned setting, reset the learning function (vpage 116). Connections If your AV devices are of a brand other than DENON or if they cannot be operated with the preset memory function, their remote control signals can be transfered to stored in the AVR-4810CI’s main remote control unit. Getting Started Operating the Main Remote Control Unit The main remote control unit’s display turns off. Remote Control Information b If a button that cannot be learned is pressed, the signal transmission indicator lights but the signal is not learned. the main remote control units directly at each 5 Point other and press and hold the button on the other device’s remote control unit that you want to learn. Once learning is completed normally, the display lights and the signal transmission indicator flashes twice. Troubleshooting Specifications b If you want to learn other buttons, repeat steps 4 and 5. b The mode can be switched by pressing [DEVICE SELECTOR]. b The signal transmission indicator lights once for a long time if learning was not possible 6 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting is completed. 113 Getting Started Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Signal transmission indicator Connections [DEVICE SELECTOR] [ MAIN] Settings [8], [1], [9], [6], [3], [7], [2] MACRO Function [ SAT/CBL] [ DVD/HDP] [ VCR/DVR] [ TV] [POWER ON] This function lets you register a series of operations at a single button. For example, the amplifier can be turned on, the input source selected, the monitor’s power turned on, the source device’s power turned on and the play mode set all by pressing a single button. Up to 32 signals each can be registered at [MACRO] (1 ~ 3). 1 Press [MAIN], to select “MACRO”. [MACRO] (1 ~ 3) at which the signals were 2 Press registered. The registered signals are transmitted in the registered sequence. Registering 1 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. 2 Press [9], [7] and [8], in that order. Playback The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. Multi-zone The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the system call registration mode is set. [CHANNEL +, –] Calling out Punch Through Function DVD/HDP (including BD and CD) or VCR/DVR mode buttons can be stored at unused TV or SAT/CBL mode buttons. For example, when DVD mode buttons are assigned to the TV mode, the DVD mode operations can be performed while in the TV mode. Remote Control Information [MACRO] (1 ~ 3) at which you want to register 3 Press the signals. 1 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. Press the buttons you want to register in the same 4 sequence as the operations you want to perform. 2 Press [9], [8] and [4], in that order. [0 ~ 9] The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. [RC SETUP] Signal transmission indicator Troubleshooting [DEVICE SELECTOR] [MACRO] The signal transmission indicator lights when a button is pressed. Example : Press [POWER ON]. ↓ Press [DEVICE SELECTOR] – [DVD/HDP]. ↓ Press [1]. b The mode can be switched by pressing [DEVICE SELECTOR]. b Perform the registration procedure for all the buttons you want to register. 5 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting is completed. Specifications NOTE Registration is not possible in ZONE2, ZONE3, ZONE4 and MACRO modes. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the punch through setting mode is set. [DEVICE SELECTOR] for the device you want to 3 Press punch through ([DVD/HDP] or [VCR/DVR]). the button you want to punch through ([1], 4 Press [2], [6], [7], [8], [9] or [3]). Each time the button is pressed, the signal transmission indicator flashes once. [DEVICE SELECTOR] for the device you want to 5 Press punch through ( [TV] or [SAT/CBL]). 6 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting is completed. NOTE [0 ~ 9] [RC SETUP] 114 The Punch Through function can only be registered for either TV or SAT/CBL. DVD/HDP punch through may be automatically assigned, depending on the equipment that has been preset to TV and SAT/ CBL. Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the backlight on time setting mode is set. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. Playback The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the backlight on time setting mode is set. Multi-zone [Settable times] : [1] : 5 sec. [2] : 10 sec. (Default) [3] : 15 sec. [4] : 20 sec. [5] : 25 sec. 1 Press [MAIN] to light the “MAIN” zone indicator. 2 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. 3 Press [9], [9] and [9], in that order. Settings 3 Set the light on time. When the [MAIN] Device Select button is pressed, only the set zone can be operated with the main remote control unit. Connections 1 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. 2 Press [9], [7] and [3], in that order. Specifying the Zone Used with the Main Remote Control Unit 4 Press [1 ~ 4] to set. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. The display’s brightness can be adjusted in 5 steps. (Default: Step 5) 1 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. 2 Press [CHANNEL +] or [CHANNEL –]. [Settable items] [1] : When only using “MAIN” / “MACRO” [2] : When using “MAIN” / “Z2” / “MACRO” [3] : When using “MAIN” / “Z2” / “Z3” / “MACRO” [4] : When using “MAIN” / “Z2” / “Z3” / “Z4” / “MACRO” (Default) Remote Control Information Adjusting the Backlight’s Brightness Getting Started Operating the Main Remote Control Unit The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. Troubleshooting The display gets one step brighter when [CHANNEL +] is pressed. The display gets one step darker when [CHANNEL –] is pressed. 3 Press [RC SETUP] to complete the setting. Specifications 115 Getting Started Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Signal transmission indicator Resetting the Main Remote Control Unit Connections [DEVICE SELECTOR] Learning Function n Resetting Button by Button 1 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. 2 Press [9], [7] and [6], in that order. 3 Press the button you want to reset twice. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. Settings The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. Playback The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. Multi-zone n Resetting by Device Mode [0 ~ 9] Remote Control Information [RC SETUP] 1 2 Press [9], [7] and [6], in that order. [DEVICE SELECTOR] for the device you want to 3 Press reset twice. Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. Signal transmission indicator Troubleshooting [DEVICE SELECTOR] [MACRO] The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. MACRO Function 1 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. 2 Press [9], [7] and [8], in that order. 3 Press [MACRO] (1 ~ 3) you want to reset. 4 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. Punch-Through Function 1 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. 2 Press [9], [8] and [4], in that order. 3 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. All Settings 1 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. 2 Press [9], [8] and [1], in that order. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. The signal transmission indicator flashes 4 times. All the settings are restored to their defaults. Specifications [0 ~ 9] [RC SETUP] 116 [ZONE ON] [INPUT SOURCE SELECT] [VOLUME +, –] [MEMORY] [ENTER] uio p [RETURN] [ALL MUSIC/ FAVORITES] [USB] Channel selection – – – – – b4 b5 b6 b1: Affects the currently selected zone. b2: In ZONE4, only input sources to which XM, HD Radio, NET/USB and digital input have been assigned can be selected. b3: HD Radio only. b4: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files on the USB memory device are played. b5: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “All Music” on the music server are played. b6: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “Favorites” are played. *: Whether “All Music” or “Favorites” is selected depends on the “Direct Play” setting (vpage 62). Specifications [8, 9], [2], [1/3], [TUNINGdf] [REPEAT] [RANDOM] [M. ZONE CALL] – – Troubleshooting [SHIFT] [CHANNEL +, –] [MUTE] [MENU] [SEARCH] Tuning – Remote Control Information [ZONE SELECT] ENTER SEARCH RETURN 8 9, TUNING d f 2 1/3 REPEAT RANDOM USB ALL MUSIC * (Music server only) FAVORITES * – – – – – – Multi-zone [ADVANCED SETUP] [ZONE OFF] [QUICK SELECT] [INPUT Z4 Playback In ZONE4 mode, only the [ZONE OFF], [ZONE ON] and SOURCE SELECT] buttons can be operated. DTU (HD Radio) / TUNER Z2 Z3 Settings u i o p SAT TU (XM, SIRIUS) Z4 M Z2 Z3 Zone operation mode selection Power turned off (b1) Power turned on (b1) Input source selection (b2) Quick select function Preset channel selection – Preset channel selection Preset channel memory block selection – Preset channel memory block selection – Adjustment of volume (b1) Adjustment of volume (b1) – Muting (b1) Muting (b1) Selected zone menu – Selected zone menu Preset memory registration – Preset memory registration Multicast switching (ui) b3 / – Category search / Cursor Cursor – To Parental Lock password check screen – – M Connections •The sub remote control unit is equipped with frequently used buttons, so it can be used for simple remote control unit operations. •The sub remote control unit can also be used for multi-zone, so you can use it to control the AVR-4810CI from other rooms. •The operations listed below can be performed with the sub remote control unit. •Switching the input source •Adjusting the volume •XM, SIRIUS, HD Radio and iPod operations •NET/USB direct play •GUI menu and ZONE2 on-screen display operations •Zone power on/off •It is not possible to operate devices other than the amplifier. Device operated Zone selection ZONE SELECT ZONE OFF ZONE ON INPUT SOURCE SELECT QUICK SELECT CHANNEL + / – SHIFT VOLUME + / – MUTE MENU MEMORY Getting Started Functions of Buttons by Component Operating the Sub Remote Control Unit DIRECT PLAY button • Playback is possible in the mode selected at GUI menu “Direct Play”. FAVORITES: Playback starts from the first track registered in the favorites. ALL MUSIC: Playback starts from the first track registered in the “All Music” folder. • When [USB] is pressed, playback starts from the first track on the USB memory device. NOTE When the music server is stopped or restarted, it may no longer be possible to play tracks stored in the favorites. 117 Getting Started Operating the Sub Remote Control Unit Connections Settings Playback Device operated Zone selection ZONE SELECT ZONE OFF ZONE ON INPUT SOURCE SELECT CHANNEL + / – SHIFT VOLUME + / – MUTE MENU MEMORY u i o p ENTER Multi-zone SEARCH Remote Control Information RETURN 8 9, TUNING d f 2 1/3 REPEAT RANDOM USB ALL MUSIC * (Music server only) FAVORITES * NET/USB iPod Z4 M Z2 Z3 Zone operation mode selection Power turned off (b1) Power turned on (b1) Input source selection (b2) Preset channel selection – Preset channel memory block selection – – Adjustment of volume (b1) Adjustment of volume (b1) – Muting (b1) Muting (b1) Selected zone menu – Selected zone menu Preset memory registration – Cursor – Cursor / Manual Search (ui) Enter – Enter Page forward screen / Page forward screen / – Browse/Remote mode switching (press Character search and hold) Return – Return M Z2 Z3 Z4 – – – – – – – Stop Play/pause 1-track/All-track repeat play 1-track random play b4 Stop Play/pause 1-track/All-track repeat play 1-track/album shuffle play b4 – – – – b6 b6 Troubleshooting Specifications b1: Affects the currently selected zone. b2: In ZONE4, it is not possible to select “XM”, “HD Radio”, or sources with no digital input signals (“TUNER”, “PHONO”, “iPod”, etc.). Network audio signals (Internet radio, music server, USB) can be played as long as they are not copyright-protected. b4: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files on the USB memory device are played. b4: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “All Music” on the music server are played. b6: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “Favorites” are played. *: Whether “All Music” or “Favorites” is selected depends on the “Direct Play” setting (vpage 62). DIRECT PLAY button • Playback is possible in the mode selected at GUI menu “Direct Play”. FAVORITES: Playback starts from the first track registered in the favorites. ALL MUSIC: Playback starts from the first track registered in the “All Music” folder. • When [USB] is pressed, playback starts from the first track on the USB memory device. NOTE When the music server is stopped or restarted, it may no longer be possible to play tracks stored in the favorites. 118 [M. ZONE CALL] [MENU] – Track search b5 [ZONE SELECT] – Track search b5 [ZONE OFF] [ADVANCED SETUP] [REPEAT] [RANDOM] [ALL MUSIC/ FAVORITES] [USB] Switching Zones Use this procedure to select the zone to be operated by the sub remote control unit. Setting the Zone for Which the Sub Remote Control Unit is Used (ZONE SELECT LOCK Mode) The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights. We recommend always using the sub remote control unit for the same room. When this is done, the unit can be set so that the zone does not switch when buttons are operated. This function is convenient for example when you want to listen to the same song as the one playing in the MAIN ZONE while in a different zone. The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights. 2 Press [M.ZONE CALL] on the sub remote control unit. The multi-zone input source switches to the MAIN ZONE’s input source. To Cancel 1 2 Press [ZONE SELECT]. 3 Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP]. Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP]. The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights. pressing [MENU], press [ADVANCED SETUP] 3 While with the tip of a pen. The multi-zone indicator turns off. NOTE When changing a setting, be sure to set the same remote ID as the AVR-4810CI’s (vpage 55). All the multi-zone indicators light. The multi-zone indicator turns off. Resetting the Settings While pressing [ZONE OFF], press [ADVANCED SETUP] with the tip of a pen. All the multi-zone indicators flash 4 times, then all the settings are restored to their defaults. • This cannot be used for the MAIN ZONE. • When [M.ZONE CALL] is pressed while the multi-zone power is off, the multi-zone power turns on and the input source switches to the MAIN ZONE’s input source. 119 Specifications NOTE The multi-zone indicator turns off. Troubleshooting 1 Press [ZONE SELECT] and set to ZONE2, ZONE3 or ZONE4. 3 Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP]. q To set to 1 : Press [REPEAT]. The “M” indicator flashes. w To set to 2 : Press [RANDOM]. The “Z2” indicator flashes. e To set to 3 : Press [USB]. The “Z3” indicator flashes. r To set to 4 : Press [ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES]. The “Z4” indicator flashes. Remote Control Information Switching the Multi-zone Input Source to the Same Input Source as Used in the MAIN ZONE To set to “MAIN ZONE” : Press [REPEAT]. To set to “ZONE2” : Press [RANDOM]. To set to “ZONE3” : Press [USB]. To set to “ZONE4” : Press [ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES]. 2 Select the remote ID to be set. Multi-zone q w e r The multi-zone indicator corresponding to the currently selected remote ID flashes. Playback The selected multi-zone indicator lights. pressing [MENU], press [ADVANCED SETUP] 1 While with the tip of a pen. Settings All the multi-zone indicators light. The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights. When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same room, make this setting so that no AV receiver other than the desired one operates. Connections 1 Press [ZONE SELECT]. the multi-zone indicator is light, press [ZONE 2 While SELECT] to select the zone to be operated. 1 Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP]. 2 Select the multi-zone to be set. Setting the Remote ID Getting Started Operating the Sub Remote Control Unit Getting Started Other Information Explanation of Terms Connections The AVR-4810CI is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit that lets you play program sources in the surround mode to achieve the same sense of presence as in a movie theater. Settings Dolby Surround Dolby Pro Logic gx Dolby Pro Logic gx is a further improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic g matrix decoding technology. Audio signals recorded in 2-channels are decoded to achieve a natural sound with up to 7.1-channels. There are 3 modes: “Music” suited for playing music, “Cinema” suited for playing movies, and “Game” which is optimized for playing games. DTS Surround DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS, Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to 5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio Playback Multi-zone Remote Control Information Troubleshooting Specifications Dolby Digital Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby Laboratories. A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels (“FL” , “FR” and “C”), 2 surround channels (“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for low frequencies. Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic sound field with a “three-dimensional” feeling (sense of distance, movement and positioning) is achieved. A real, overpowering sense of presence is achieved when playing movie sources in AV rooms as well. Dolby Digital EX is a 6.1-channel surround format proposed by Dolby Laboratories that allows users to enjoy in their homes the “DOLBY DIGITAL SURROUND EX” audio format jointly developed by Dolby Laboratories and Lucas Films. The 6.1 channels of sound, including surround back channels, provide improved sound positioning and expression of space. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound. High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound. This format is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data. Dolby Pro Logic IIz DTS-HD Master Audio Dolby Pro Logic gz introduces a new dimension to Home Entertainment through the addition of a pair of front height channels. Compatible with stereo, 5.1 and 7.1 content, Dolby Pro Logic gz provides enhanced spaciousness, depth and dimension to movies, concert video and video game playback while maintaining the full integrity of the source mix. Dolby Pro Logic gz identifies and decodes spatial cues that occur naturally in all content, directing this information to the front height channels, complementing the performance of left and right surround sound speakers. Content that is encoded with Dolby Pro Logic gz height channel information can be even more revealing, with perceptually discrete height channel information bringing an exciting new dimension to home entertainment. Dolby Pro Logic gz, with front height channels is also an ideal alternative for households that cannot support the placement of back surround speakers of a typical 7.1 channel system but may have bookshelf space available to support the addition of height speakers. DTS-HD Master Audio is DTS, Inc’s lossless audio format compatible with up to 96 kHz/7.1-channels. The lossless audio coding technology faithfully reproduces the sound of the studio master. It is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data. Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers greater flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the playback equipment. Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the sound of the studio master. This format is compatible with a maximum sampling frequency of 96 kHz and up to 7.1-channels, so it is used for applications particularly prioritizing sound quality. Dolby Pro Logic g Dolby Pro Logic g is a matrix decoding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories. Regular music such as that on CDs is encoded into 5-channels to achieve an excellent surround effect. The surround channel signals are converted into stereo and full band signals (with a frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater) to create a “three-dimensional” sound image offering a rich sense of presence for all stereo sources. 120 Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder. DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format inserting a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder. DTS NEO:6™ Surround DTS NEO:6™ is a matrix decoding technology for achieving 6.1channel surround playback with 2-channel sources. It includes “DTS NEO:6 Cinema” suited for playing movies and “DTS NEO:6 Music” suited for playing music. DTS 96/24 DTS Express DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit rates (max. 5.1channels, 24 to 256 kbps). Audyssey Dynamic Volume™ Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog clarity remain the same. Troubleshooting Specifications 121 Remote Control Information This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio Corporation. D&M Holdings Inc. hereby grants the user a non-exclusive, nontransferable, limited license right exercisable to use the NA SURROUND Technology and other US and World Wide Patents Pending technology. “Neural” and “Neural Audio” and “Neural Surround” are trademarks of Neural Audio Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics. Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ XT to provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level. Multi-zone Neural Surround™, a breakthrough in audio technology, will bring the excitement of surround music to more of America’s listening audience. It provides the rich envelopment and discrete image detail of surround sound in a format 100 % compatible with stereo. With superior spectral resolution and channel separation, Neural Surround™ draws the brain’s attention to sonic details in musical instruments, vocals, and ambience that are typically masked by other playback systems. This allows the listener to fully experience the richness and subtleties in recorded performance as never before. As the chosen format for XM Satellite Radio’s new XM HD surround programming, Neural Surround will help deliver more surround music to more listeners than any other broadcast format. XM Satellite Radio will be the first radio company to broadcast surround sound on the radio 24 hours a day and will offer three channels fully dedicated to Neural Surround™ music. This alone will amount to more than 25,000 hours of Neural Surround™ music each year. Audyssey Dynamic EQ™ Playback Neural Surround Audyssey MultEQ XT is a room equalization solution that calibrates any audio system so that it can achieve optimum performance for every listener in a large listening area. Based on several room measurements, MultEQ XT calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both time and frequency response problems in the listening area and also performs a fully automated surround system setup. Realistic reproduction of sound relies on the ability of audio systems to match human hearing performance. Three key requirements are: (i) frequency response; (2) dynamic range; and (3) accurate spatial reproduction. The requirements for frequency response have already been surpassed with sampling rates that exceed human hearing. The dynamic range limits of human perception have also been met with current digital audio systems operating capable of signal to noise ratios that approach 120 dB. Accurate spatial sound rendering, however, has not yet reached the limits of perception as human perception relies on the combination of sounds arriving from many more directions than what 5.1 surround sound systems provide. Audyssey DSX technology was developed to overcome the spatial sound rendering limitations faced by 5.1 surround sound formats. The ITU 5.1 channel standard recommends three front loudspeakers and two rear loudspeakers. The Left (L) and Right (R) front loudspeakers should be placed at ±30° relative to the central listening position. The Center (C) loudspeaker should be at 0° and the surround loudspeakers (SL, SR) should be placed between 100° and 120°. All loudspeakers must be equidistant from the center listening position or compensated with time delay if that is not possible. A separate lowfrequency effects (LFE) channel is used to reproduce additional bass content from the subwoofer. There are certain things that 5.1 surround sound systems do well compared to 2-channel stereo. For example, it is possible to move sounds across the front seamlessly. It is also possible to create ambience behind the listener. But 5.1 channel surround systems do not provide enough channels from which to render the required reflected sound components for a seamless and enveloping soundstage. Unfortunately, the additional two back surround channels in 7.1 systems are not in the right place to provide a significant perceptual improvement. Adding more channels to a surround system is not for special effects. Accurate spatial sound reproduction requires rendering of directional sound cues and non-directional ambient cues. Reflections arriving after the direct sound play a critical role in the perception of soundstage width and depth. To have the most impact, additional surround channels should be used to control the direction, time of arrival, and frequency response of the reflected sound to render an expanded soundstage that reproduces sound with better localization and envelopment than what 5.1 systems provide. Settings Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Audyssey MultEQ® XT Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™ (DSX) Connections DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in 5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization on DVD-Video. Audyssey Getting Started Explanation of Terms Getting Started Explanation of Terms Connections Settings Playback Multi-zone Remote Control Information Research in the perception of auditory source width has shown that there are strong preferences in the direction of reflected sound and the perception of soundstage width and spaciousness. The single most important direction of side-wall reflections is ±60°. DSX provides a pair of Wide channels (LW and RW) at ±60° with appropriate frequency response and perceptual processing to match the requirements of human hearing. In fact, the Wide channels are much more critical in the presentation of a realistic soundstage than then Back Surround channels found in traditional 7.1 systems. A more enveloping 7.1 channel system is one in which Wide speakers are used instead of Back Surround speakers. Adding surround channels behind the listener has a very small impact compared to the increase in envelopment and soundstage width that the front wide channels will provide. After side reflections, the next most important acoustical and perceptual cues come from reflections above the front stage. DSX provides a pair of Height channels (LH and RH) at a ±45° azimuth angle and elevated to a 45° angle in the median plane. In addition to creating new Wide and Height channels, DSX also provides Surround Processing to enhance the envelopment of the Surround and Back Surround channels (if present). DSX Surround Processing processes the standard surround signals in the time and frequency domains to improve the perceived sense of envelopment and blending with the other speakers in the surround system. Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion is a scalable system that can adapt to the practical needs of the user. The first level of surround stage enhancement comes from adding the Wide channels. The second level comes from adding the Height channels. If it is practical to have both Wides and Heights then the surround performance will be further enhanced. DSX automatically reconfigures its processing to optimize surround rendering over any number of available speakers beyond 5.1. Troubleshooting Specifications Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories. U.S. and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ® XT is a registered trademark of Audyssey Laboratories. Audyssey Dynamic EQ™ is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories. Audyssey Dynamic Volume™ is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories. Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™ is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories. 122 HDCD® HDCD® is an encoding/decoding technology that greatly reduces the distortion that occurs upon digital recording while maintaining compatibility with the conventional CD format, thus expanding the dynamic range and achieving a high resolution. Conventional CDs and HDCD compatible CDs are identified automatically to select the optimum digital processing. ®, HDCD®, High Definition Compatible Digital® and Microsoft® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. HDCD system manufactured under license from Microsoft Corporation, Inc. This product is covered by one or more of the following: In the USA: 5,479,168, 5,638,074, 5,640,161, 5,808,574, 5,838,274, 5,854,600, 5,864,311, 5,872,531, and in Australia: 669114. Other patents pending. DENON LINK DENON LINK is a unique digital, balanced transfer type interface developed by DENON. It offers high speed, high quality transfer of digital audio data with low signal loss. It can be used together with DENON AV Amplifier equipped with a special DENON LINK connector using a single cable to enable playback with high sound quality. It allows digital transfer of the 192 kHz/24 bit 2-channel digital signals of DVDAudio discs, PCM multi-channel signals, etc. Full-spec digital transfer of the audio contents of Super Audio CD is possible by connecting a player equipped for DENON LINK 3rd Edition. During processing of DENON LINK, the “ ” indicator of the display lights. DENON LINK 4th uses the clock of the AV amplifier connected by DENON LINK to achieve HDMI signal transfer with little jitter when playing BD. Advanced AL24 Processing Multi channel Equipped with “Advanced AL24 Processing” time axis region information volume expansion In addition to the existing “AL24 Processing Plus” bit expansion technology, DENON has also developed “Advanced AL24 Processing” that dramatically improves information volume in the time axis region using high-speed signal detection and processing technology. In addition to expanding original 16-bit digital data to 24 bits, “Advanced AL24 Processing” uses data interpolation along the time axis or upconverted sampling to achieve natural interpolation without losing the original data. A digital filter is used to further expand adaptability and perform optimum filtering calculations for ringing-free pulse response, pulsive music data and attack sounds. This results in the reproduction of such spatial information as the delicate nuances in the music, the positions of the performers, and the breadth, height, and depth of the concert hall. “Advanced AL24 Processing” is conducted for all channels and modes other than DSD DIRECT. It also operates when the system is 7.1-channel or below. AL24 Processing Plus AL24 Processing for All Channels DENON has further developed its proprietary AL24 Processing, an analog waveform reproduction technology, to support the 192 kHz sampling frequency. AL24 Processing Plus, thoroughly suppresses quantization noise associated with D/A conversion of LPCM signals to reproduce the low-level signals with optimum clarity that will bring out all the delicate nuances of the music. Equipped foe not only front left and right channels but also for the surround left and right, center and subwoofer channels. AL24 Processing Plus operates in a system with 8.1 channels or less when digital (PCM) signals are input and the surround mode is as follows: • PURE DIRECT â—¦MULTI CH PURE DIRECT • DIRECT â—¦MULTI CH DIRECT • STEREO â—¦MULTI CH IN About Networks Windows Media Player Ver.11 • DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of Digital Living Network Alliance. • Some contents may not be compatible with other DLNA CERTIFIED™ products. Windows Media DRM n IEEE 802.11g This is another wireless LAN standard set by the 802 working group that establishes LAN technology standards at the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) of the United States, and is compatible with IEEE 802.11b. It also uses the 2.4 GHz band, but enables communications at a maximum speed of 54 Mbps. The value indicated above is the maximum theoretical value for the wireless LAN standard, and does not indicate the actual data transfer rate. n Infrastructure Communications “Infrastructure Communications” refers to networks using wireless LAN access points. This function can be used to connect to the Internet or a wired LAN via a wireless LAN access point. Wireless LAN access points include wireless broadband routers. n WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, compatible with more secure AES encryption. n WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared Key) This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when a preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point and client. n Passphrase This refers to the code key used for WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK authentication, a WPA authentication method. n TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) This is a network key used for WPA. The encryption algorithm is RC4, the same as for WEP, but the security level is increased by changing the network key used for encryption for each packet. n AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) This is a next generation standard encryption method replacing the current DES and 3DES, and because of its high security it is expected to be applied widely to wireless LANs in the future. It uses the “Rijndael” algorithm developed by two Belgian cryptographers to divide the data into blocks of fixed lengths and encrypt each block. It supports data lengths of 128, 192 and 256 bits and key lengths of 128, 192 and 256 bits as well, offering extremely high encryption security. Troubleshooting Specifications A copyright-protected technology developed by Microsoft. Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for Windows Media contained in this device (WM-DRM) to protect the integrity of their content (Secure Content) so that their intellectual property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated. This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content (WMDRM Software). If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device has been compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure Content Owners) may request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM Software’s right to acquire new licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure Content. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM Software’s ability to play unprotected content. A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC. Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license, also download revocation list onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners. The value indicated above is the maximum theoretical value for the wireless LAN standard, and does not indicate the actual data transfer rate. This is a security standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance. In addition to the conventional SSID (network name) and WEP key (network key), it also uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for stronger security. Remote Control Information DLNA This is one wireless LAN standard set by the 802 working group that establishes LAN technology standards at the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) of the United States. It uses the 2.4 GHz band usable freely without a radio frequency license (ISM band), enabling communications at a maximum speed of 11 Mbps. n WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) Multi-zone This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary. n IEEE 802.11b Playback This is a free online contents server for Internet radio. Note that usage fees are included in upgrade costs. For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site below. vTuner website: http://www.radiodenon.com Wi-Fi Certification assures tested and proven interoperability by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices. This is a standard drawn up by the Wi-Fi Alliance to ease the task of setting up wireless LAN connections and configuring security. There are two methods: push-button and PIN (Personal Identification Number) code. Settings vTuner n Wi-Fi® n WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) Connections This is a media player distributed free of charge by Microsoft Corporation. It can be used to play playlists created with Windows Media Player Ver. 11 as well as files in such formats as WMA, DRM WMA, MP3 and WAV. About Wireless LAN Getting Started Explanation of Terms n Network Names (SSID: Security Set Identifier) When forming wireless LAN networks, groups are formed to prevent interference, data theft, etc. This grouping is done by “SSID” or “Security Set Identifiers”. For further security, a WEP key is set and signal transfer is not possible unless the SSID and WEP key match. n WEP Key (Network Key) This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting data transfer. On the AVR-4810CI, the same WEP key is used for data encryption and decryption, so the same WEP key must be set on both devices in order for communications to be established between them. 123 Getting Started Surround Surround Modes and Parameters Signals and adjustability in the different modes Front L/R Center Surround L/R Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses) Surround Su­b­­­­woofer Back L/R Front Wide L/R Front Height L/R D. COMP DRC z1 LFE z2 AFDM z3 z3 Surround Back Cinema EQ. Mode Room Size Effect Level S A A A A A S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A A A A A A DSD DIRECT S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A DSD MULTI DIRECT S D D D D A A A A S (0 dB) A S A A A A MULTI CH DIRECT S D D D D A A A A S (0 dB) S (ON) S A A A A STEREO S A A A D A A S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A A A A A A EXT. IN S D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A MULTI CH IN S D D D D D (NOTE4) D (NOTE3) A A S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF) A A A WIDE SCREEN S D D D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S S (OFF) A A S (ON, 10) DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz S D D A D A D S (OFF) S (Auto) A A A S (OFF) S (Height) A A DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx S D D D D D (NOTE4) D (NOTE4) S (OFF) S (Auto) A A S S (NOTE1) S (Cinema) A A DOLBY PRO LOGIC g S D D A D D (NOTE4) D (NOTE4) S (OFF) S (Auto) A A S S (NOTE2) S (Cinema) A A DTS NEO:6 S D D D D D (NOTE4) D (NOTE4) S (OFF) S (Auto) A A S S (NOTE1) S (Cinema) A A DOLBY DIGITAL S D D D D D (NOTE4) D (NOTE3) S (OFF) A S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF) A A A DOLBY DIGITAL Plus S D D D D D (NOTE4) D (NOTE3) S (OFF) A S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF) A A A DOLBY TrueHD S D D D D D (NOTE4) D (NOTE3) A S (Auto) S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF) A A A DTS SURROUND S D D D D D (NOTE4) D (NOTE3) S (OFF) A S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF) A A A DTS 96/24 S D D D D D (NOTE4) D (NOTE3) S (OFF) A S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF) A A A DTS-HD S D D D D D (NOTE4) D (NOTE3) S (OFF) A S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF) A A A DTS EXPRESS S D D D D D (NOTE4) D (NOTE3) S (OFF) A S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF) A A A neural S D D D D D (NOTE4) D (NOTE4) A A A A S A A A A MULTI CH STEREO S D D D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A A A A SUPER STADIUM S D D D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A A S (Medium) S (10) ROCK ARENA S D D D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A A S (Medium) S (10) JAZZ CLUB S D D D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A A S (Medium) S (10) CLASSIC CONCERT S D D D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A A S (Medium) S (10) MONO MOVIE S D D D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A A S (Medium) S (10) VIDEO GAME S D D D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A A S (Medium) S (10) MATRIX S D D D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A A A A Specifications VIRTUAL S A A A D A A S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A A A A A A Settings PURE DIRECT, DIRECT (2ch) Dz4 Troubleshooting Connections Surround Mode Channel output Playback Multi-zone Remote Control Information S : Signal / Adjustable A : No signal / Not adjustable D :Turned on or off by speaker configuration setting NOTE1 :This parameter is availabe when the “Mode” is set to “Cinema” (vpage 90). NOTE2 :This parameter is availabe when the “Mode” is set to “Cinema” or “ProLogic” (vpage 90). NOTE3 :This parameter is availabe when the “Front Height” is set to “ON” or “DSX” is set to “ON” (vpage 91, 93). NOTE4 :This parameter is availabe when the “DSX” is set to “ON” (vpage 93). NOTE: z1 :When playing Dolby Digital and DTS signals. z2 :When playing Dolby TrueHD signal. z3 :When playing Dolby Digital, DTS, DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD. z4 :When the “Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE+Main” (vpage 42) only. 124 Signals and adjustability in the different modes Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses) Surround Mode Delay Time Subwoofer EXT. IN only Center Width Center Image Subwoofer Att. Front Height Panorama Dimension Tone Control MultEQ XT Dynamic EQ Dynamic Volume RESTORER DSX Connections NEO:6 MUSIC mode only PRO LOGIC g/gx MUSIC mode only Getting Started Surround A S A A A A A A A A A A A A DSD DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A DSD MULTI DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A MULTI CH DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A STEREO A A A A A A A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S S A EXT. IN A A A A A A A S A A A A A A MULTI CH IN A A S (OFF) A A A A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S A S WIDE SCREEN A A A A A A A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S S A DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz A A S (ON) A A A A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S S A DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S (3) S (3) A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S S A DOLBY PRO LOGIC g A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S (3) S (3) A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S S S DTS NEO:6 A A A A A A S (0.3) A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S S S DOLBY DIGITAL A A S (OFF) A A A A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S A S DOLBY DIGITAL Plus A A S (OFF) A A A A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S A S DOLBY TrueHD A A S (OFF) A A A A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S A S DTS SURROUND A A S (OFF) A A A A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S A S DTS 96/24 A A S (OFF) A A A A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S A S DTS-HD A A S (OFF) A A A A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S A S DTS EXPRESS A A S (OFF) A A A A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S A S neural A A A A A A A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S S S MULTI CH STEREO A A A A A A A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S S A SUPER STADIUM A A A A A A A A S (NOTE5) S (OFF) S S S A ROCK ARENA A A A A A A A A S (NOTE6) S (OFF) S S S A JAZZ CLUB A A A A A A A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S S A CLASSIC CONCERT A A A A A A A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S S A MONO MOVIE A A A A A A A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S S A VIDEO GAME A A A A A A A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S S A MATRIX S (30 ms) A A A A A A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S S A VIRTUAL A A A A A A A A S (OFF) S (OFF) S S S A Settings PURE DIRECT, DIRECT (2ch) Playback Multi-zone Remote Control Information Troubleshooting Specifications S : Signal / Adjustable A : No signal / Not adjustable NOTE5 : BASS +6 dB, TREBLE 0 dB NOTE6 : BASS +6 dB, TREBLE +4 dB 125 Getting Started Surround Differences in Surround Mode Names Depending on the Input Signals Input signals Button DTS-HD Connections Surround Mode Note DTS WMA (Windows LINEAR DTS-HD Media Audio) / DTS-HD DTS ES DTS ES ANALOG PCM / High DTS DTS MP3 / MPEG-4 Master DSCRT MTRX WAV Resolution EXPRESS (5.1ch) AAC / FLAC Audio (With Flag) (With Flag) Audio DOLBY DTS 96/24 DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL TrueHD Plus DOLBY DIGITAL EX (With Flag) MULTI CH PCM DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL EX DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL (With no (5.1/5/4ch) (4/3ch) (2ch) Flag) Super Audio CD PCM (multi ch) PCM (2ch) DSD (multi ch) DSD (2ch) STANDARD DTS SURROUND Settings DTS-HD MSTR DTS ES DSCRT6.1 z1 A A A A A A F D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Playback DTS ES MTRX6.1 z1 A A A A A A A F D A A A A A A A A A A A A A DTS SURROUND A A A A A A S S F A A A A A A A A A A A A DTS 96/24 A A A A A A A A A F A A A A A A A A A A A A A A F A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A DTS-HD HI RES A A A A F A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Multi-zone Remote Control Information DTS (–HD) + PLgx CINEMA z2 A A A S S S S S S S A A A A A A A A A A A DTS (–HD) + PLgx MUSIC z1 A A A S S S S S S S A A A A A A A A A A A DTS (–HD) + PLgz z3 A A A S S S S S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A F A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S S S A S S S A A A A A A A A A A A DTS NEO:6 CINEMA S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S DTS NEO:6 MUSIC S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY TrueHD A A A A A A A A A A F A A A A A A A A A A DOLBY DIGITAL+ A A A A A A A A A A A F A A A A A A A A A DTS EXPRESS DTS (–HD) + NEO:6 z1 DOLBY SURROUND DOLBY DIGITAL EX z1 A A A A A A A A A A A A S S S S A A A A A DOLBY (D+) (HD) +EX z1 A A A A A A A A A A S S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S F F F A A A A A DOLBY DIGITAL Troubleshooting Specifications DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgx CINEMA z2 A A A A A A A A A A S S F D S S S A A A A A DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgx MUSIC z1 A A A A A A A A A A S S S S S S A A A A A DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgz z3 A A A A A A A A A A S S S S S S A A A A A DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz HEIGHT z3 S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx CINEMA z1 S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx MUSIC z1 S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx GAME z1 S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC g CINEMA S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MUSIC S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC g GAME S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A A neural NOTE: z1: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “None” . z2: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None” . z3: This mode is not available when the front height speaker setup is set to “None” . 126 F: D: S: A: Mode selectable in initial status Mode fixed when “AFDM” is “ON” Selectable mode Non-selectable mode Input signals Button DTS-HD Surround Mode Note DTS DOLBY DTS 96/24 DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL TrueHD Plus DOLBY DIGITAL EX (With Flag) MULTI CH PCM DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL EX DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL (With no (5.1/5/4ch) (4/3ch) (2ch) Flag) Super Audio CD PCM (multi ch) PCM (2ch) DSD (multi ch) DSD (2ch) STANDARD MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN A A A A A A A A A A A A A A F A F A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A MULTI IN + PLgx MUSIC z1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A MULTI IN + PLgz z3 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A MULTI IN + DOLBY EX z1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A MULTI CH IN 7.1 z1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A F D (7.1) A A A DIRECT S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S A S A S DSD DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S DSD MULTI DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A MULTI CH DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A DIRECT z2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A M DIRECT + PLgx MUSIC z1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A M DIRECT + DOLBY EX z1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A M DIRECT 7.1 z1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S (7.1) A A A PURE DIRECT S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S A S A S DSD PURE DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S DSD MULTI PURE DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A MULTI CH PURE DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A PURE DIRECT z2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A M PURE D + PLgx MUSIC z1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A M PURE D + DOLBY EX z1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A M CH PURE DIRECT 7.1 z1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S (7.1) A A A F : Mode selectable in initial status S : Selectable mode A : Non-selectable mode Specifications NOTE : z1: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “None” . z2: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None” . z3: This mode is not available when the front height speaker setup is set to “None” . Troubleshooting M PURE D + PLgx CINEMA Remote Control Information M DIRECT + PLgx CINEMA Multi-zone A A Playback A z2 Settings A MULTI IN + PLgx CINEMA Connections WMA (Windows LINEAR DTS-HD Media Audio) / DTS-HD DTS ES DTS ES ANALOG PCM / High DTS DTS MP3 / MPEG-4 Master DSCRT MTRX WAV Resolution EXPRESS (5.1ch) AAC / FLAC Audio (With Flag) (With Flag) Audio Getting Started Surround 127 Getting Started Surround Input signals Button DTS-HD Surround Mode Note DTS DOLBY DTS 96/24 DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL TrueHD Plus DOLBY DIGITAL EX (With Flag) MULTI CH PCM DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL EX DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL (With no (5.1/5/4ch) (4/3ch) (2ch) Flag) Super Audio CD PCM (multi ch) PCM (2ch) DSD (multi ch) DSD (2ch) DSP SIMULATION S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S WIDE SCREEN S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S SUPER STADIUM S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S ROCK ARENA S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S JAZZ CLUB S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S Playback CLASSIC CONCERT S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S MONO MOVIE S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S VIDEO GAME S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S MATRIX S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S VIRTUAL S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S F F F S S S S S S S S S S S S S F S F S F Multi-zone MULTI CH STEREO Settings Connections WMA (Windows LINEAR DTS-HD Media Audio) / DTS-HD DTS ES DTS ES ANALOG PCM / High DTS DTS MP3 / MPEG-4 Master DSCRT MTRX WAV Resolution EXPRESS (5.1ch) AAC / FLAC Audio (With Flag) (With Flag) Audio STEREO STEREO Remote Control Information Troubleshooting Specifications 128 Video Convert VIDEO VIDEO S (VIDEO) S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S (S-VIDEO) A A z2 A S (COMPONENT) A S (VIDEO) A S (COMPONENT) A (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO) A (S-VIDEO) S (COMPONENT) A (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO) A (S-VIDEO) S (COMPONENT) S (COMPONENT) A (VIDEO) S (VIDEO) A (VIDEO) S (COMPONENT) A (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO) A (S-VIDEO) S (COMPONENT) A (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO) A (S-VIDEO) S (COMPONENT) A z2 A (VIDEO) z2 COMPONENT COMPONENT S (COMPONENT) S-VIDEO S-VIDEO A COMPONENT COMPONENT S (COMPONENT) S-VIDEO S-VIDEO A A (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) COMPONENT COMPONENT S (COMPONENT) S (COMPONENT) COMPONENT A S-VIDEO HDMI A COMPONENT A A S-VIDEO HDMI A S-VIDEO VIDEO A z2 A z2 A (VIDEO) z2 A (S-VIDEO) z2 A (S-VIDEO) z2 A (COMPONENT) z2 A VIDEO A VIDEO A VIDEO Only the GUI menu is displayed A VIDEO A VIDEO A VIDEO A VIDEO S() A () A z2 On-screen display VIDEO A (S-VIDEO) z2 : Superimposed on the picture indicated in ( ). : Only the picture in ( ) is output. : Neither the picture nor the GUI menu is output. :Only the GUI menu is displayed when no HDMI monitor is connected or the HDMI monitor’s power is not on. • The main zone video conversion function is compatible with the following formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60. • When SECAM signals of video input are up-converted, the signals are output in PAL format from the S-Video and Video connectors. • The GUI menu display cannot be superimposed when x.v.Color signals, computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) are input. Only the OSD menu is displayed S (VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO) Only the OSD menu is displayed z3 :On-screen display is not displayed. 129 Specifications COMPONENT A (S-VIDEO) z2 S (HDMI) A VIDEO S-VIDEO A z2 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO A S (COMPONENT) A z2 VIDEO A COMPONENT A (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) A S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S (COMPONENT) Troubleshooting S ( ) :Superimposed on the picture indicated in ( ). S (S-VIDEO) A z2 A A A S (VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO) Remote Control Information VIDEO A S A S A S A S S (S-VIDEO) A (COMPONENT) z2 VIDEO A A S (VIDEO) A (COMPONENT) S (VIDEO) VIDEO A S (VIDEO) S (COMPONENT) COMPONENT A COMPONENT S (VIDEO) S (COMPONENT) COMPONENT VIDEO Only the GUI menu is displayed VIDEO A GUI menu displayed COMPONENT S-VIDEO Multi-zone COMPONENT A A A A A A S S ZONE2 MONITOR OUT OUTPUT z3 COMPONENT A A VIDEO A S-VIDEO A S-VIDEO A COMPONENT A COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT S-VIDEO COMPONENT S-VIDEO HDMI VIDEO S : Video signal input present A : No video signal input z1 : When no HDMI monitor is connected or the HDMI monitor’s power is not on INPUT S-VIDEO A A S S A A S S VIDEO A Playback ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF HDMI A Settings ON ON ON VIDEO A S A S A A A S S S S A A A A S S S S A S A S A S A S S A S A S A S A S A S A S A S MAIN ZONE MONITOR OUT Output Signals COMPONENT S-VIDEO A A Connections ON/OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON z1 ON ON ON ON z1 ON ON ON ON z1 ON ON ON HDMI A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S S S S S S S S A A A A A A A S S S S S S S S Input Signals COMPONENT S-VIDEO A A A A A S A S S (1080p) A S (1080i ~ 480p) A S (480i/576i) A S (1080p) A S (1080p) A S (1080i ~ 480p) A S (480i/576i) A S (1080p) S S (1080p) S S (1080i ~ 480p) S S (480i/576i) S S (1080p) S S (1080p) S S (1080i ~ 480p) S S (480i/576i) S A A A A A S A S S A S A S S S S A A A S A S S A S A S S S S A A A A A S A S S A S A S S S S Getting Started Relationship Between Video Signals and Monitor Output Getting Started Troubleshooting Connections If a problem should arise, first check the following: 1. Are the connections correct? 2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner’s manual? 3. Are the other components operating properly? If this unit does not operate properly, check the items listed in the table below. Should the problem persist, there may be a malfunction. In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase. Settings GGeneralH Symptom Cause / Countermeasure Page Playback • Reset the microprocessor. 134 Power does not turn on, or turns off directly after it was turned on. • Check that the power plugs are securely inserted into the AVR4810CI’s AC inlet and the wall power outlet. 28 Remote Control Information No sound is produced • Check the connections to the input devices and the speaker cable 14 ~ 27 from speakers. connections. • Check the connections to the playback devices and select the 17 ~ 27, 31 appropriate input source. • Adjust the master volume to an appropriate level. 85 • Cancel the mute mode. 85 • Disconnect the headphones. No sound is output from the speakers 85 or the PRE OUT terminals when headphones are connected. • Select an input source for which the digital input setting has been 59, 60 made. • Match the terminal to which the digital input terminal is assigned 61 with the input mode. Troubleshooting Multi-zone Set does not operate properly. Display is off. • Set “Dimmer“ to a setting other than “OFF”. • Cancel the PURE DIRECT mode. The display turns off when in the Pure Direct mode. 56 89 “DOLBY DIGITAL” indicator does not appear on display. • Check the Blu-ray Disc player / DVD player’s audio output setting. For details, read the Blu-ray Disc player / DVD player’s operating instructions. – Specifications 130 Cause / Countermeasure Page Power switches off suddenly while you are using the AVR4810CI, the power indicator will flash in red at intervals of approximately 2 seconds. Symptom • The protection circuit will be activated depending upon the temperature rise in the internal parts of the unit. Please switch off power at once, and re-apply the power after the body temperature has fallen sufficiently. • Please re-install AVR-4810CI in a place having good ventilation. – Power switches off suddenly while you are using the AVR4810CI, the power indicator will flash red at intervals of approximately 0.5 seconds. • Please use speakers which have the specified impedance. • The protection circuit has been activated because the core wires of different speaker cables have touched each other or a core wire has slipped out of the terminal and is touching the AVR4810CI’s rear panel. Unplug the power cord, then after twisting the core wires together tightly again, or effecting termination treatments etc, please reconnect once again. 16 16 Even applying power, the power display flashes red at intervals of approximately 0.5 seconds. • The AVR-4810CI amplifier circuit has failed. Switch off the power and please contact the DENON service adviser. – Cause / Countermeasure Page – GRemote Control UnitH Symptom Set does not work • Batteries are worn. Replace with new batteries. 3 properly when remote • Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about 7 m 3 control unit operated. from the AVR-4810CI and at an angle of within 30°. • Remove the obstacle between the AVR-4810CI and the remote – control unit. • Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the q and 3 w marks. • The set’s remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct 3 sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb light, etc.). Move the set to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light. • Make sure the remote control IDs of the main unit and remote 55, 112, 119 control unit match. If the IDs do not match, “AVAMP z” (z is the main unit’s remote control ID) appears on the AVR-4810CI display when the remote control unit is operated. • Set the remote control unit’s function button properly. 7 GVideoH Symptom Cause / Countermeasure Page 87 ~ 89 No sound is produced • Set the surround mode to a mode for surround playback. from surround speakers. 87 ~ 89 Dolby TrueHD, DTS• Make HDMI connections. HD, Dolby Digital Plus • Set the Blu-ray disc/DVD player’s audio output setting to “Bitaudio is not output. stream”. For details, refer to the Blu-ray disc/DVD player’s operating instructions. • Use a DTS-compatible Blu-ray disc player. 87 ~ 89 – 41 14 100 – 17 – – GControl dock for iPodH Symptom Cause / Countermeasure be • Connect to the terminal to which “iPod dock” was assigned and switch the input source. • Check the iPod connections. • Plug the control dock for iPod’s AC adapter into a power outlet. Communications with the AVR-4810CI are not possible unless the AC adapter is plugged in. Page 31, 60 19 – 60 20 – 53 GHDMIH Cause / Countermeasure Page HDMI audio signals are not output from speakers. • Set “HDMI Audio Out” to “AMP” to output HDMI audio signals from the speakers. 43 No picture appears with HDMI connections. • Check the connection of the HDMI connectors. • Select the input source assigned to the HDMI terminal at “HDMI”. • Connect a monitor that is compatible with copyright protection (HDCP). • Check that the output format (HDMI FORMAT) of the connected player, etc., matches the TV’s compatible input formats. • Depending on the monitor you have connected, the display may not be correct when you set to “Auto (Dual)”. In such a case, set to either “Monitor 1” or “Monitor 2”. 17 31, 59 17, 18 43 43 44 131 Specifications No sound is output • Set “HDMI Audio Out” to ”TV” to output HDMI audio signals from the monitor from the TV. connected with HDMI connections. When performing the • Set “HDMI Control” – “Control” to “OFF”. When you only want following operations to operate the power on/off each device, set “Power Off Control” on a connected to “OFF”. device, AVR-4810CI has the same operations. • Power ON/OFF • Switching audio output devices • Adjust volume • Switch input source 17 Troubleshooting iPod cannot played. DVDs cannot be • This is not a malfunction. Most movie software includes copy copied on a VCR. prevention signals and cannot be copied. GUI is not displayed. • Set “Format” according to the format (NTSC or PAL) of the TV being used. Symptom – 61 be • The REC OUT video terminal does not have a video conversion function, so use a video cable to input video signals, an S-Video cable to input S-Video signals. 89 – Remote Control Information • Set the Blu-ray disc/DVD player’s audio output setting to “Bitstream”. For details, refer to the Blu-ray disc/DVD player’s operating instructions. • Use a DTS-compatible Blu-ray disc player/DVD player. • Set the decode mode to “Auto” or “DTS”. 91 Picture cannot recorded. – Multi-zone DTS sound is not output. 41 Page 17, 18 Playback No sound is produced • Turn on the subwoofer’s power. from subwoofer. • Set the subwoofer to “Yes”. • Check the subwoofer connections. • Increase the subwoofer’s channel level. 40, 41 Cause / Countermeasure • Check the connections of the AVR-4810CI’s video output terminals and the TV’s input terminals. • Make the proper input setting for the input terminals of the TV connected to the AVR-4810CI. • Cancel the PURE DIRECT mode. • High definition (1080i/720p) and progressive (480p/576p) video signals are not down-converted. Set the player to interlace (480i/576i) signals. • Check the “Video Select” setting. Settings No sound is produced • Check that the surround back speaker’s power amplifier from surround back assignment is set to “Normal”. speaker. • Set the surround back speakers to something other than “None”. • Set “Surround Parameter” – “Surround Back” to something other than “OFF”. • Set the surround mode to the surround playback mode. Symptom No picture appears. Connections No sound is produced • When playing monaural audio sources, select a surround mode from center speaker. other than “STANDARD” (Dolby/DTS Surround). Getting Started GAudioH Getting Started GNET/USB / Rhapsody/ NapsterH Connections Settings Playback Multi-zone Remote Control Information Troubleshooting Specifications Symptom Cause / Countermeasure When a USB memory • The set cannot recognize a USB memory device. Check the device is connected, connection. “USB” is not • A USB memory device not conforming to mass storage class or displayed on the GUI MTP standards is connected. Connect a USB memory device menu. conforming to mass storage class or MTP standards. • The set port and the connected port do not match. Connect to the port set at “USB Select”. • A USB memory device that the set cannot recognize is connected. This is not a malfunction. DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. • USB memory device is connected via USB hub. Connect the USB memory device directly to the USB port. Files on a USB • USB memory device is in format other than FAT16 or FAT32. memory device Set the format to FAT16 or FAT32. For details, refer to the USB cannot be played. memory device’s operating instructions. • USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions. When divided into multiple partitions, only files stored in the top partition can be played. • Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record the files in a compatible format. • You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set. The file names are • Characters that cannot be displayed are used. This is not a not displayed properly malfunction. On this set, characters that cannot be displayed are (“...”, etc.). replaced with a “ . (period)”. Internet radio cannot • Ethernet cable is not properly connected or network is be played. disconnected. Check the connection status. • Program is being broadcast in non-compatible format. Only Internet radio programs in MP3 and WMA can be played on this set. • The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated. Check the computer’s or router’s firewall settings. • Radio station is not currently broadcasting. Choose a radio station that is currently broadcasting. • IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address. Files stored on a • Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible computer cannot be format. played. • You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set. • Set and computer are connected by USB cable. The set’s USB port cannot be used for connection to a computer. 132 Page 24 – 62 – – – – 76, 77 76, 77 – 26, 27 76, 77 – 78, 79 51 76, 77 76 – Symptom Cause / Countermeasure Server is not found, • The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated. Check the or it is not possible to computer’s or router’s firewall settings. connect to the server. • Computer’s power is not turned on. Turn on the power. • Server is not running. Launch the server. • Set’s IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address. iPod cannot be • Some iPods do not support being used connected directly to the played. USB port. Cannot connect to • Radio station is not currently broadcasting. Wait a while before preset or favorite trying again. radio stations. • Radio station is not currently in service. It is not possible to connect to radio stations that are no longer in service. For some radio • Station is congested or not currently broadcasting. Wait a while stations, “Server before trying again. Full” or “Connection Down” is displayed and station cannot be connected to. Sound is broken • Network’s signal transfer speed is slow or communications lines during playback. or radio station is congested. This is not a malfunction. When playing broadcast data with a high bit rate, the sound may be broken, depending on the communications conditions. Sound quality is poor • File being played has a low bit rate. This is not a malfunction. or played sound is noisy. Cannot login to • Login information is incorrect. Check if the Username for Rhapsody. (“Incorrect Rhapsody has been properly entered. Re-enter the Password. Username or (Password is not displayed.) Password” is www.rhapsody.com/denon displayed.) Cannot compile • The AVR-4810CI does not respond to playlist compilation. When Playlist. the playlist is compiled in PC Application, it is registered to “My Library”. In this way, the playlist can be played in AVR-4810CI. Cannot delete • Cannot be done with AVR-4810CI. Delete from PC Application. Rhapsody Channel registered in “My Channels”. Cannot delete Tracks, • Cannot be done with AVR-4810CI. Delete from PC Application. Playlists, Channels registered in “My Library”. Cannot login to • Login information is incorrect. Check if the Username for Napster Napster. (“Incorrect has been properly entered. Re-enter the Password. (Password is Username or not displayed.) Password” is http://www.napster.com/choose/index_default.html displayed.) Page – – – 51 24 – – – – – 51 – – – 55 Symptom Cannot connect to network. ”CHECK ANTENNA” is displayed. ”NO SIGNAL” is displayed. ”OFF AIR” is displayed. Receiving only XM channels 0 and 1. “XM - - - ” is displayed. – – – Symptom “CHECK SIRIUS TUNER” is displayed. ”ANTENNA ERROR” is displayed. ”NO SIGNAL” is displayed. ”INVALID CHANNEL” is displayed. ”ACQUIRING SIGNAL” is displayed. ”Call SIRIUS”z is displayed. ”SUBSCRIPTION UPDATED” is displayed. ”Enter Lock Code [ ]” is displayed. Cause / Countermeasure • The SiriusConnect Home Tuner unit is not connected. Check that the connections are correct. • The antenna is not connected. Check that the connections are correct. • The signal cannot be received. Reposition the antenna. Page 22 22 – • Channel is not present. Select another channel. – • The signal cannot be received. Reposition your SiriusConnect Home Tuner and Home Dock antenna. • Displays while SiriusConnect HomeTuner is connected. Reposition your SiriusConnect Home Tuner and Home Dock antenna. • Channels are not subscribed to. If you subscribe to the channel, you can receive the channel. • While updating contract information. – • Selected channels are locked. Please insert pass word (4 digits) into “[ ]”. – – – – z: After scroll displays “Call 888-539-....” twice, displays “Call SIRIUS”. Specifications “CH UNAVAILABLE” is displayed. 21 GSIRIUS Satellite RadioH Troubleshooting – – – Remote Control Information • The selected channel is not available. The channel may have been reassigned to a different channel number. This message may occur initially with a new radio or a radio that has not received XM’s signal for an extended period. Consult the latest channel guide at www.xmradio.com or www.xmradio.ca for the current list of channels. For cases of a new radio or a radio that has not received XM’s signal for an extended period, allow the radio to receive the XM satellite signal for at least 5 minutes and then try to select the channel again. • Channel is not present. Select another channel. – Page – Multi-zone Page 21 “UPGRADE XM TUNER” is displayed. Cause / Countermeasure • You selected an XM channel that is blocked or cannot be received with your XM subscription package. Consult the latest channel guide at www.xmradio.com or www.xmradio.ca for the current list of channels. For information on receiving this channel, visit www.xmradio.com or www.xmradio.ca contact XM Satellite Radio at 1-800-967-2346 or 1-877-438-9677. • The connected XM Mini-Tuner is not compatible with the AVR4810CI. Please use an XM Rev4x-compatible XM Mini-Tuner. Playback Cause / Countermeasure • The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed or not fully seated in the XM Mini-Tuner Dock or the XM Mini-Tuner dock is not connected to the AVR-4810CI. Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the dock and check the XM Mini-Tuner dock cable is connected to the AVR-4810CI. • The XM antenna is not connected to the XM Mini-Tuner Dock or the XM antenna cable is damaged. Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to the XM Mini-Tuner Dock and check the antenna cable for damage. Replace the XM antenna if the cable is damaged. • The signal cannot be received. Reposition your XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock antenna. • The selected channel is not currently broadcasting. Select another channel. • The XM Mini-Tuner is not activated. Contact XM Radio. – GXM Satellite RadioH Symptom “CHECK XM TUNER” is displayed. Symptom “CH UNAUTHORIZED” is displayed. Settings Page 46 ~ 48 Connections Played sound is interrupted or sound cannot be played. Cause / Countermeasure • The settings of the SSID and network key (WEP) are incorrect. Match the network settings with the AVR-4810CI’s settings. • The reception is poor and the signals cannot be received. Shorten the distance from the wireless LAN’s access point, remove any obstacles and otherwise improve visibility, then try reconnecting. Also install away from microwave ovens and the access points of other networks. • There are multiple networks and the usable channels overlap. Set the access point’s channel settings away from the channels used for other networks. Alternatively, connect using a network cable. • There are multiple networks and the usable channels overlap. Set the access point’s channel settings away from the channels used for other networks. Alternatively, connect using a network cable. Getting Started GWireless LANH – 133 Getting Started Restoring All the Settings to as They were at the Time of Purchase (Resetting the Microprocessor) Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed. When the microprocessor is reset, all the settings are reset to their default values. Connections <STANDARD> <DSP SIMULATION> Settings Playback Multi-zone <POWER> Remote Control Information 1 Turn off the power using <POWER>. <POWER> while simultaneously pressing <STANDARD> and <DSP 2 Press SIMULATION>. the display starts flashing at intervals of about 1 second, release the two 3 Once buttons. Troubleshooting If in step 3 the display does not flash at intervals of about 1 second, start over from step 1. Specifications 134 n Audio section • Power amplifier Rated output: Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms C (color) signal — 0.286 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms 5 Hz ~ 10 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when video convert set to “OFF”) Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms PB / CB signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms PR / CR signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms 5 Hz ~ 100 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when video convert set to “OFF”) 85 dB 0.02 % n Wireless LAN Network type (wireless LAN standards): Conforming to IEEE 802.11b Conforming to IEEE 802.11g (Conforming to Wi-Fi®)z Transfer rate: DS-SS: 11 / 5.5 / 2 / 1 Mbps (Automatic switching) OFDM: 54 / 48 / 36 / 24 / 18 / 12 / 9 / 6 Mbps (Automatic switching) Security: SSID (Network name) WEP key (network key) (64/128 bits) WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES) WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES) Used frequency range: 2,412 MHz ~ 2,462 MHz No. of channels: Conforming to IEEE 802.11b : 11ch (DS-SS) (Of which 1 channel used) Conforming to IEEE 802.11g : 11ch (OFDM) (Of which 1 channel used) n General Power supply: Power consumption: AC 120 V, 60 Hz 9.5 A 0.1 W (Standby) 434 (W) x 195 (H) x 424 (D) mm (17-3/32” x 7-43/64” x 16-11/16”) 19.1 kg (42 lbs 2 oz) n Main remote control unit (RC-1126) Batteries: Maximum external dimensions: Weight: Specifications 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms 5 Hz ~ 10 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when video convert set to “OFF”) 530 kHz ~ 1710 kHz 20 µV Troubleshooting Frequency response: Total harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz): [AM] LR6/AA Type (two batteries) 63 (W) x 238 (H) x 31 (D) mm (2-31/64” x 9-3/8” x 1-7/32”) 190 g (Approx 6.7 oz) (including batteries) n Sub remote control unit (RC-1121) Batteries: Maximum external dimensions: Weight: Remote Control Information Frequency response: • Color component video connector Input / output level and impedance: Receiving Range: Usable Sensitivity: S/N (IHF-A): [FM] (note: µV at 75 Ω/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10-15 W) 87.5 MHz ~ 107.9 MHz 1.5 µV (14.8 dBf) MONO 78 dB STEREO 68 dB HD 85 dB MONO 0.1 % STEREO 0.2 % HD 0.02 % Multi-zone Standard video connectors Input / output level and impedance: Frequency response: S-Video connectors Input / output level and impedance: n HD Radio section Maximum external dimensions: Weight: n Video section • • Total harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz): 520 kHz ~ 1710 kHz 19 µV Playback Output connectors: • Analog Input sensitivity / Input impedance: 200 mV / 12 kΩ/kohms (except for EXT. IN (SW / S / SB), CD, PHONO, V. AUX) 200 mV / 47 kΩ/kohms (EXT. IN (SW / S / SB), CD, PHONO, V. AUX) Frequency response: 10 Hz ~ 100 kHz +1, –3 dB (DIRECT mode) S/N: 102 dB (IHF–A weighted, DIRECT mode) Distortion: 0.005 % (20 Hz ~ 20 kHz) (DIRECT mode) Rated output: 1.2 V • Digital D/A output: Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback) Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB) S/N ratio — 102 dB Dynamic range — 100 dB Digital input: Format — Digital audio interface • Phono equalizer (PHONO input — REC OUT) Input sensitivity: 2.5 mV RIAA deviation: ±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz) S/N: 74 dB (A weighting) Rated output: 150 mV Distortion factor: 0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V) Receiving Range: Usable Sensitivity: 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: S/N (IHF-A): [AM] Settings Front: 140 W + 140 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 180 W + 180 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Center: 140 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 180 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Surround: 140 W + 140 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 180 W + 180 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Surround back: 140 W + 140 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 180 W + 180 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Front height / Front wide: 140 W + 140 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 180 W + 180 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) 150 W x 2ch (8 Ω/ohms) 220 W x 2ch (4 Ω/ohms) 6 ~ 16 Ω/ohms [FM] (note: µV at 75 Ω/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10-15 W) 87.5 MHz ~ 107.9 MHz 1.0 μV (11.2 dBf) MONO 1.6 μV (15.3 dBf) STEREO 23 μV (38.5 dBf) MONO 77 dB STEREO 72 dB MONO 0.2 % STEREO 0.3 % Connections Dynamic power: n Tuner section Getting Started Specifications R03/AAA Type (two batteries) 49 (W) x 220 (H) x 24.5 (D) mm (1-59/64” x 8-21/32” x 31/32”) 114 g (Approx 4 oz) (including batteries) z: W i-Fi® conformity indicates tested and proven interoperability by the “Wi-Fi Alliance”, a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices. b For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice. 135 List of preset codes / Liste de codes préréglés Cambridge Soundworks Cat Centrex Cinea CineVision Citizen Clairtone Clatronic Coby Craig Creative Blu-ray Disc Player D I L M O P S Denon Insignia Integra LG Magnavox Marantz Olevia Onkyo Panasonic Philips Pioneer Samsung Sharp Sony Sylvania 32258 30675 32147 30741 30675 32414 32331 32147 31641 32084, 32434 30142, 32442 30199 32250 31516 30675 CyberHome Cytron D Dansai Decca Denon HD-DVD Player I L M O R T X Integra LG Microsoft Onkyo RCA Toshiba Xbox 31769 30741 32083 31769 31769 31769 32083 E DVD Player 1 A B C 3D LAB A-Trend Accurian AEG Aiwa Akai Alba Allegro Amstrad Apex Digital Arrgo BBK Bel Canto Design Black Diamond Blue Parade Blue Sky Bose Brandt Broksonic Bush California Audio Labs 30503, 30539 30714 30675 30788 30533, 30641 30695, 30705, 30770, 30899 30672 30869 30713 30533, 30672,31056, 31061 31023 31224 31571 30713 30571 30695, 30713 32023 30651 30695, 31419 30690 30490 PRESET CODE Daewoo F G Digitor Digitrex Disney DiViDo Dual Durabrand DVD2000 Elta Emerson Enterprise Entivo Enzer ESA Firstline Fisher Funai Gateway GE GFM Go Video H GoldStar Gradiente Grundig H&B Harman/Kardon Helios Hello Kitty HiMAX Hitachi Hiteker 30690 30789 30672 30831 30833, 30869, 31483 30695 30571 30788 31086, 31321 30831 30503, 30539 30714, 30816, 31023, 31129, 31502 30705 30705, 30714, 30770, 30833, 30869, 31172 30770 30770 30490, 30634, 31634, 31844, [32134]z 31005 30672 30675 30705 30675 30713, 31023 30521 30690 30591, 30675, 30821, 31268 30591 30503, 30539 30770 30821, 31268 30651 30670 30675, 31268 31158 30522, 30815 30675, 31268 30573, 30715, 30741, 30744, 30783, 30833, 30869, 31044, 31075, 31099, 31158, 31483, 31730 30741, 30869 30490, 30651 30539, 30705, 30775 30850 30582, 30702, 31229 32192 30831 30843 30573, 30664, 31748 30672 I J Humax Hyundai Insignia Integra IRT JBL JMB JVC K L M Kenwood Kiiro Kiss Kloss Koss Lasonic Lecson Lenco Lenoxx LG LiteOn Loewe Logix Magnasonic Magnavox N Marantz McIntosh Medion Memorex MiCO Microsoft Minato Mitsubishi NAD Naiko NEC O Onkyo P Oppo Optimus Orion Oritron Palsonic Panasonic Philco Philips Pioneer 31588 30850 30675, 31268 30571, 30627, 31634, 31769 30783 30702, 31926 30695 30558, 30623, 30867, 31164, 31275, 31550, 31597, 31602, 31901 30490, 30534, 30682 30770 30841 30533 30651, 31061 30627, 30789 31533 30774 30838 30591, 30741, 30869, 31906 31058, 31158 30511, 30741 30783 30651, 30675 30503, 30539, 30646, 30675, 30713, 30821, 30885, 31268, 31354, 31506 30503, 30539, 30675 31533, 31273 30651 30695, 30831, 32213 30723, 30751 30522, 32083 30752 30521, 31521 30741 30770 30869 30503, 30627, 31612, 31769, 31985 30575, 31224, 32185 30571 31695 30651 30672 30490, 30503, 30571, 30632, 30703, 31362, 31462, 31490, 31579, 31641, 31762, 31834 30675, 30690, 30733, 30862 30503, 30539, 30646, 30675, 30713, 30854, 30885, 31158, 31267, 31340, 31354, 31506, 32084 30142, 30525, 30571, 30631, 30632, 31460, 31571, 31965 Q R Polaroid Polk Audio Portland Presidian Proceed Proscan Qwestar Radionette RadioShack RCA S Realistic Redstar Reoc Rio Rotel Saba Sampo Samsung Sansui Schneider Schwaiger Sensory Science Sharp Sherwood Shinsonic Simaudio Singer Skyworth SM Electronic Sonic Blue Sony T Superscan Sylvania Symphonic Tatung Teac Technics Technika Tevion Theta Digital Thomson Tivo Toshiba U Tredex Unimax United 31061, 31086 30539 30770 30675 30672 30522 30651 30741 30571 30522, 30571, 30822, 31022, 31132, 31769, 31965 30571 30763 30752 30869 30623 30651 30752 30199, 30490, 30573, 30744, 30899, 31044, 31075, 31748, 31932 30695 30783 30752 31158 30630, 30675, 30752, 31256, 31419, 32015 30770 30533 30885 30751 30898 30690 30573, 30715, 30783, 30869, 31099 30533, 30772, 30864, 31033, 31070, 31431, 31433, 31516, 31533, 31536, 31633, 31981 30821 30675, 30821, 31268 30675, 30821, 31268 30770 30571, 30759, 31006 30490, 30703 30770 30651 30571 30511, 30522, 30551 31503, 31588 30503, 30539, 30573, 30695, 31045, 31154, 31503, 31510, 31588, 31769 30843 30770 30788 W X Y Z Universum Urban Concepts Wharfedale Xbox Yamaha Zenith 30591 30503, 30539 30686 30522, 32083 30490, 30539, 30545, 30646, 30817, 31840 30503, 30591, 30741, 30869, 31906 DVD Recorder A B C F G H J K L M P P R S Accurian Apex Digital Broksonic Coby CyberHome Funai Gateway Go Video Humax JVC Kreisen LG LiteOn Magnavox Packard Bell Panasonic Philips Pioneer Polaroid RCA Samsung Sanyo Sensory Science Sharp Sony T Z Sylvania Toshiba Zenith 30675, 31416 31056 31419 31086 31129, 31502 30675 31158 30741, 31158, 31730 31588 31164, 31275 31421 30741 31158, 31416 30646, 30675, 61506 31321 30490, 31579 30646, 31340 30631, 31460 31086 30522 30490 30670 31158 30675 31033, 31070, 31431, 31433, 31536 30675 31510, 31588 30741 CD Player A B C Acoustic Research Aiwa Arcam Audio Research Burmester Cairn California Audio Labs Cambridge Soundworks Carver 40420 40157 40157 40157 40420 40157 40029, 40303 40157 40157, 40179 Curtis Mathes D F G H I J K L M Denon DKK DMX Electronics Fisher Garrard Genexxa Grundig Hafler Harman/Kardon Hitachi Inkel Integra Jerrold JVC Kenwood KLH Krell Linn LXI Magnavox Marantz Matsui MCS Memorex Micromega Miro Mission Modulaire N O MTC Musical Fidelity Myryad NAD NSM Onkyo Optimus P Q R Panasonic Parasound Penney Philips Pioneer Polk Audio Proceed Proton QED Quad Quasar Radiola RadioShack 40032 40003, 40766, 40873, 42867, 42868, 43867, 43868 40000 40157 40000, 40179 40393, 40420 40032 40157 40173 40100, 40157, 40173 40032 40157 40101 40003 40032, 40072 40000, 40028, 40029, 40037, 40190, 40681 41318 40157 40157 40179 40157 40029, 40157 40157 40029 40000, 40032, 40179, 40420, 40468 40157 40000 40157 40000, 40032, 40087, 40179, 40420, 40468 40420 40393 40157 40721 40157 40101, 40868 40000, 40032, 40037, 40087, 40179, 40393, 40420, 40468 40029, 40303, 40388, 40752 40420 40029 40157 40032, 40468 40157 40420 40157 40157 40157 40029 40157 40000, 40032, 40179, 40420, 40468 RCA Realistic S T V W Y Revox Rotel SAE Sansui Sanyo Sears Sharp Sonic Frontiers Sony Sugden Sylvania TAG McLaren Tandy Tascam Teac Technics Techwood Thule Audio Victor Wards Yamaha Yorx 40032, 40053, 40179, 40420, 40468 40000, 40032, 40087, 40179, 40420, 40468 40157 40157, 40420 40157 40000, 40157 40000, 40087, 40179 40179 40037 40157 40000, 40100, 40185, 40490 40157 40157 40157 40032 40393, 40420 40390, 40420, 40490 40029, 40303 40303 40157 40072 40032, 40053, 40087, 40157, 40179 40036, 40490, 40868 40000 C D E CD Recorder D R S T Denon RCA Sony Teac 42868, 43868 40053, 40420 40000, 40100, 41364 40420 F G Video Cassette Recorder A B A-Mark ABS Admiral Adventura Aiko Aiwa Akai Alba Alienware Allegro America Action American High Anam National Asha Astra Audiovox Beaumark 20037, 20240, 20278 21972 20048, 20060 20037, 20240 20278 20037, 20742, 21137 20315 20278 21972 21137 20278 20081 20226 20240 20240 20037, 20278 20240 H I Bell & Howell Broksonic Calix Candle Carrera Carver CCE Cineral CineVision Citizen Classic Colortyme Craig Crosley Crown Curtis Mathes Cybernex CyberPower Daewoo Daytron Dell Denon DirecTV Dynatech Electrohome Electrophonic Emerex 20048 20348 20037 20037 20240 20081 20278 20278 21137 20037, 20240, 20278 20037 20045, 20060, 20278 20037, 20240 20081 20278 20060, 20240, 20278 20240 21972 20037, 20045, 20278, 21137 20037, 20278 21972 20042, 20081 20739 20240 20037, 20043, 20060, 20240 20037 20032 20037, 20043, 20240, 20278, Emerson 20348, 20593, 21593 ESA 21137 Funai 20037, 20278, 20593, 21593 Gateway 21972 GE 20048, 20060, 20240 Gemini 20060 Genexxa 20037, 20278 GFM 21593 Go Video 20240, 20614, 21137 GoldStar 20037, 20278, 21137 Goodmans 20037, 20278, 21137 Granada 20042, 20081 Grundig 20081, 20226 Harman/Kardon 20081 Hewlett Packard 21972 Hitachi 20037, 20042, 20045, 20089 Howard Computers 21972 HP 21972 Hughes Network 20042, 20739 Systems Humax 20739 Hush 21972 iBUYPOWER 21972 Instant Replay 20226 ITT Nokia 20240 J K L M Janeil Jensen JVC KEC Kenwood Kodak LG Lifetec Linksys Lloyd’s Loewe Logik Lumatron LXI M Electronic Magnasonic Magnavox Magnin Marantz Marta Matsui Matsushita Media Center PC Medion Memorex Metz MGA MGN Technology Microsoft Midland Mind Minolta Mitsubishi N O Motorola MTC NAD NEC Nikko Nikkodo Nishi Niveus Media Noblex Northgate Olympus Optimus Orion P Panasonic Penney Pentax 20240 20067 20067, 21162 20037, 20278 20067 20037 20037, 20240, 21137 20348 21972 20240 20081 20240 20278 20037, 20042, 20067 20240 20037, 20240, 20278, 20593 20037, 20048, 20081, 20226, 20240, 20593, 20618, 21593 20240 20081 20037 20037, 20348 20081, 21162 21972 20348 20037, 20048, 20240, 20278, 20348, 21162 20037 20043, 20060, 20240 20240 21972 20240 21972 20042 20042, 20043, 20048, 20060, 20067 20048 20240 20240 20067 20037, 20278 20037, 20278 20240 21972 20240 21972 20226 20037, 20048, 20240, 20593, 21162 20240, 20278 20225, 20226, 20614, 20616, 20837, 21162 20037, 20042, 20067, 20081, 20240 20042 Philco Philips Q R Pilot Pioneer Polk Audio Portland Presidian Profitronic Proscan Pulsar Pulser Quasar RadioShack Radix Randex RCA Realistic S ReplayTV Ricavision Rio Samsung Samtron Sanky Sansui Sanyo Scott Sears Sharp Shintom Shogun Siemens Signature Singer Sonic Blue Sony T Stack 9 STS Sylvania Symphonic Systemax Tagar Systems Tashiko Tatung Teac Technics Teknika Telecorder Thomson Tisonic 20081 20045, 20048, 20081, 20616, 20618, 20739 20037 20042, 20067, 20081, 21337 20081 20278 21593 20240 20060 20240, 20278 20240 20226, 21162 20037, 20048, 20240, 21162 20037 20037 20042, 20045, 20048, 20060, 20240, 20880 20037, 20048, 20240, 20278, 21162 20614, 20616 21972 21137 20045, 20060, 20240, 20739 20240 20048 20067, 20240 20240 20043, 20045 20037, 20042, 20043, 20045, 20048, 20060, 20067 20032, 20048 20240 20240 20037 20037, 20048, 20060 20037, 20240 20614, 20616, 21137 20032, 20067, 20226, 20636, 21032, 21972 21972 20042 20043, 20081, 20593, 21593 20240, 20539, 21593 21972 21972 20037 20048, 20067, 20081 20067 20037 20037 20240 20060 20278 PRESET CODE Tivo TMK TNIX Tocom Toshiba U V W X Z Tosonic Totevision Touch Trix Ultra Unitech Vector Victor Video Concepts Videomagic Videosonic Viewsonic Voodoo Wards Wharfedale White Westinghouse XR-1000 Zenith ZT Group 20618, 20636, [20739]z, 21337, 21996 20240 20037 20240 20043, 20045, 20240, 21008, 21972, 21996 20278 20037, 20240 21972 20037 20045, 20278 20240 20045 20067 20045 20037 20240 21972 21972 20037, 20042, 20043, 20045, 20048, 20060, 20081, 20240 20593 20278 20240 20037, 20278, 21137 21972 Digital(Personal) Video Recorder A C D G H I L M N P ABS Alienware CyberPower Dell DirecTV Gateway Go Video Hewlett Packard Howard Computers HP Hughes Network Systems Humax Hush iBUYPOWER Linksys Media Center PC Microsoft Mind Niveus Media Northgate Panasonic 21972 21972 21972 21972 20739 21972 20614 21972 21972 21972 20739 20739 21972 21972 21972 21972 21972 21972 21972 21972 20614, 20616 PRESET CODE R S T V Z Philips Pioneer RCA ReplayTV Samsung Sonic Blue Sony Stack 9 Systemax Tagar Systems Tivo Toshiba Touch Viewsonic Voodoo ZT Group 20618, 20739 21337 20880 20614, 20616 20739 20614, 20616 20636, 21972 21972 21972 21972 20618, 20636, 20739, 21337 21008, 21972, 21996 21972 21972 21972 21972 Digital (Personal) Video Recorder/ Satellite Combination B D E H M P S T V Bell ExpressVu 00775 00099, 00392, 00639, 01076, DirecTV 01142, 01377, 01442, 20739 Dish Network System 00775, 01505 Dishpro 00775, 01505 Echostar 00775, 01505 Expressvu 00775 Hughes Network 01142, 01442, 20739 Systems Motorola 00869 Philips 01142, 01442 , 20739 Proscan 00392 Samsung 01442, 20739 Sony 00639 Star Choice 00869 Tivo 01142, 01442, 20739 ViewSat 01994 Digital(Personal) Video Recorder/Cable Combination C D M P S Cisco Digeo Motorola Pace Pioneer Scientific Atlanta Supercable 01877 01187 01187, 01376 00237, 01877 01877 01877 00276 Tape Deck A Aiwa 20029, 20197, 20200 C D G H J K M O P R S T V W Y Akai Carver Denon Garrard Grundig Harman/Kardon JVC Kenwood Magnavox Marantz Mitsubishi Onkyo Optimus Panasonic Philips Pioneer Polk Audio RCA Sansui Sony Teac Technics Technovox Victor Wards Yamaha 20283 20029 20076, 20371, 22471 20308 20029 20029, 20182 20244, 20273 20070 20029 20009, 20029 20283 20135, 20282 20027, 20220 20229 20029 20027, 20099, 20220 20029 20027, 20220 20009, 20029 20170, 20243, 20291 20308 20229 20229 20273 20027 20094, 20097 American High B Television A A-Mark A.R. Systems Accuscan Accuscreen Acoustic Research Action Acura Admiral Advent Adventuri Adyson Agna Aiko Aiwa Akai Alaron Alba Alfide Alleron Ambassador 10047, 10054 10352, 10556 10047 10001 11269 10030 10009 10017, 10047, 10051, 10054, 10163, 10264, 10418 10761, 11933 10000 10217 10150 10092 10701 10009, 10030, 10060, 10145, 10208, 10672, 10702, 10812, 11207, 11537, 11675, 11676, 11903, 12078 10170 10009, 10037, 10073, 10163, 10218, 10352, 10371 10672 10030, 10170 10150 C 10000, 10060 10009, 10011, 10163, 10171, Amstrad 10371, 10433 Amtron 10000 Anam 10009 AOC 10030 Apex Digital 10156, 10765, 11217, 11943 AR 10352, 10556 Aristocrat 10163 Asuka 10218 10092, 10623, 10802, 10875, Audiovox 11937, 11951, 11952 Aventura 10171 Awa 10009 Axion 11937 Bang & Olufsen 10565 Barco 10556 Basic Line 10009, 10218 Beaumark 10017, 10030, 10178 Beko 10714, 10715 Belcor 10030 Bell & Howell 10054, 10154 BenQ 11032 Blue Sky 10556 Boots 10217 Brionvega 10362 Brockwood 10030, 10178 Broksonic 11911, 11938 Brother 10264 Bush 10698, 11556 Byd:sign 11309 Candle 10030 10017, 10030, 10036, 10092, Capehart 10178 Carnivale 10030 Carver 10054, 10170 CCE 10037, 10217 Celebrity 10000 Celera 10765 Centrex 10780 Changhong 10156, 10765, 10820, 10821 Cineral 10092 Citek 10047 10000, 10001, 10030, 10035, Citizen 10054, 10060, 10092, 10171 Classic 10030, 10092 10017, 10030, 10047, 10054, Colortyme 10060, 10178 Commercial Solutions 10047, 11447 Conic 10178 Craig 10171 10000, 10030, 10054, 10074, Crosley 10171, 10370 Crown 10672 Crown Mustang 10672 Curtis Mathes D Daewoo Dayton Daytron Decca Dell E Denon Dream Vision Dumont Durabrand Dynatech Dynex Eaton Electroband Electrograph Electrohome Elite Elta Emerald Emerson F Encross Envision ESA Ferguson Fisher Fujitsu G Funai Gateway GE Gemini GFM Gibralter Go Video Go Vision GoldStar Goodmans Gradiente Granada Grundig H Grundy Haier 10000, 10030, 10035, 10037, 10047, 10051, 10054, 10060, 10145, 10154, 10166, 10178, 10702, 11147, 11347 10009, 10036, 10092, 10109, 10178, 10264, 10623, 10634, 10661, 10672, 11661, 11755, 11756 10092 10030, 10036, 10092, 10178 10217 11080, 11178, 11264, 11403, 11863 10145 11164 10017, 10178 10171, 10178 10217 11463 10060 10000 11755 10000, 10030, 10073, 10150, 10154, 10178 10218 10009, 10264 10178 10017, 10036, 10047, 10073, 10150, 10154, 10170, 10171, 10178, 10195, 10623, 11394, 11911, 11944 10876 10030, 10813 10171, 10812, 11944 10625 10000, 10054, 10154, 10217 10217, 10683, 10809, 10853, 12008 10000, 10171, 11271, 11904 11755, 11756 10000, 10030, 10035, 10047, 10051, 10060, 10178, 10560, 11147, 11347, 11447, 11917, 11922 10047 10171 10000, 10017, 10030 10886 11937 10001, 10009, 10030, 10036, 10037, 10047, 10054, 10073, 10178 10037 10053, 10170 10037 10037, 10070, 10163, 10195, 10672, 10683, 10706 10195 11749 Hallmark Hanseatic Harley Davidson Harman/Kardon Harsper Heathkit Helios Hewlett Packard Hikone Hitachi I J HP Hyundai ICE Ima Infinity InFocus Innova Insignia Inteq ITT Nokia IX JBL JCB Jensen JIL Jinxing Johnson Jutan JVC K L Kamp Kawasho KDS KEC Kennex Kenwood Kioto KLH Kloss Konka Kreisen KTV Lark LG Lloyd’s Loewe Logik 10178 10556 10000, 10030, 10060, 10178, 11904 10054 11206 10017 10865 11494 10218 10000, 10017, 10035, 10036, 10047, 10051, 10054, 10109, 10145, 10163, 11145, 11576, 11643, 11904, 11960 11494 10849, 10865 10264 10178 10054 11164 10037 10171, 11423, 11517, 11564 10017, 10145 10070, 10163, 10195, 10361 10877 10054 10000 10761, 11933 10030 10037, 10556 10455 10030 10030, 10036, 10053, 10054, 10070, 10371, 10650, 10653, 10731, 11253, 11774, 11923 10017, 10217 10030 11498 10060 10668 10030 10556 10156, 10765, 11962 10030 10218, 10371 10876 10030, 10217 10154 10017, 10030, 10037, 10054, 10060, 10178, 10856, 11178, 11423, 11637, 11768 10030, 11904 10512, 10633, 10790 10011 Lumatron Luxor LXI M MAG Magnasonic Magnavox Majestic Marantz Mark Matsui Matsushita Maxent Megatron Memorex Mermaid MGA MGN Technology Micro Genius Micromaxx Midland Minato Mitsubishi Motorola MTC Multitech N NAD National NEC O NetTV Nikko Nikkodo Niko Nishi Nokia Norcent NTC NuVision Nyon Olevia 10037, 10073, 10163, 10217, 10264, 10361, 10556 10163 10000, 10001, 10017, 10030, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10047, 10051, 10053, 10054, 10060, 10154, 10156, 10166, 10171, 10178, 10208 11498 10000, 10030, 10054, 10092, 10109, 10156 10000, 10030, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10047, 10051, 10054, 10060, 10092, 10154, 10171, 10706, 10780, 10802, 11254, 11454, 11755, 11866, 11904, 11944 10017 10030, 10037, 10054, 10556, 10704, 10854, 10855, 11454 10037 10009, 10011, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10352, 10371, 10443 10051, 10650 11755, 11756 10009, 10047, 10145, 10178 10030, 10035, 10037, 10150, 10154, 10178, 10195, 10877, 11037, 11903, 11911 10037 10030, 10150, 10178 10178 10150 10714, 10808 10017, 10047, 10051 10037, 10556 10011, 10030, 10036, 10108, 10150, 10154, 10178, 10195, 10250, 10836, 11917 10051, 10054, 10150 10011, 10030, 10060, 10092 10217 10037, 10156, 10166, 10178, 10361, 10866, 11156 10226 10030, 10036, 10047, 10170, 10178, 10455, 10704, 11270, 11704, 11797 11755 10030, 10092, 10178 10030, 10092, 10178 11618 10030 10606, 10631 10824 10092 11657, 12158 10000 11144, 11240, 11331, 11610 Onwa Optimus Optoma Orion P Pace Pacific Palsonic Panasonic Panda Pausa Paxonic PCE Penney Petters Philco Philips Pilot Pioneer Polaroid Q R Portland Prima Prism Proscan Protec Proton Proview ProVision Pulsar Pulser Quartz Quasar R-Line Rabbit RadioShack RCA Realistic Reoc Revox Rowa 10602 10030, 10150, 10154, 10166, 10178, 10650 10887 10017, 10178, 10443, 10880, 11463, 11911 10092 10037, 10556, 10714, 11037, 11137 10264, 10773 10000, 10030, 10035, 10051, 10054, 10156, 10163, 10226, 10367, 10650, 11291, 11310, 11457, 11480, 11941, 11946, 11947 10698, 10706, 10780 10009 10030, 10060 10060, 10156 10000, 10030, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10047, 10051, 10060, 10070, 10108, 10156, 10178, 11347 11523 10030, 10054, 10074, 10145, 10171, 11271, 11394 10030, 10037, 10054, 10171, 10374, 10512, 10556, 10690, 11254, 11454, 11744, 11961 10011, 10030, 10051, 10060, 10178 10109, 10163, 10166, 10287, 10679, 10866, 11260, 11457 10765, 10865, 11276, 11316, 11341, 11498, 11523, 11962, 12120 10092 10761, 11933 10051 10047, 11347, 11447, 11922 10009, 10037, 10217, 10264 10009, 10178 11498 10037, 10556, 11037 10017, 10092 10092, 10178 10150, 10178 10035, 10051, 10650 10037 10047 10030, 10047, 10150, 10154, 10178, 11904 10000, 10047, 10051, 10054, 10090, 10178, 10679, 11047, 11147, 11247, 11347, 11447, 11547, 11781, 11917, 11922, 11953, 11958, 12247 10030, 10047, 10150, 10154, 10178 10714 10037 10698, 10712 S Runco Saisho Sampo 10017, 10030, 10060, 11629 10011 10030, 10047, 11755, 11756 10009, 10017, 10030, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10047, 10054, 10060, 10154, 10178, 10208, Samsung 10217, 10264, 10362, 10370, 10618, 10650, 10702, 10766, 10812, 10814, 11060, 11903, 11959 Sanky 10030, 10060 10030, 10060, 10171, 10371, Sansui 11904, 11911 10000, 10011, 10036, 10037, Sanyo 10047, 10054, 10154, 10170, 10171, 10208, 11142, 11755 Saville 10060 Sceptre 10878, 11217, 11599 Schneider 10070 Scotch 10178 Scott 10030, 10178, 11711 10000, 10001, 10017, 10030, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10047, Sears 10051, 10053, 10054, 10060, 10154, 10156, 10166, 10171, 10178, 10208, 11904 10036, 10054, 10668, 10818, Sharp 11393, 11602, 11917 Shivaki 10037, 10178, 10374, 10556 Siemens 10145, 10195, 10200, 10327 Signature 10030, 10047 Simpson 10011, 10030, 10178 Singer 10060, 10092 Sky-North 10037 Solar Drape 10000 Sole 10813 10000, 10011, 10017, 10036, 10053, 10150, 10154, 10353, Sony [10810]z, 11505, 11651, 11685, 11751, 11904 Soundesign 10178 Sova 11952 Soyo 11826, 11834 Spectravision 10156, 10178 Spectroniq 11498 Squareview 10171 SR2000 10154, 10171 Standard Components 10009, 10218 Superscan 10864, 11944 Supreme 10000 SV2000 10054 SVA 10865 10000, 10030, 10036, 10037, 10047, 10051, 10054, 10092, Sylvania 10154, 10171, 10178, 10876, 11271, 11886, 11864, 11886, 11904, 11944 10000, 10171, 10178, 11904, Symphonic 11944 Syntax 11144, 11240, 11331, 11610 T Tandy Tatung Teac Technics Technovox Techwood Teco Tedelex Teknika Telecolor Telefunken Tevion Thomas Thomson TMK TNCi Tocom Toshiba U Totevision Toyomenka Transonic Truetone Ultra Universal Universum V V Vector Research Victor Vidikron Vidtech Viewpia Viewsonic Viking Viore Vizio W Wards Waycon Welton Westinghouse White Westinghouse 10217, 10218 10000, 10037, 10051, 10217, 11756 10009, 10037, 10154, 10264, 10418, 10455, 10698, 10706, 10712, 11037 10051, 10054, 10226 10030, 10217 10051, 10060 11040 10698 10054, 10060, 10092, 10150, 10178 10017 10074, 10109, 10335, 10343, 10625, 10702 10037, 10556, 10668, 11137 10001, 10047, 10178, 11904 10047, 10109, 10287, 10343, 10625, 11447 10178 10017 10156 10011, 10035, 10036, 10060, 10070, 10145, 10150, 10154, 10156, 10166, 10217, 10264, 10508, 10650, 10718, 10845, 11145, 11156, 11164, 11256, 11356, 11508, 11524, 11656, 11704, 11945 10051 10178 10698, 10712 10051 10092 10047 10009, 10011, 10036, 10037, 10070, 10170, 10217, 10264, 10361, 10418, 10512, 10631 10885, 11755, 11756 10030 10053 10054, 11629 10036, 10178 10876 10857, 10864, 10885, 11330, 11578, 11627, 11755, 12087 10060 10054, 11207 10864, 10885, 11755, 11756, 11758 10000, 10001, 10017, 10030, 10035, 10037, 10047, 10051, 10054, 10154, 10166, 10178, 10195, 10866, 11156 10156 10178 10000, 10885, 10889, 11282, 11577, 11712 10623, 10889 PRESET CODE X Y XR-1000 Yamaha Yorx Z Zenith 10154, 10171 10030, 10650 10030 10000, 10017, 10030, 10037, 10047, 10092, 10145, 10171, 10178, 10812, 11145, 11423, 11904, 11911 Television/DVD Combination A B C E F G H I J K M P R S Advent Akai Apex Digital Audiovox Axion Broksonic Citizen Emerson ESA Funai GFM Hitachi Insignia Jensen KLH Magnavox Panasonic Philips Polaroid Prima RCA Samsung Sansui Sharp 11933 11675, 30695 11943 11937, 11951, 11952 11937 30695 30695 11394, 30675, 31268 31268 31268 31268 11960, 31247 31268 11933 11962 11866, 31268 11941, 31490 11961, 30854, 31260 11523, 11962 11933 11948, 11958, 31022 11903, 30899 30695 10818 Sova 11952 11394, 11864, 11886, 30675, 31268, 32194 11524, 30695 Sylvania T Toshiba Television/DVD/Video deck Combination A B E M P R S Akai Broksonic Emerson ESA Magnavox Panasonic RCA Sharp Sylvania Superscan Sylvania 11903, 30899 11938 11944, 30821 11944, 30821 11944, 30821 11946, 11947, 31362, 31462 11953, 31132 11917, 30630 11944 30821 30821 PRESET CODE T Symphonic Toshiba 11944, 30821 11945, 31045 Television/Video deck Combination B A C B D E F G H J L M O P Q R S T W Z America Action Audiovox Broksonic Daewoo Emerson Funai GE Harley Davidson Hitachi JVC Lloyd’s Magnasonic Magnavox Magnin Memorex MGA Mitsubishi Optimus Orion Panasonic Penney Quasar RadioShack RCA Samsung Sansui Sanyo Sears Sony Symphonic Thomas White Westinghouse Zenith 20278 20278 11911 11909 11909, 11911, 20593 11904 11917, 11922, 20240 11904 11904 11923 11904 20593 11904, 20593 20240 21162, 21262 20240 11917 20593, 21162, 21262 11911 21162, 21262 20240 21162 11904 11917, 11922, 20240 11959 11904, 11911 20240 11904 11904 11904, 20593 11904 11909 11904, 11909, 11911 Satellite Set Top Box A A-Mark ABsat ADB AGS Akai Alba Allsat Alltech Amstrad 00345 00123 01259, 01367 00710 00200 00455, 00713 00200 00713 00345, 00847, 01113 D E F G H I J K L M N Asat Aston Atlantic Telephone Austar Bell ExpressVu British Sky Broadcasting Canal Chaparral CNS Crossdigital Digenius Digiwave 00200 00142 01333 00497, 00863, 01176 00775 O P Pace Panarex Panasonic Pansat 00847 00853 00216 01367 01109 00299 01631 00099, 00247, 00392, 00566, 00639, 00749, 01076, 01109, DirecTV 01142, [01377]z, 01414, 01442, 01609, 01749, 01856 Dish Network System 00775, 01505, 01775 Dishpro 00775, 01505, 01775 00455, 00775, 00871, 01505, Echostar 01775 Expressvu 00775, 01775 Fracapro Planet 00871 France Telecom 00871 Funai 01377 Galaxis 00863 GE 00566 General Instrument 00869 GOI 00775, 01775 Gradiente 00887 Grundig 00173, 00847 Hitachi 00749, 01250 Houston 00775 HTS 00775, 01775 Hughes Network 00749, 01142, 01442, 01749 Systems Humax 01790 Hyundai 01159 Indovision 00887 Innova 00099 ISkyB 00887 Jerrold 00869 JVC 00775, 01775 Kathrein 00249, 00658 Lava 01631 LG 01414 Marantz 00200 McIntosh 00869 Mitsubishi 00749 Motorola 00869 Multichoice 01333 Netsat 00099, 00887 Next Level 00869 Nokia 00723, 00873, 01023, 01127 Omega Philips R Pioneer Plasmatic Primestar Proscan RadioShack Radix RCA S Saba Sagem Samsung T U V Z Satstation Schwaiger Siemens SKY Sky Television SM Electronic Sony Star Star Choice Star Trak Televisa Thomson Tivo Toshiba TPS UEC ViewSat Voom Zenith 00887 00455, 00497, 00847, 00887, 01175 01159 00247, 00701, 00847 01159 00099, 00200, 00749, 00775, 00847, 01076, 01142, 01442, 01749 00329, 01308 00442 00869 00392, 00566 00566, 00775, 00869 00882 00143, 00392, 00566, 00775, 01142, 01291, 01442 00710 00820, 01114 01109, 01142, 01276, 01377, 01442, 01609 01083 00394, 01111 00173 00099, 00847, 00887, 01175 01014 00713 00639, 00847 00887 00869 00869 00887 00392, 00566 01142, 01442 00749, 00790, 01749 00820 01333 01232 00869 01856 Cable Set Top Box A B C D A-Mark ABC Accuphase Acorn Action Active Archer BCC Century Cisco Digeo 00008, 00144 00003, 00008, 00237 00003 00237 00237 00237 00237 00276 00008 00877, 01877 01187 F G H I J M N O P R S Director Fosgate General Instrument Gibralter Hitachi Insight Jerrold Macab Mitsubishi Motorola Noos Nova Vision Novaplex Ono Pace Panasonic Paragon Pioneer Regal Samsung Scientific Atlanta T U Starcom Supercable Torx United Cable US Electronics 00476 00276 00003, 00276, 00476 00003 00003, 00008 00476 00003, 00276, 00476 00817 00003 00276, 00476, 01187, 01376 00817 00008 00008 01068 00008, 00237, 00877, 01060, 01068, 01877 00008 00008 00877, 01877 00276 00003 00003, 00008, 00237, 00477, 00877, 01877 00003 00276 00003 00003, 00276 00003, 00008, 00276 IPTV/HDTV Set Top Box A C E G H I I L M ABS ADB Alienware Amino AT&T Cisco CyberPower Epson Gateway Hewlett Packard Howard Computers HP Hush iBUYPOWER Insignia KoolConnect LG Linksys Magnavox Media Center PC Microsoft Mind 01272 02254, 02586 01272 01481, 02482 00858 02345 01272 01563 01272 01272 01272 01272 01272 01272 01415 01481 01415 01272 01563 01272 01272, 02049 01272 N P R S T V X Z Motorola Niveus Media Northgate Philco Ricavision Scientific Atlanta Sony Stack 9 SureWest Sylvania Systemax Tagar Systems Toshiba Touch Viewsonic Voodoo Xbox Zenith ZT Group 00858, 01998 01272 01272 01563 01272 00858, 02345 01272, 01324 01272 01481 01563 01272 01272 01272 01272 01272, 01329 01272 02049 01415 01272 DVD preset codes Codes préréglés DVD 32134 e Model No. Modéle numéro DVD-555 DVD-556 DVD-557 DVD-558 DVD-755 DVD-756 DVD-757 DVD-758 DVD-900 DVD-910 DVD-955 DVD-1000 DVD-1200 DVD-1500 DVD-1710 DVD-1720 Blu-Ray preset codes Codes préréglés Blu-Ray e Model No. Modéle numéro 30490 DVD-1730 DVD-1740 DVD-1910 DVD-1920 DVD-1930CI DVD-1940CI DVD-2200 DVD-2800 DVD-2800g DVD-2900 DVD-2910 DVD-2930CI DVD-3800 DVD-3910 DVD-3930CI DVD-5900 DVD-5910 DVD-5910CI DVD-9000 DVM-715 DVM-735 DVM-745 DVM-1800 DVM-1805 DVM-1815 DVM-1835 DVM-1845 DVM-2815 DVM-2845CI DVM-4800 DVD-800 DVD-1600 DVD-2000 DVD-2500 DVD-3000 DVD-3300 32258 DVD-1800BD DVD-2500BT DVD-3800BD DVD-A1UDCI [ ]z: Preset codes set upon shipment from the factory. [ ]z: Les codes préréglés diffèrent en fonctiom des livraison de l’usine. DVD Player DENON [32134] Video Cassette Recorder Tivo [20739] Television SONY [10810] Satellite Set Top Box DirecTV [01377] PRESET CODE www.denon.com D&M Holdings Inc. Printed in Japan 5411 10340 007DB
advertisement